H98GB
1
Communication
Interface
MD-X2000/2500 Series
2
EtherNet/IP
3
PROFINET
Communication Interface
User’s Manual
4
OPC UA
3-Axis Hybrid Laser Marker
Read this manual before using the product in order to achieve maximum performance.
Keep this manual in a safe place after reading it so that it can be used at any time.
Introduction
Read this manual before using the product in order to achieve maximum performance.
Keep this manual in a safe place after reading it so that it can be used at any time.
Symbols
In this manual, the following symbols alert you to important messages.
Be sure to read the messages.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in product damage as well as property damage.
Indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during operation.
Indicates additional information on proper operation.
Indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.
Indicates the reference pages and items in this manual.
Cautions
(1) Unauthorized reproduction of this manual in whole or part is prohibited.
(2) The contents of this manual may be changed for improvements without prior notice.
n utmost effort has been made to ensure the contents of this manual are as complete as possible. If there are any mistakes or questions, please
(3) A
contact a KEYENCE office listed in the back of the manual.
(4) Regardless of item (3), KEYENCE will not be liable for any effect resulting from the use of this unit.
(5) Any manuals with missing pages or other paging faults will be replaced.
Software License Agreement
Software License Agreement
NOTICE TO USER: PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS “AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY. BY USING ALL OR ANY
PORTION OF THIS SOFTWARE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO
NOT AGREE TO ANY TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE THIS SOFTWARE.
1. Definition
1.1 “use” or “using” means to access, install, download, copy or otherwise benefit from using the functionality of this Software.
1.2“This Software” means the software and all associated documentation provided by KEYENCE.
2. Grant of License.
Conditioned upon compliance with all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement, KEYENCE grants you a nonexclusive and nontransferable
license to install this Software on all computers used by your entity in order to use the KEYENCE product. You may make one copy of this Software
for backup or archive purposes only.
3. Restrictions.
3.1Except for installation of updates or new functions provided by KEYENCE, you may not modify or add any function to this Software.
3.2You may not reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble this Software.
3.3 You may not create derivative works based on this Software.
3.4Other than expressly stated by KEYENCE, you may not resell, retransfer, rent or otherwise redistribute this Software to any third parties.
4. Intellectual Property Rights.
Except as expressly stated herein, KEYENCE reserves all right, title and interest in this Software, and all associated copyrights, trademarks, and
other intellectual property rights therein.
5. Disclaimer.
Keyence is licensing this Software to you “AS IS” and without any warranty of any kind. In no event will KEYENCE or its suppliers be liable to you for
any damages, claims, costs or any lost profits caused by using this Software.
6. Termination.
6.1Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically if you destroy this Software and the copy of this Software in your possession or
voluntarily return this Software to us.
6.2Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically without any notice from KEYENCE if you fail to comply with any of the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Promptly upon termination, you shall cease all use of this Software and destroy all copies, full or partial, of this
Software in your possession or control.
6.3 You will compensate KEYENCE for costs or any lost profits caused by your violation or breach of any term of this Agreement.
7. Governing Law.
7.1This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the substantive laws of Japan without regards to the principles of
conflicts of law.
7.2 If any part of this Agreement is found void and unenforceable, it will not affect the validity of the balance of this Agreement, which shall remain
valid and enforceable according to its terms and conditions.
H98GB
1
Contents
Contents
Introduction
Symbols
Cautions
Software License Agreement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter 1 Communication Interface
Communication command list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
RS-232C Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Connection cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Communication settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Ethernet interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Connection cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Communication settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Communication Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Write/Read command formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Write command format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Read command format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Target specifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Communication format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Header/Delimiter setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Check sum setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Communication priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Command Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
How to interpret the command details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Basic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Laser marker operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Current values and statuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Controller setup/management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Job No.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
String/Logo/Barcode setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Marking parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
Code overprinting parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
3D shape setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
Work flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63
Matrix setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
Group/Counter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77
Operation time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-80
Applied Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
Variable-length support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
Omission of target specifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
If the currently running job No. is the target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
If block No.000 is the target. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83
Omission of parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83
Sending of linked commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84
For WX command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84
For RX command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85
Linking the communication command (WXC command) . . . . . . . . 1-85
Creating new settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-86
Communication Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87
Error response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87
Error list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87
Appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
ASCII code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
Model-Specific Input Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92
Chapter 2 EtherNet/IP
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
What is EtherNet/IP?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
EtherNet/IP communication specifications and functions. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Compatible laser markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Compatible PLCs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Cyclic communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Cyclic communication with the laser marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
How to configure the laser marker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Configuring the PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
PLC settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
How to configure the KEYENCE KV series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
How to configure the OMRON CJ2 series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
How to configure the Allen-Bradley Control/Compact Logix series. . 2-9
2
Status of device assignment of the MD information area. . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Input Assemblies Memory Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Output Assemblies Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Word area for writing a PLC request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Command communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
When “Request” bit does NOT work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Ladder Program Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
KEYENCE KV Series Program Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Changing the job No. and starting the marking
(An example of bit control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Changing the string (An example of bit control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Sending a command (An example of command communication). . 2-23
OMRON PLC CJ2 Series Program Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Changing the job No. and starting the marking (An example of bit
control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Changing the string (An example of bit control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Sending a command (An example of command communication). . 2-26
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Ladder Program Example. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Changing the job No. and starting the marking
(An example of bit control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Changing the string (An example of bit control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Sending a command (An example of command communication). . 2-28
Chapter 3 PROFINET
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Outline of the control by PROFINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Operation Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Devices compatible with PROFINET communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Communication Specification of the Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Basic specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Periodic communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Status of device assignment of the MD information area. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Bit area for writing laser marker state on the PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Word area for writing laser marker state on the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Bit area for writing the request from the PLC
onto the laser marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Word area for writing a PLC request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Command communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Other controller specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Endian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
GSDML file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
When “Request” bit does NOT work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Setup Procedure of PROFINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Connection Procedure for PROFINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Setup of PROFINET Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Checking the setup of the Laser marker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Modify the settings of the Siemens S7-1200 series.. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Controlling the Laser Marker Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Switching and Marking the Job No. of the Laser Marker. . . . . . . . 3-19
Use the command communication to change
and mark the job No.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Reading the Marked 2D Code and
Acquiring the Assessment Result. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Execute Ladder Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Download the created ladder program on the PLC.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Confirm/monitor the state of laser marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Execute ladder program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Chapter 4 OPC UA
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
What is OPC UA?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Security precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
OPC UA Server Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
OPC UA communication specifications and functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
System configuration example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
How to configure the laser marker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Certificate registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Node structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Node functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Alarms & conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Control examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Communication history. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1
1
Communication command list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
RS-232C Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Ethernet interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Communication Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Write/Read command formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Target specifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Communication format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Communication priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Command Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Basic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Laser marker operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Current values and statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Controller setup/management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Job No.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
String/Logo/Barcode setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Marking parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
Code overprinting parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
3D shape setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
Work flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63
Matrix setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
Group/Counter setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77
Operation time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-80
Applied Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
Variable-length support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
Omission of target specifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
Omission of parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83
Sending of linked commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84
Creating new settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-86
Communication Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87
Error response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87
Error list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
ASCII code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
Model-Specific Input Value List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-1
Communication Interface
Communication Interface
Communication command list
Communication command list
Command function
Command
Ref.
Delete the job
DeleteJob
1-11
Request the READY status
Ready
1-11
1
Title (Set/Request)
Title
1-11
Start the marking laser
StartMarking
1-12
Start the guide laser
GuideLaser
1-12
Communication Interface
Stop the guide laser
StopMarking
1-12
Enable/disable the acceptance of start marking (Set/Request)
TriggerLock
1-12
Enable/disable the distance pointer
DistancePointer
1-13
Read a 2D code
Check2DCode4
1-13
Check the focus distance
FocusCheck
1-14
Check the Z coordinate
ZTrackingPointCheck
1-15
Set/Request the XY tracking
XYTracking
1-15
Set/Request the Z tracking
ZTracking
1-16
Z tracking result (matrix) by specifying row and column headers (Set/
Request)
ZTrackingMatrixCell
1-16
Z tracking result (matrix) by specifying a cell number (Set/Request)
ZTrackingMartixCellNo
1-17
Start the XY tracking and Z tracking
3AxisTracking
1-17
Start the calibration (high accuracy) of the Z tracking
ZTrackingManualCalibration
1-17
Internal lighting status (Set/Request)
Lighting
1-18
Running job No. (Set/Request)
JobNo
1-19
Current counter value setting (Set/Request)
Counter
1-19
I/O encoded character (Set/Request)
IoEncodedCharacter
1-19
Request the final marking string
MarkedCharacter
1-19
Request the error status
Error
1-20
Clear an error
ErrorClear
1-20
Basic
Laser marker
operation
Current values and
statuses
Controller setup/
management
1-2
Position correction (Set/Request)
AllPosition
1-21
Date/time setting (Set/Request)
TimeSetting
1-21
Laser power offset (Set/Request)
PowerOffset
1-22
Set barcode verification
BarcodeVerification
1-22
Set/Request the shutter function as it relates to the laser safety
module operation.
LaserSafetyModuleShutter
1-22
Timing of the marking complete output ON (Set/Request)
PrintCompTimimg
1-22
Add a routing table
AddRouteTable
1-23
Request the number of routing tables
GetRouteTableSettingNum
1-23
Request the routing table information
GetRouteTableSetting
1-23
Delete a routing table
DeleteRouteTable
1-23
Delete all routing tables
DeleteAllRouteTable
1-24
Z timing (Set/Request)
ZTiming
1-24
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Communication command list
Command function
String/Logo/Barcode
setting
Marking parameters
Ref.
OnTheFly
1-25
Head orientation (Set/Request)
HeadDirection
1-25
Marking order (Set/Request)
MarkingOrder
1-25
Continuous stationary marking (Set/Request)
ContinuousStationaryMarking
1-26
Movement parameters (Set/Request)
OnTheFlyMarking
1-26
Movement marking trigger delay (Set/Request)
OnTheFlyTriggerDelay
1-26
Continuous movement marking (Set/Request)
ContinuousOnTheFlyMarking
1-27
Marking range setting (Set/Request)
OnTheFlyMarkingArea
1-27
Workpiece position adjustment (Plane) (Set/Request)
JobPosition
1-28
Height correction (Set/Request)
HeightCorrection
1-28
Common block marking parameters (Set/Request)
CommonMarkingParameter
1-29
Marking energy check (Set/Request)
MarkingEnergy
1-30
Scanner waiting position when ready (Set/Request)
ScannerWaiting
1-30
Camera magnification when ready (Set/Request)
CameraWaitingScale
1-31
Internal lighting status when ready (Set/Request)
CameraWaitingLight
1-31
External lighting status when ready (Set/Request)
CameraWaitingExternalLight
1-31
Type of lighting for the running job (Set/Request)
LightingType
1-31
Approach scan speed (Set/Request)
ApproachScanSpeed
1-32
Block type (Set/Request)
BlockType
1-33
Barcode type (Set/Request)
CodeType
1-33
String and logo files (Set/Request)
CharacterString
1-34
Font setting (Set/Request)
CharacterFont
1-37
Character size (Set/Request)
CharacterSize
1-38
Logo size (Set/Request)
LogoSize
1-38
String proportional setting (Set/Request)
CharacterProportional
1-39
String ratio setting (Set/Request)
CharacterRatio
1-39
Arc string character layout setting (Set/Request)
ArcCharacter
1-40
Barcode/2D code setting (Set/Request)
CodeSetting
1-41
Barcode size (Set/Request)
BarcodeSize
1-41
GS1DataBar size (Set/Request)
GS1DataBarSize
1-42
DataMatrix size (Set/Request)
DataMatrixSize
1-42
DataMatrix cell size ratio in X direction (Set/Request)
DataMatrixCellSizeRatioX
1-43
DataMatrix cell size ratio in Y direction (Set/Request)
DataMatrixCellSizeRatioY
1-43
QR Code size (Set/Request)
QRCodeSize
1-43
QR code cell size ratio in X direction (Set/Request)
QRCodeCellSizeRatioX
1-44
QR code cell size ratio in Y direction (Set/Request)
QRCodeCellSizeRatioY
1-44
Block position (Set/Request)
BlockPosition
1-44
Block layout (Set/Request)
BlockLayout
1-45
Fixed point emission time (Set/Request)
FixedPointProcessingTime
1-45
Marking parameters (Set/Request)
MarkingParameter
1-46
Barcode/2D code pattern setting (Set/Request)
CodePattern
1-47
Hatch logo pattern setting (Set/Request)
HatchPattern
1-48
TrueType font pattern setting (Set/Request)
TTFPattern
1-49
Barcode/2D code fill marking parameters (Set/Request)
CodeFillParameter
1-49
Hatch logo fill marking parameters (Set/Request)
HatchParameter
1-50
TrueType font fill marking parameters (Set/Request)
TTFParameter
1-51
Photo setting (Set/Request)
PhotoSetting
1-51
Marking flag (Set)
MarkingEnable
1-52
Individual fill marking parameters (Set/Request)
FillMarkingParameter
1-52
Jump Speed (Set/Request)
JumpSpeed
1-53
Nudge marking quality setting (Set/Request)
MarkingQuality
1-53
Approach (Set/Request)
Approach
1-53
Space approach (Set/Request)
SpaceApproach
1-54
Curve correction (Set/Request)
CurveCorrection
1-54
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-3
1
Communication Interface
Job No.
Command
Movement/stationary marking setting (Set/Request)
Communication command list
Command function
Code overprinting
parameters
1
Communication Interface
3D shape setting
Work flow
Matrix setting
Group/Counter
setting
1-4
Command
Ref.
Barcode/2D code overprinting marking parameters (Set/Request)
MultiPassMarkingParameter
1-55
Barcode/2D code overprinting pattern setting (Set/Request)
MultiPassPattern
1-56
Barcode/2D code overprinting fill parameters (Set/Request)
MultiPassFillParameter
1-57
Quality level of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/Request)
MultiPassQualityLevel
1-57
Approach of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/Request)
MultiPassApproach
1-57
Space approach of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/Request)
MultiPassSpaceApproach
1-58
Curve correction of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/Request)
MultiPassCurveCorrection
1-58
Jump speed of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/Request)
MultiPassJumpSpeed
1-58
Wait time for start marking of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/
Request)
MultiPassBlockMarkingDelayTime
1-58
3D shape setting (Set/Request)
3DShape
1-59
3D shape type (Set/Request)
3DShapeType
1-59
3D shape position (Set/Request)
3DShapePosition
1-60
Diameter of cylinder shape (Set/Request)
CylinderDiameter
1-61
Cone shape size setting (Set/Request)
ConeSize
1-61
Diameter of sphere shape (Set/Request)
SphereDiameter
1-61
Position on 3D shape (Set/Request)
3DSurfacePosition
1-62
Cone setting (Set/Request)
ConeSetting
1-62
Enable/disable the XY tracking settings (Set/Request)
XYTrackingEnable
1-63
Enable/disable the Z tracking settings (Set/Request)
ZTrackingEnable
1-63
Set/Request the calibration of the Z tracking
ZTrackingCalibration
1-63
Set/Request the warning threshold of the XY tracking
XYTrackingCorrectionThreshold
1-64
Set/Request to enable/disable the lens inspection before marking
WindowCheckBeforeMarkingEnable
1-64
Set/Request the warning threshold of the lens inspection before
marking
WindowCheckBeforeMarkingAlarm
Threshold
1-64
Set/Request the sensitivity of the lens inspection before marking
WindowCheckBeforeMarking
Sensitivity
1-64
Set/Request to enable/disable the lens inspection after marking
WindowCheckAfterMarkingEnable
1-65
Set/Request the warning threshold of the lens inspection after marking
WindowCheckAfterMarkingAlarm
Threshold
1-65
Set/Request the sensitivity of the lens inspection after marking
WindowCheckAfterMarkingSensitivity
1-65
Enable/disable the marking verification function (Set/Request)
MarkingConfirmationSetting
1-66
2D code quality check and various settings (Set/Request)
CodeReaderSetting
1-66
Request internal lighting condition during 2D code reading
CodeReaderLightSetting
1-67
Capturing condition of the camera function (Set/Request)
CameraImagingSetting
1-67
Capturing position of the camera (Set/Request)
CameraTargetSetting
1-68
Request the workflow result
WorkflowResultDetail
1-69
Request the marking result
MarkingResult
1-70
Request the pre-marking lens inspection result
WindowCheckBeforeMarkingResult
1-70
Request the post-marking lens inspection result
WindowCheckAfterMarkingResult
1-70
Request the filename of the image captured with the camera
CameraImageFilepath
1-71
Request the marking confirmation result
MarkingConfirmationResult
1-71
1-72
Request the 2D code reader result
CodeReadResult
Request the marking energy result
MarkingEnergyResult
1-73
Request the number of marked matrix cells
MatrixCellMarkingCount
1-73
Matrix row & column setting (Set/Request)
MatrixSetting
1-74
Matrix size setting (Set/Request)
MatrixSize
1-74
Matrix cell reference point (Set/Request)
CellReferencePoint
1-75
Cell individual setting (Set/Request)
MatrixCell
1-75
Cell marking flag (Set)
MatrixCellEnable
1-76
Matrix position setting (Set/Request)
MatrixPosition
1-76
Count using invalid marking cells (Set/Request)
InactiveCellCount
1-76
Group setting (Set/Request)
GroupOffset
1-77
Counter setting (Set/Request)
CounterSetting
1-77
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Communication command list
Command function
Operation time
Ref.
OperatingTime
1-78
Request the laser excited time
LaserOperatingTime
1-78
Request the scanner operating time
ScannerOperatingTime
1-78
Request the number of shutter operations
ShutterOperatingCount
1-78
Request the number of laser safety module operations
LaserSafetyModuleOperatingCount
1-78
Request the head temperature
MarkingUnitTemperature
1-79
Request the controller temperature
ControllerTemperature
1-79
Request the result of laser power calibration
LaserPowerCalibrationResult
1-79
Cumulative marking count 1 and 2 (Set/Request)
CumulativeMarkingCount
1-79
Request the lens inspection result
WindowCheckResult
1-80
Set/Request the sensitivity of the lens inspection
WindowCheckSensitivity
1-80
Set/Request the lens inspection at startup
WindowCheckStartup
1-80
Set/Request the lens inspection alarm threshold.
WindowCheckAlarmThreshold
1-81
Start the lens inspection
WindowCheck
1-81
Laser power measurement
LaserPowerCheck
1-81
Delete all logging data
LoggingClearAllData
1-81
Delete logging data with a specified period
LoggingClearData
1-81
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-5
1
Communication Interface
Maintenance
Command
Request the controller operating time
Interface
Interface
• Read the “Safety Information” in the user's manual for the applicable model to perform operation in the state that the safety
is secured by using security function even when the network failure occurs.
• Confirm the safe operation by considering the communication delay due to the communication time or network overload
state.
1
Communication Interface
RS-232C Interface
This section explains how to communicate using RS-232C connection.
Connection cables
Communication settings
The connector type on the laser marker unit side is D-Sub 9-Pin (Male).
When connecting with an external device (PLC, etc.), connect as
shown below in solid lines using RS-232C straight cable. The following
is an example of connection with an external device with D-Sub 9-Pin
connector.
Laser Marker side
Shield
External device side
1
1
Send
2
2
Receive
Receive
3
3
Send
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
Signal GND
Connector hood
The RS-232C communication settings must be configured the same on
the laser marker and the external device. Using Marking Builder Plus or
the console, configure the settings such that all of the following items
are the same.
Setting item
Baud rate
• 2400 bps
• 4800 bps
• 9600 bps
• 19200 bps
• 38400 bps (Default value)
• 57600 bps
• 115200 bps
Parity check
• None (Default value)
• Odd
• Even
Signal GND
Stop bit
Connector hood
• The connector will be more susceptible to noise if
the connector hood is not shielded.
• On some external devices, communication cannot
be established without short-circuiting No. 4/6 pins
and No. 7/8 pins on the external device side. Refer to
the manual of the external device.
• Only No. 2, 3 and 5 pins are used on the laser marker
side.
• If the external device also has 9 pins, data is sent from
the laser marker to the external device between No.2
pins and data is sent from the external device to the
laser marker between No.3 pins.
• Use #4-40 inch screws to fix the connector to the
controller.
Setting value
Check sum
• 1 (Default value)
• 2 bit
• None (Default value)
• Yes
• The delimiter automatically detects the delimiter setting
of the external device. [EXT] and [CR] are supported.
• The data length is “8 bits fixed”, communication mode
is “Full duplex”, synchronization mode is “Start-stop
synchronization”, flow control is “None”, and inter-frame
timeout is “3500ms”.
• It is compliant with the EIA (Electronic Industries
Association) RS-232C.
• When sending a non-ASCII string, specify the character
code from Unicode (UTF-8), Shift-JIS, or Latin-1. The
default value is Unicode (UTF-8). If you are using
Marking Builder Plus, you can change the setting from
[Communication Settings] under [Controller] in the
[Settings] tab.
When using the RS-232C protocol, data corruption
or failure may occur do to noise or poor connection.
Be sure to use the parity or checksum to increase
the reliability of the communication environment.
1-6
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Interface
Ethernet interface
This section explains how to communicate using TCP/IP (Nonprocedure) via Ethernet.
Connection cables
1
No. 1 to 8 from top
RJ-45
Modular connector
Pin
number
MDI signal
1
TD+
Sent data (+)
2
TD-
Sent data (-)
3
RD+
Received data (+)
4
-
-
Communication Interface
Connect the laser marker with the external device using a LAN (STP or
UTP) cable.
To use TCP/IP (Non-procedure) communication, use the LAN1 [MAIN]
port of the laser marker.
Signal function
5
-
-
6
RD-
Received data (-)
7
-
-
• Both straight and cross cables are supported. Category
5 cable or higher is recommended.
• Optional LAN cross cable (OP-66843) is sold separately.
Communication settings
When connecting the laser marker with the external device using TCP/
IP via Ethernet, set the IP addresses and subnet masks such that they
are in the same local area network. The default port number is “50002”.
For the detail, refer to “Communication Setup” in [4 Setting Menu” of
“Marking Builder Plus User's Manual.”
• In the case of Ethernet communication, the delimiter
is fixed to [CR] and the check sum is fixed to [None],
respectively.
• If you are using Marking Builder Plus, you can
change the setting from [Ethernet Settings] under
[Controller] in the [Settings] tab.
To use TCP/IP communication or Industrial Ethernet,
use the LAN1 [MAIN] port of the controller.
For details about communication methods using Profinet
and Ethernet/IP, refer to each manual.
When multiple commands are received from external
equipment via TCP/IP communication, the command
is saved to the buffer (queue) by received order, and
the next command is processed after sending out the
response.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-7
Communication Specifications
Communication Specifications
1
Write/Read command formats
Target specifier
If you wish to send a command from the external device to the laser
marker, it should be sent/received in the format described below.
When sending a command to the laser marker, for most commands,
you need to determine the change target in advance. A target specifier
is inserted before the command in the form of “Target specifier = Target
No.”. If you wish to specify multiple targets, they need to be arranged
side-by-side. The types of target specifiers and target number ranges
are as described below.
Write command format
Communication Interface
If the command is changing the setting value of the laser marker or
executing an operation, add “WX” on the beginning of the command.
Target
Specifier
Target Range
No.
Description
Command
WX,Command [CR]
JOB
0000 to 1999
Specifies the job No.
Response
Normal : WX,OK [CR]
Error : WX,NG,S***,ErrCode [CR]
BLK
000 to 255
Specifies the block No.
An OK response is returned if the change or instruction specified by
the command is successful and returns an error response if it fails. For
more information on the error, refer to
“Communication Errors” (Page
1-87).
A response is returned in the timing when the specified change or
instruction has completed.
FNC
00 to 01
00 : Marking confirmation function
01: 2D code reader
TRK
000 to 255
Specifies the tracking No.
• The spelling of “Command” is not case-sensitive. Both
cases will be accepted.
• The maximum command byte length is 4096 bytes. You
need to split the command if you wish to send a longer
byte length.
• The command other than strings is sent in ASCII format.
Read command format
OLP
0 to 9
Specifies the overprinting No.
3DS
000 to 255
Specifies the 3D shape No.
Specifies the number of rows and
columns of the matrix. The number
will be assigned with priority given to
rows, in reference to the top left of
the matrix.
CEL
00001 to 65025
GRP
000 to 255
Specifies the group No.
CTR
0 to 9/A to J
Specifies the counter No.
If the command is requesting the setting value or the status of the laser
marker, add “RX” on the beginning of the command.
Command
RX,Command [CR]
Response
RX,OK,Response [CR]
The value and status specified by the command are returned in a
response. Since request commands can be sent/received at any time,
no errors will occur as long as the communication format is correct. The
RX command returns a fixed-length response.
• The information in brackets [ ] indicates the control code.
[CR] is 0Dh in hexadecimal.
• Use ASCII when sending double-type characters such
as Kanji characters or a Unicode string.
• Insert a “, “ (comma) separator after a command,
response or check sum.
• The maximum response byte length is 4096 bytes.
• A MarkedCharacter command is a request command,
however, there is a restriction for the timing of sending/
receiving.
• A “,” (comma) separator is inserted between the target
specifier and the command.
• A target specifier may be unnecessary for commands
that directly operate the laser marker.
• You can also specify CEL using row & column headers.
It is specified in the form of “Row number-Column
number” in the range between “001-001” and “255-255”.
• The JOB specifier can be substituted by the PRG
specifier used by a Marking Builder 3 supported model.
PRG is accepted as the same as JOB.
For example, to change a string, you need to specify the job No. and
block No. in advance. The command will therefore be as an example
described below.
„ Example of command for changing the string
of job No. 1 and block No.1 to “ABC”
Command
Response
1-8
WX,JOB=0001,BLK=001,CharacterString=ABC
[CR]
WX,OK [CR]
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Communication Specifications
Communication format
Communication priority
Header/Delimiter setting
RS-232C connection
A response is returned automatically detecting the header/delimiter as [STX]
/ [ETX] or [None] / [CR].
Ethernet connection
The laser marker has 6 types of communication paths that generally
support simultaneous connections. However, when the laser marker
shifts to a specific status via a communication path, priority will be
given to the specific communication path. This means that only request
commands will be accepted for communication paths other than the
priority communication path. The following table shows the conditions
under which a priority communication path will occur.
Priority acquisition period
External communication
(RS-232C/Ethernet)
• The length of time from when the WX
command is sent until a response is
returned
• From sending the CreateJob command,
• until a response is returned from the
EndJob command
Marking Builder Plus
(USB/Ethernet)
• During acquiring mastership
• During I/O terminal monitor mode
transition
• During transition of settings and backup
data
Console
(Dedicated cable)
• During test marking mode transition
• During terminal block simulate mode
transition
• During transition of settings and backup
data
MBP ActiveX
(USB/Ethernet)
• Blocking communication: The length
of time from when the setting change
command is sent until a response is
returned
• Non-blocking communication: The
length of time from when the setting
change command is sent until the next
event is completed
Profinet, EtherNet/IP
(Ethernet)
The length of time from the start of a
setting change instruction, etc. until the
operation is completed
Only [None]/[CR] are supported.
„ [STX]/[ETX] command examples
Command
[STX]WX,Command[ETX]
Response
[STX]WX,OK[ETX]
„ [None]/[CR] command examples
Command
WX,Command[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
Check sum setting
You can add a check sum for checking the data integrity for RS-232C
communication only. A check sum is added immediately before the
delimiter as a 2-digit hexadecimal string. The 2-digit string is calculated
based on the horizontal parity (XOR). The following shows an example
of the commands and calculating formulas.
„ A command example with check sum added
Command
WX,Command,48[CR]
Response
WX,OK,0B[CR]
Sent code
Received code
W
57h
0101 0111b
W
57h
0101 0111b
X
58h
0101 1000b
X
58h
0101 1000b
,
2Ch
0010 1100b
,
2Ch
0010 1100b
C
43h
0100 0011b
O
4Fh
0100 1111b
o
6Fh
0110 1111b
K
4Bh
0100 1011b
m
6Dh
0110 1101b
,
2Ch
0010 1100b
m
6Dh
0110 1101b
0000 1011b
a
61h
0110 0001b
n
6Eh
0110 1110b
ASCII conversion
0Bh
d
64h
0110 0100b
,
2Ch
0010 1100b
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
0100 1000b
ASCII conversion
48h
The check sum is calculated excluding the header,
delimiter and check sum sections.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-9
1
Communication Interface
Communication path
Lower limit threshold
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”
B:0/1
1 byte
Upper limit threshold
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”
C: 00000.01 to 99999.99
8 bytes
Lower limit threshold (J)
* A: Fixed value of “0.01” when 0
8 bytes
Upper limit threshold (J)
* B: Fixed value of “0.01” when 0
Command Details
Command Details
Parameter
How to interpret theD:command
details
00000.01 to 99999.99
Communication Interface
1 byte
A:0/1
This section explains how to interpret the command details using the following command as an example.
1
Marking energy check will be canceled when the next trigger is accepted within 2 seconds of completion of the marking. Therefore, make
sure to allow at least 2 seconds between the marking completion and the next marking start.
This shows the target specifier required for
thisScanner
command.
(13)
waiting position when ready (Set/Request)
This is the default value of the job
parameters.
Communication Interface
Command
ScannerWaiting
Description
Sets/Requests the scanner waiting position when ready.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,ScannerWaiting=A,B,C,D[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,ScannerWaiting[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D[CR]
Parameter
14 bytes
A:0/1
1 byte
Standby coordinate
0: Auto
1: Custom coordinate
* Default value “0”
B: Depends on the area size
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Wide :-165.000 to 0165.000
Small : -025.000 to 0025.000
8 bytes
Standby X coordinate (mm)
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
C: Depends on the area size
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Other model :
“Y coordinate” of “Model-Specific
Input Value List” (Page 1-80)
8 bytes
Standby Y coordinate (mm)
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
D: Depends on the area size
Normal : -021.000 to 0021.000
Wide :-021.000 to 0021.000
Small : -015.000 to 0015.000
8 bytes
Standby Z coordinate (mm)
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
When setting the standby coordinate to auto, standby is done on the coordinate where the scanner will be used firstly at work flow.
The input range varies depending on the laser marker area size.
The applicable models for each area size are as described below.
• Normal : MD-X2000/2500 Series
: MD-X2020/2520 Series
• Wide
• Small
: MD-X2050 Series
Input range is listed in the
Value List” (Page 1-92).
“Model-Specific Input
Enter a fixed value when the value of the specific parameter is “0”.
* Since the fixed values are ignored on the laser marker side, values
other than the fixed values will be accepted as long as they are
within the parameter input range.
„ WX command example
This command changes the scanner waiting position when ready (X: 5mm, Y: 10mm, Z: -5mm) of job No.0005.
Command
WX,JOB=0005,ScannerWaiting=1,0005.000,0010.000,-005.000[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
„ RX command example
This command requests the scanner waiting position when ready (X: 5 mm, Y: 10 mm, Z: -5 mm) of job No.0005.
Command
RX,JOB=0005,ScannerWaiting
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication
Interface User’s Manual [CR]
Response
RX,OK,1,0005.000,0010.000,-005.000[CR]
1-10
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-25
Command Details
Basic
(1) Delete the job
Command
DeleteJob
Description
Deletes the jobs in the laser marker.
Target
None
WX
WX,DeleteJob=A,A,A,A...[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
Response
Parameter
1
None
A:0000 to 1999/9999
4 bytes
Deletes all jobs in the case of the job No.
9999 to be deleted
You can specify multiple job No. for deletion
by separating them with commas.
• To delete multiple jobs simultaneously, send the command as described below.
WX,DeleteJob=0001,0002,0005,0006[CR]
• When you specify multiple jobs, an error will occur if any one of the specified job No. does not exist.
• If a running job is specified, an error occurs.
(2) Request the READY status
Command
Ready
Description
Requests whether the laser marker is in the ready status.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
Response
None
Command
RX,Ready[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
5 bytes
A:0/1/2
1 byte
0 : READY ON
1 : READY OFF (Error occurring)
2 : READY OFF (Marking or expansion in
progress)
If the value of parameter A is “1”, you cannot perform any marking until the error is cleared. Clear the error using the ErrorClear command.
However, if the occurring error is a terminal block status error (T***), check the ON/OFF status of the terminal block.
(3) Title (Set/Request)
Command
Title
Description
Sets/Requests the job title.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999
WX
RX
5 bytes
Command
WX,JOB=0000,Title=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,Title[CR]]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
A:Title
-
• 1 to 100 single-byte or double-byte
characters.
• An empty string (0 character) will result in
an error.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-11
Communication Interface
RX
Command
13 bytes
Command Details
Laser marker operation
(1) Start the marking laser
1
Command
StartMarking
Description
Starts the marking laser.
Target
None
WX
Communication Interface
RX
Command
WX, StartMarking=A [CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
Response
Parameter
12 bytes
None
1 byte
A:0/1
NG response detection range
0: Return an NG response only when the
marking operation is canceled.
1: Return the error details and an NG
response when an error occurs during the
marking operation.
• An error response is returned when marking is canceled from the terminal block, etc.
• The parameter can be omitted. Sending WX,StartMarking[CR] results in the same response as WX,StartMarking=0[CR].
(2) Start the guide laser
Command
GuideLaser
Description
Starts the guide laser marking using the guide laser type specified by parameter A.
Target
The guide laser is emitted for the same length of time as the marking time when selecting once and emitted
continuously for 30 seconds for all other emission types.
WX
RX
Command
WX,GuideLaser=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
Response
Parameter
10 bytes
None
1 byte
A:1~5
Guide laser type
1: Once
2: Continuous
3: Area frame
4: Work image
5: Block frame
• This command returns a response as soon as the guide laser emission starts.
• The emission can be canceled using the “StopMarking” command.
(3) Stop the guide laser
Command
StopMarking
Description
Cancels the guide laser marking.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,StopMarking[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
Response
Parameter
11 bytes
None
None
(4) Enable/disable the acceptance of start marking (Set/Request)
Command
TriggerLock
Description
Enables/disables acceptance of triggers from the terminal block and/or communication path.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,TriggerLock=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,TriggerLock[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
A:0/1
11 bytes
1 bytes
Acceptance of start marking
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
* Default value “0”
If this command is received during marking, the marking will not stop but the next marking start input will be rejected.
1-12
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(5) Enable/disable the distance pointer
Command
DistancePointer
Description
Turns on/off the distance pointer.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,DistancePointer=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
Command
RX,DistancePointer[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
1
1 byte
A:0/1
Distance Pointer
0: Off
1: On
Communication Interface
Parameter
15 bytes
This command returns a response as soon as the distance pointer is turned on/off.
(6) Read a 2D code
Command
Check2DCode4
Description
Reads the 2D code inside the area using the built-in camera.
Target
None
WX
RX
12 bytes
Command
WX,Check2DCode4=A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J,K,L,M,N,O[CR]
Response
WX,OK,P,Q,R[CR]
Command
Response
Parameter
None
A: 0 to 3
1 byte
Capture position
0: Current scanner position
1: Custom coordinate
2: Block coordinate
3: Block position (last tracking result applied)
B: Varies depending on the area size
Normal: -062.500 to 0062.500
Wide: -165.000 to 0165.000
Small: -025.000 to 0025.000
8 byte
X coordinate (mm)
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0/2
C: Varies depending on the area size
Normal: -062.500 to 0062.500
Wide:- 165.000 to 0165.000
Small: -025.000 to 0025.000
8 byte
Y coordinate (mm)
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0/2
D: Varies depending on the area size
Normal: -21.000~021.000
Wide: -21.000 to 021.000
Small: -15.000 to 015.000
8 byte
Z coordinate (mm)
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0/2
E: 000 to 100
3 byte
Reading area (%)
No area specification when “0”
* A: Same as 100% when 0/1
* A: Auto area specification when 2
* G: Same as 100% when 0/1
F: 000 to 255
3 byte
Block No.
A: Fixed value of “0” when 0/1
G: 0 to 3
1 byte
Camera zoom
0: Whole wide
1: Whole standard
2: Coax wide
3: Coax standard
* Default value “2”
H: -100 to 0100
4 byte
Brightness
* Default value “0”
I: 0.1 to 5.0
3 byte
Gamma correction value
* Default value “1.0”
J: 0 to 2
1 byte
Lighting type
0: Internal lighting (normal)
1: Internal lighting (halation removal)
2: External lighting
* Default value “2”
K: 0/1
1 byte
Lighting condition for internal lighting 1
0: Off
1: On
* This parameter can be omitted.
1 byte
Lighting condition for internal lighting 2
0: Off
1: On
* This parameter can be omitted.
L: 0/1
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-13
Command Details
1
M: 0/1
1 byte
Lighting condition for internal lighting 3
0: Off
1: On
* This parameter can be omitted.
N: 0/1
1 byte
Lighting condition for internal lighting 4
0: Off
1: On
* This parameter can be omitted.
O: 0/1
1 byte
Lighting condition for internal lighting 5
0: Off
1: On
* This parameter can be omitted.
P: A~D/F
1 byte
AIM-DPM total grade
Q: 000 to 100
3 byte
Matching level
R to Encoded string
-
Encoded string of 2D code
Parameter
Communication Interface
• When J is 0 and the lighting condition for the internal lighting is specified, all of parameters K, L, M, N, and O must be specified.
• When A is 2 or 3, reading is possible in the period after marking until the next marking.
• When A is 3, the last correction for the XY tracking and Z tracking set for the block will be applied to the capture position.
When no previous tracking result exists because the setting number was switched or for other reasons, the block position will not be corrected.
When the tracking is set to not correct the block position, the capture position will not be corrected.
• The S087 communication error “2D code reading error” is returned if the 2D code cannot be found.
• The fixed camera and internal lighting cannot be selected for the MD-X2050(A). If the command is executed, an S095 Model Limitation Error will occur.
• This command cannot be used for the MD-X400(A)/450(A).
• See the figure below for the relationship between the internal lighting numbers and positions.
4
5
3
2
1
(7) Check the focus distance
Command
FocusCheck
Description
Measures the difference between the distance to the workpiece and the reference distance for the number of times
specified in parameter A and returns its average value as the focus deviation amount.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,FocusCheck=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK,B[CR]
Command
Response
Parameter
10 bytes
None
A: 01~10
2 bytes
Measurement count (times)
B: -100.0~0100.0
6 bytes
Focus deviation amount (mm)
• If the Z coordinate of the position correction has been input, this value will be subtracted from the focus deviation amount.
• It cannot be used on the MD-X400(A)/450(A) series.
1-14
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(8) Check the Z coordinate
Command
ZTrackingPointCheck
Description
Measures the specified XYZ coordinates by the number of times specified by a parameter.
Acquires the average and returns a gap amount from a specified Z coordinate.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,ZtrackingPointCheck=A,B,C,D,E[CR]
Response
WX,OK,F,G[CR]
Command
Parameter
1
None
Communication Interface
Response
19 bytes
A: Depends on the area size
Normal : -062.500~0062.500
Wide : -165.000~0165.000
8 bytes
X coordinate (mm)
* Default value “0”
B: Depends on the area size
Normal : -062.500~0062.500
Wide :-165.000~0165.000
8 bytes
Y coordinate (mm)
* Default value “0”
C: -21.000 to 021.000
7 bytes
Z coordinate (mm)
* Default value “0”
D: 1 to 10
2 bytes
Measurement count
* Default value “0”
E: 0 to 4
1 byte
Sampling cycle
0 (short) to 4 (long)
* Default value “0”
F: -99.00 to 099.00
6 byte
Gap amount from a specified Z coordinate
(mm)
G: 000 to 100
3 byte
Stability
• It cannot be used on the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A) series.
• The longer the sampling cycle is, the higher the reliability of the measurement is, even though the measurement time will get longer.
(9) Set/Request the XY tracking
Command
XYTracking
Description
Executes a XY tracking by specifying the XY tracking No. of the currently running job to acquire the workpiece gap
amount.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,XYTracking=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK,B,C,D,E,F,G[CR]
Command
RX,XYTracking=A[CR]
Response
RX,OK,B,C,D,E,F,G[CR]
Parameter
10 bytes
A:00~07
2 bytes
XY tracking No.
B: Depends on the area size
Normal : -125.000~0125.000
Wide : -330.000~0330.000
8 bytes
X coordinate gap amount (mm)
C: Depends on the area size
Normal : -125.000~0125.000
Wide : -330.000~0330.000
8 bytes
Y coordinate gap amount (mm)
D: -180.000~0180.000
8 bytes
θ gap amount (°)
E: 000~100
3 bytes
Correlation value
F: 0000 to 9999
4 bytes
Execution time (ms)
1 byte
Result
0: Failure
1: Success
2: Success (correlation value: low)
G:0/1/2
• The RX command acquires the result at the previous execution. The previous result will be cleared when changing the job No. of the
current operation.
• When there is no setting of the specified tracking No., S103 tracking No. no registration error will occur.
• When there is no result of the specified tracking No., S104 tracking result request error will occur.
• It cannot be used on the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A) series.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-15
Command Details
(10) Set/Request the Z tracking
Command
ZTracking
Description
Executes/acquires the result of a Z tracking.
Target
None
WX
1
RX
Command
WX,ZTracking=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK,B,C,D,E,F,G[CR]
Command
RX,ZTracking=A[CR]
Response
Communication Interface
Parameter
9 bytes
RX,OK,B,C,D,E,F,G[CR]
A:0 to 255
3 bytes
Z tracking No.
B:-042.000 to 0042.000
8 bytes
Z coordinate gap amount (mm)
C: -180.000 to 0180.000
8 bytes
X rotation angle gap amount (°)
* Fixed value of “0” when correcting Z
coordinate
D: -180.000 to 0180.000
8 bytes
Y rotation angle gap amount (°)
* Fixed value of “0” when correcting Z
coordinate
E: 000 to 100
3 bytes
Stability
F: 0000 to 9999
4 bytes
Execution time (ms)
1 byte
Result
0: Failure
1: Success
2: Success (stability: low)
3: Success (out of tolerance range)
G: 0/1/2
• The RX command acquires the result at the previous execution. The previous result will be cleared when changing the job No. of the
current operation.
• When there is no setting of the specified tracking No., S103 tracking No. no registration error will occur.
• When there is no result of the specified tracking No., S104 tracking result request error will occur.
• It cannot be used on the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A) series.
(11) Z tracking result (matrix) by specifying a cell number (Set/Request)
Command
ZTrackingMatrixCell
Description
Sets/requests the Z tracking result for a matrix or a matrix cell specified with row and column headers.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,ZTrackingMatrixCell=A,B[CR]
Response
WX,OK,C,D,E,F,G,H[CR]
Command
RX,ZTrackingMatrixCell=A,B[CR]
Response
RX,OK,C,D,E,F,G,H[CR]
Parameter
19 bytes
A: 000 to 255
3 bytes
Row header of the cell
B: 000 to 255
3 bytes
Column header of the cell
C: -042.000 to 0042.000
8 bytes
Z coordinate deviation (mm)
D: 0000.000
8 bytes
X angle deviation (°)
* Fixed value: 0
E: 0000.000
8 bytes
Y angle deviation (°)
* Fixed value: 0
F: 000 to 100
3 bytes
Stability
G: 000000 to 999999
6 bytes
Execution time (ms)
H: 0 to 3
Result
0: Failure
1: Success
2: Success (stability: low)
3: Success (out of tolerance range)
• When 0 is set for the row and column headers, result acquisition is performed for the entire matrix. When Z tracking is set for each cell,
the average of the cells is returned. The result is 1: Success only when the result is a success for all the cells. Otherwise, the result is 0:
Failure.
• During execution, Z tracking is performed for the entire matrix or matrix cells regardless of the specified cell.
The response returns the result of the specified cell.
• More than one cell can be specified for result acquisition. Specify the cells in the format such as “RX,ZTrackingMatrixCell=A,B,A,B,A,B,”
and so on.
The result of this command will be “RX,OK,C,D,E,F,G,H,C,D,E,F,G,H,C,D,E,F,G,H,” and so on.
If any part of the result is failure, an error is returned.
• The RX command acquires the result of the last execution. The result of the last execution will be cleared when the job No. of the
currently operating job is changed.
• When the tracking produces no result, an S104 Tracking Result Request Error will occur.
• This command cannot be used for the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A).
1-16
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(12) Set/Acquire the result of the Z tracking (matrix) (by specifying a cell number)
Command
ZTrackingMatrixCellNo
Description
Executes/acquires the result of the Z tracking for a matrix or a matrix cell specified with a cell number.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,ZTrackingMatrixCellNo=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK,B,C,D,E,F,G[CR]
Command
RX,ZTrackingMatrixCellNo=A[CR]
Response
RX,OK,B,C,D,E,F,G[CR]
1
A: 00000 to 65025
5 bytes
Cell number
B: -042.000~0042.000
8 bytes
Z coordinate deviation (mm)
C: 0000.000
8 bytes
X angle deviation (°)
* Fixed value: 0
D: 0000.000
8 bytes
Y angle deviation (°)
* Fixed value: 0
E: 000 to 100
3 bytes
Stability
F: 000000 to 999999
6 bytes
Execution time (ms)
1 bytes
Result
0: Failure
1: Success
2: Success (stability: low)
3: Success (out of tolerance range)
G: 0 to 3
Communication Interface
Parameter
21 bytes
• When 0 is set for the cell number, result acquisition is performed for the entire matrix. The RX command acquires the result of the last
execution. The result of the last execution will be cleared when the job No. of the currently operating job is changed.
• During execution, Z tracking is performed for the entire matrix or matrix cells regardless of the specified cell. The response returns the
result of the specified cell.
• More than one cell can be specified for result acquisition. Specify the cells in the format such as “RX,ZTrackingMatrixCellNo=A,A,A,” and
so on.
The result of this command will be “RX,OK,B,C,D,E,F,G,B,C,D,E,F,G,B,C,D,E,F,G,” and so on.
If any part of the result is failure, an error is returned.
• The RX command acquires the result of the last execution. The result of the last execution will be cleared when the job No. of the
currently operating job is changed.
• When the tracking produces no result, an S104 Tracking Result Request Error will occur.
• This command cannot be used for the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A).
(13) Start the XY tracking and Z tracking
Command
3AxisTracking
Description
Executes a XY tracking and Z tracking of the currently running job.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,3AxisTracking
Response
WX,OK
Command
Response
Parameter
13 bytes
None
None
• The results can be acquired by RX, XYTracking = A, and RX, ZTracking = A,RX,ZTrackingMatrixCell=A,B.
• This command cannot be used for the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A).
(14) Start the calibration (high accuracy) of the Z tracking
Command
ZTrackingManualCalibration
Description
Executes the calibration of a Z tracking (high accuracy).
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,ZTrackingManualCalibration[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
Response
26 bytes
None
It cannot be used on the MD-X400(A)/450(A) series.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-17
Command Details
(15) Internal lighting status (Set/Request)
Command
Lighting
Description
Set/Request the on/off status of the internal lighting
Target
None
WX
1
RX
Command
WX,Lighting=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,Lighting[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Communication Interface
Parameter
8 bytes
1 byte
A:0/1
Status of lighting
0: Off
1: On
It cannot be used on the MD-X400(A)/450(A) series.
1-18
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
Current values and statuses
(1) Running job No. (Set/Request)
Command
JobNo
Description
Sets/Requests the running job No.
Target
None
WX
WX,JobNo=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JobNo[CR]
Response
Parameter
1
RX,OK,A[CR]
A:0000~1999
4 bytes
Specifies the job No.
• E015 “No Job Error” is returned if you specify a non-registered job No.
• An OK response is returned when a currently running job No. has been specified. At that point in time, the READY output becomes OFF
for an instant due to switching of the job No.
(2) Current counter value setting (Set/Request)
Command
Counter
Description
Specifies the counter No. and changes/requests the current counter value as well as the current repetitive marking
count.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999, CTR=0 to 9/A to J,
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,CTR=0,Counter=A,B[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,CTR=0,Counter[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B[CR]
Parameter
7 bytes
A:0000000000 to 4294967295
10 bytes
Current counter value
B: 0000000000 to 4294967295
10 bytes
Repetitive marking count
(3) I/O encoded character (Set/Request)
Command
IoEncodedCharacter
Description
Sets/Requests the string to use as the I/O encoded character.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,IoEncodedCharacter=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,IoEncodedCharacter[CR]
Response
Parameter
18 bytes
RX,OK,A[CR]
A:00 to 35
2 bytes
Specify the I/O encoded character
This command returns a response very quickly as it is processed immediately regardless of the job expansion time.
(4) Request final marking string
Command
MarkedCharacter
Description
Specify the job No. and block No. to request the string marked by the laser marker.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
Response
Command
Response
Parameter
15 bytes
None
RX,MarkedCharacter=A,B[CR]
RX,OK,C[CR]
A:0000 to 1999
4 bytes
Job No.
B: 000 to 255
3 bytes
Block No.
C: Text
-
Marking string
• The update characters are returned in the form of an actual marking string.
• Make sure to send this command after the marking. The S029 communication error “Mark data request error” is returned if you send the
command without performing any marking.
• In matrix marking, the response returns the mark data of the last marked cell (block).
• If you requested something in relation to the block other than the character strings, “ “ (blank data) will be returned in the response.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-19
Communication Interface
RX
Command
5 bytes
Command Details
(5) Request the error status
Command
Error
Description
Requests the error occurring in the laser marker.
Target
None
WX
1
RX
Command
Response
5 bytes
None
Command
RX,Error[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,B,B...[CR]
Communication Interface
A: 0/1
1 byte
Displays the status of the errors. If no error is
occurring, the response returns “0”, if it is, “1”.
B: E003 to E531/W001 to W531/T000 to T017
3 bytes
Displays the currently occurring errors in
comma delimited format.
Parameter
• If multiple errors are occurring in the laser marker, a response is returned in comma delimited format as follows.
RX,OK,1,E001,E002,W100,T000[CR]
• For details of each error, refer to the User's Manual of the laser marker unit.
(6) Clear an error
Command
ErrorClear
Description
Clears the errors currently occurring in the laser marker.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,ErrorClear[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
Command
Response
Parameter
10 bytes
None
None
• An error cannot be cleared unless its cause has been rectified.
• When you send the ErrorClear command with the cause of the laser marker error unresolved, an “OK” response is returned but the error
status will not be cleared.
• Check the ON/OFF state of the terminal block because the error clear cannot be performed for the terminal block error (T*** error except
T000).
• The error clear can be performed for T000 (during remote interlock) if the remote interlock terminal is satisfied.
1-20
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
Controller setup/management
(1) Position correction (Set/Request)
Command
AllPosition
Description
Sets/Requests the position correction in the Controller Setup.
Target
None
WX
WX,AllPosition=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,AllPosition[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
Parameter
1
A:-090.000 to 0090.000
8 bytes
X rotation angle (°)
* Default value “0”
B: -090.000 to 0090.000
8 bytes
Y rotation angle (°)
* Default value “0”
C: -180.000 to 0180.000
8 bytes
θ angle (°)
* Default value “0”
D: Depends on the area size
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Wide :-165.000 to 0165.000
Small : -025.000 to 0025.000
8 bytes
X coordinate correction amount (mm)
* Default value “0”
E: Depends on the area size
Normal: -062.500 to 0062.500
Other model : “X/Y coordinates position correction”
in
“Model-Specific Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
8 bytes
Y coordinate correction amount (mm)
* Default value “0”
F: Depends on the area size
Normal : -021.000 to 0021.000
Wide :-021.000 to 0021.000
Small : -015.000 to 0015.000
8 bytes
Z correction amount (mm)
* Default value “0”
Communication Interface
RX
Command
11 bytes
• This command is applied to all jobs. If the job pre-expansion function is enabled, it takes time because the response is returned after all
job expansion processings are finished.
• The X/Y rotations angle will be disabled in jobs containing blocks having other than a 3D shape of “XY plane”.
• The following restrictions exist in the case of on-the-fly marking.
• The coordinate correction with the same coordinate on the movement direction (X/Y coordinate) is disabled
• The rotation correction of the coordinate that crosses orthogonally on the movement direction (X/Y rotation angle) is disabled
• θ angle can be corrected up to ±2.000°
(2) Date/time setting (Set/Request)
Command
TimeSetting
Description
Sets/Requests the date and time of the internal clock.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,TimeSetting=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
Command
RX,TimeSetting[CR]
Response
Parameter
11 bytes
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
A:2000 to 2099
4 bytes
Year: 4 digits
B: 01 to 12
2 bytes
Month
C: 01 to 31
2 bytes
Day
D: 00 to 23
2 bytes
Hour
E: 00 to 59
2 bytes
Minute
F: 00 to 59
2 bytes
Second
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-21
Command Details
(3) Laser power offset (Set/Request)
Command
PowerOffset
Description
Sets/Requests the laser power offset in the Unit Setup.
Target
None
WX
1
RX
Command
WX,PowerOffset=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
Command
RX,PowerOffset[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Communication Interface
Parameter
11 bytes
A:-100.0 to 0100.0
Power offset amount (%)
* Default value “0”
6 bytes
• If the power offset value set to the block's laser power exceeds 100%, the value will be fixed at 100%.
• This command is applied to all jobs. If the job pre-expansion function is enabled, it takes time because the response is returned after all
job expansion processings are finished.
• This command is not applied to the block whose laser power is 0%.
(4) Set barcode verification
Command
BarcodeVerification
Description
This command is used in the barcode verification function. When this command is accepted on the barcode verification
screen, the collation string will be associated with the job No. When this command is accepted in Run mode, the
settings will switch to the job No. matching the collation string.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,BarcodeVerification=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
Command
Response
Parameter
19 bytes
None
A: Text
-
Barcode verification string (Max. 20
characters)
You can access Marking Builder Plus barcode verification screen by following the procedure below.
[Settings] tab > [Controller] > [Options] > [Register code] under [Barcode verification]
(5) Set/Request the shutter function as it relates to the laser safety module operation.
Command
LaserSafetyModuleShutter
Description
Set/Request the shutter to open/close when the laser safety module input is off.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,LaserSafetyModuleShutter=A
Response
WX,OK
Command
RX,LaserSafetyModuleShutter
Response
RX,OK,A
Parameter
24 bytes
1 byte
A:0/1
Shutter status
0:Do not close the shutter when the safety
input is off
1: Close the shutter when the safety input is off
* Default value “0”
When the shutter status turns to “1”, the restoration time from the safety input on will be extended.
(6) Timing of the marking complete output ON (Set/Request)
Command
PrintCompTiming
Description
Sets/Requests the timing of the marking complete output ON.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,PrintCompTiming=A
Response
WX,OK
Command
RX,PrintCompTiming
Response
RX,OK,A
Parameter
1-22
A:0/1
15 bytes
1 byte
Timing of the marking complete output
0: After completing the marking operation
1:When completing the operation of the
marking verification and 2D code reader
function
* Default value “0”
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(7) Add a routing table
Command
AddRouteTable
Description
Adds routing tables used for Ethernet connection.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,AddRouteTable=A,B,C[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
Command
Response
1
None
A:000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.254
15 bytes
Destination address
B:000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
15 bytes
Mask setting
C:000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
15 bytes
Transfer destination gateway
Communication Interface
Parameter
13 bytes
• Up to four routing tables can be registered. When the registration exceeds the upper limit, an S111 error will be returned.
• The values out of the subnet mask range of the destination address should be set to 0.
• When the same destination address is specified, the table will be overwritten. (This does not apply to the mask setting and transfer
destination gateway.)
• When the destination address is set to 255.255.255.255, an S024 error will occur.
• If the transfer gateway address is not belong to the LAN1 or LAN2 network, an S024 error will occur.
(8) Request the number of routing tables
Command
GetRouteTableSettingNum
Description
Requests the number of registered routing tables.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
Response
None
Command
RX,GetRouteTableSettingNum[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
23 bytes
A:0 to 4
1 byte
No. of registered tables
The number of the registered tables can be acquired.
(9) Request the routing table information
Command
GetRouteTableSetting
Description
Requests the registered routing table information.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
Response
Command
Response
Parameter
20 bytes
None
RX,GetRouteTableSetting=A[CR]
RX,OK,B,C,D[CR]
A:0 to 4
1 byte
Table index
B:000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.254
15 bytes
Destination address
C:000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
15 bytes
Mask setting
D:000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
15 bytes
Transfer destination gateway
• The information of the registered tables can be acquired. If there are no settings, 0 is returned for all parameters.
• When the value of the table index is out of range, S024 is returned.
(10) Delete a routing table
Command
DeleteRouteTable
Description
Deletes a routing table.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,DeleteRouteTable=A,B[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
Command
Response
Parameter
16 bytes
None
A:000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.254
15 bytes
Destination address
B:000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
15 bytes
Mask setting
• The table that matches the destination address and mask setting will be deleted.
• When 255.255.255.255 is specified for the destination address, an S024 error will occur.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-23
Command Details
(11) Delete all routing tables
Command
DeleteAllRouteTable
Description
Delete all routing tables.
Target
None
WX
1
RX
Command
WX,DeleteAllRouteTable[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
Command
Response
Communication Interface
Parameter
19 bytes
None
None
None
None
• The information of all registered tables is deleted.
(12) Z timing (Set/Request)
Command
ZTiming
Description
Sets/Requests the Z timing value.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,ZTiming=A,B[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
Command
RX,ZTiming[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B[CR]
A:0000 to 4000
Parameter
7 bytes
B:0/1
4 bytes
Z timing value (µs)
1 byte
Application to matrix setting
0: Do not apply the ZTiming setting to the
matrix setting.
1: Apply the ZTiming setting to the matrix
setting.
For job files that do not include matrix settings, the Z timing value is applied regardless of the parameter B setting.
1-24
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
Job No.
(1) Moving/stationary marking setting (Set/Request)
Command
OnTheFly
Description
Toggles the stationary/movement marking setting and changes/requests the movement direction.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999
WX
WX,JOB=0000,OnTheFly=A,B[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,OnTheFly[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B[CR]
A:0/1
1
1 byte
Stationary/Moving marking setting
0: Stationary marking
1: Moving marking
* Default value “0”
1 byte
Moving direction
Sets the line flow direction.
0: Bottom
1: Right
2: Top
3: Left
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
Parameter
B: 0 to 3
Communication Interface
RX
Command
8 bytes
The line flow direction will be determined with reference to the direction in which the tip of the laser head is set pointing to the left.
(2) Head orientation (Set/Request)
Command
HeadDirection
Description
Sets/Requests the head orientation.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,HeadDirection=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,HeadDirection[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
A:0 to 7
13 bytes
1 bytes
Head orientation
Sets the orientation of the head with reference
to the marking area.
0: left
1: Left (Mirror invert)
2: Right (Mirror invert)
3: Right
4: Bottom (Mirror invert)
5: Top
6: Bottom
7: Top (Mirror invert)
* Default value “0”
(3) Marking order (Set/Request)
Command
MarkingOrder
Description
Sets/Requests the marking order.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,MarkingOrder=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,MarkingOrder[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
12 bytes
1 byte
A:0/1
Marking order
0: Group/block no. order
1: Auto
* Default value “0”
This command is only enabled for stationary marking.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-25
Command Details
(4) Continuous stationary marking (Set/Request)
1
Command
ContinuousStationaryMarking
Description
Sets/Requests to enable/disable the function, marking count, and interval of the continuous marking function in
stationary marking.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,ContinuousStationaryMarking=A,B,C[CR]
Communication Interface
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,ContinuousStationaryMarking[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]
Parameter
27 bytes
A:1/2
1 byte
Continuous marking setting
1: Disabled
2: Enabled
* Default value “1”
B: 00002 to 65535
5 bytes
Continuous marking count (times)
* A: Fixed value of “2” when 1
C: 0000.0 to 0009.9
6 bytes
Continuous interval (s)
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 1
This command is only enabled for stationary marking.
(5) Movement parameters (Set/Request)
Command
OnTheFlyMarking
Description
Sets/Requests the movement parameters of the movement marking function.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999
WX
RX
15 bytes
Command
WX,JOB=0000,OnTheFlyMarking=A,B,C,D[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,OnTheFlyMarking[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D[CR]
Parameter
A:0/1
1 byte
Moving method
0: Constant
1: Encoder
* Default value “0”
B: Depends on the area size
Normal : 0000.1 to 4000.0
Other model : “Line speed” of
Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
6 bytes
Line speed (mm/s)
* A: Fixed value of “0.1” when 1
* Default value “Normal: 300”/”Wide:
450”/”Small: 150”
C: 0
1 byte
Fixed value
D: 001.0 to 200.0
5 bytes
Encoder pulse count (Pulse/mm)
* Default value “Normal: 50”/”Wide:
20”/”Small: 100”
“Model-Specific
This command is only enabled for movement marking.
(6) Movement marking trigger delay (Set/Request)
Command
OnTheFlyTriggerDelay
Description
Sets/Requests the “distance to the sensor” and “marking position offset” of the movement marking function.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,OnTheFlyTriggerDelay=A,B[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,OnTheFlyTriggerDelay[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B[CR]
20 bytes
A:0000.0 to 1200.0
6 bytes
Distance to sensor (mm)
* Default value : “Normal: 62.6”/”Wide:
165.1”/”Small: 25.1”
B: -1200.0 to 01200.0
7 bytes
Marking position offset (mm)
* Default value “0”
Parameter
• This command is only enabled for movement marking.
• Configure the setting such that the sum of “the distance to the sensor” and “marking position offset” is greater than the start position in the
movement range setting. If the movement range setting is disabled, values smaller than the default value will not be accepted.
1-26
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(7) Continuous movement marking (Set/Request)
Command
OnTheFlyContinuousMarking
Description
Sets/Requests to enable/disable the function, marking count, and interval of the continuous marking function in
movement marking.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
25 bytes
WX,JOB=0000,OnTheFlyContinuousMarking=A,B,C[CR]
WX,OK [CR]
RX,JOB=0000,OnTheFlyContinuousMarking[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]
1
A:0/1/2
1 bytes
Continuous marking setting
0: Mark while trigger ON
1: Continuous marking disabled
2: Continuous marking enabled
* Default value “1”
B: 00002 to 65535
5 bytes
Continuous marking count (times)
* A: Fixed value of “2” when 0/1
C: 0000.1 to 1200.0
6 bytes
Continuous interval (mm)
* A: Fixed value of “100” when 1
Parameter
Communication Interface
Response
Command
This command is only enabled for movement marking.
(8) Marking range setting (Set/Request)
Command
OnTheFlyMarkingArea
Description
Sets/Requests to enable/disable the function, start position, and end position of the marking range setting of the
movement marking function.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
19 bytes
WX,JOB=0000,OnTheFlyMarkingArea=A,B,C[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,OnTheFlyMarkingArea[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]
A:0/1
Parameter
B: Depends on the area size
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Other model : “Start position” of
Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
C: Depends on the area size
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Other model : “End position” of
Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
“Model-Specific
“Model-Specific
1 byte
Marking range setting
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”
8 bytes
Start position (mm)
* Default value : “Normal: 31.25”/”Wide:
82.5”/”Small: 12.5”
8 bytes
End position (mm)
* Default value : “Normal: -31.25”/”Wide:
-82.5”/”Small: -12.5”
This command is only enabled for movement marking.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-27
Command Details
(9) Workpiece position adjustment (Plane) (Set/Request)
Command
JobPosition
Description
Sets/Requests the correction inside the horizontal plane in the workpiece position adjustment.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999
WX
1
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,JobPosition=A,B,C,D,E[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,JobPosition[CR]
Response
Communication Interface
Parameter
15 bytes
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E[CR]
A: Depends on the area size
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Other model :
“Movement reference point X/
Y coordinates” of “Model-Specific Input Value List”
(Page 1-92)
8 bytes
Movement reference point X(mm)
* Default value “0”
B: Depends on the area size
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Other model :
“Movement reference point X/
Y coordinates” of “Model-Specific Input Value List”
(Page 1-92)
8 bytes
Movement reference point Y(mm)
* Default value “0”
C: Depends on the area size
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Wide : -165.000 to 0165.000
Small : -025.000 to 0025.000
8 bytes
X coordinate correction amount (mm)
* Default value “0”
D: Depends on the area size
Normal : -125.000 to 0125.000
Other model :
“Correction amount X/Y” of “ModelSpecific Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
8 bytes
Y coordinate correction amount (mm)
* Default value “0”
E: -180.000 to 0180.000
8 bytes
θ angle correction amount (°)
* Default value “0”
• The θ angle correction is performed, where the origin is the position where the correction amount has been applied to the movement
reference point.
• Workpiece position adjustment is only enabled for stationary marking.
(10) Height correction (Set/Request)
Command
HeightCorrection
Description
Sets/Requests the correction method and setting values for the workpiece position correction in the height direction.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,HeightCorrection=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,HeightCorrection[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
Parameter
A:0/6
1 byte
Height correction method
0: Fixed
6: Auto focus (MD-X2050(A) only)
* Default value “0”
B: Depends on the area size
Normal : -21.000 to 021.000
Wide : -21.000 to 021.000
Small : -15.000 to 015.000
7 bytes
Correction amount Z coordinate (mm)
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 5/6
* Default value “0”
C: 1 to 9
1 byte
Measurement count (times)
* A: Fixed value of “3” when 0
* Default value “3”
D: Depends on the area size
Normal : -20.999 to 042.000
“Upper tolerance limit” of
“Model-Specific Input
Value List” (Page 1-92)
7 bytes
Upper tolerance limit (mm)
* A: Fixed value of “21” when 0
* Default value “21”
E: Depends on the area size
Normal : -20.999 to 042.000
“Lower tolerance limit” of
“Model-Specific Input
Value List” (Page 1-92)
7 bytes
Lower tolerance limit (mm)
* A: Fixed value of “-21” when 0
* Default value “-21”
1 byte
If out of range,
1: Mark (warning output)
2: Do not mark (error output)
* A: Fixed value of “1” when 0
* Default value “1”
F: 1/2
1-28
16 bytes
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(11) Common block marking parameters (Set/Request)
Command
CommonMarkingParameter
Description
Sets/Requests the common block marking parameters that can be used commonly in jobs.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,CommonMarkingParameter=A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J,K,L[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,CommonMarkingParameter[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J,K,L[CR]
1
A:000.0 to 100.0
5 bytes
Common laser power (%)
* Default value “0”
B: Depends on the area size
Normal : 00001 to 12000
Other model :
“Scan speed” of “Model-Specific
Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
5 bytes
Common scan speed (mm/s)
* Default value “1000”
C: Differs depending on the model
Normal : 000 to 400
Other model :
“Pulse frequency” of “ModelSpecific Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
3 bytes
Common pulse frequency (kHz)
* Default value “100”
D: Depends on the area size
Normal : 0210 to 0210
Other model :
“Spot variable” of “Model-Specific
Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
4 bytes
Common spot variable
* Default value “0”
E:001 to 100
3 bytes
Common marking count (times)
* Default value “1”
F: Depends on the area size
Normal : -021.000 to 0021.000
Wide :-021.000 to 0021.000
Small : -015.000 to 0015.000
8 bytes
Common Z coordinate (mm)
* Default value “0”
G: 0.000 to 1.000
5 bytes
Common fill interval (mm)
* Default value “0.06”
H: 00 to 04/06
2 bytes
Common quality level
00: Top speed
01: Speed priority
02: Standard
03: High quality
04: Top quality
06: Top speed 2
* Default value “2”
I: 00.000 to 10.000
6 bytes
Common skip cross (mm)
* Default value “0”
J: 0/1
1 byte
End Point Control:
0: Optimize
1: Any value
K: 000 to 200
3 bytes
End Point ON Control (%)
* Fixed value “100”
L: 000 to 200
3 bytes
End Point OFF Control (%)
* Fixed value “100”
Communication Interface
Parameter
22 bytes
The fixed value is input for the end point control. It cannot be changed.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-29
Command Details
(12) Marking energy check (Set/Request)
Command
MarkingEnergy
Description
Sets/Requests the ON/OFF of the marking energy check function and the threshold setting.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999
WX
1
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,MarkingEnergy=A,B,C,D[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,MarkingEnergy[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D[CR]
Communication Interface
Parameter
13 bytes
A:0/1
1 byte
Lower limit threshold
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”
B:0/1
1 byte
Upper limit threshold
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”
C: 00000.01 to 99999.99
8 bytes
Lower limit threshold (J)
* A: Fixed value of “0.01” when 0
D: 00000.01 to 99999.99
8 bytes
Upper limit threshold (J)
* B: Fixed value of “0.01” when 0
• Marking energy check will be canceled when the next trigger is accepted within 2 seconds of completion of the marking. Therefore, make
sure to allow at least 2 seconds between the marking completion and the next marking start.
• It cannot be used on the MD-X400(A)/450(A) series.
(13) Scanner waiting position when ready (Set/Request)
Command
ScannerWaiting
Description
Sets/Requests the scanner waiting position when ready.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,ScannerWaiting=A,B,C,D[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,ScannerWaiting[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D[CR]
Parameter
14 bytes
A:0/1
1 byte
Standby coordinate
0: Auto
1: Custom coordinate
* Default value “0”
B: Depends on the area size
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Wide :-165.000 to 0165.000
Small : -025.000 to 0025.000
8 bytes
Standby X coordinate (mm)
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
C: Depends on the area size
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Other model :
“Y coordinate” of “Model-Specific
Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
8 bytes
Standby Y coordinate (mm)
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
D: Depends on the area size
Normal : -021.000 to 0021.000
Wide :-021.000 to 0021.000
Small : -015.000 to 0015.000
8 bytes
Standby Z coordinate (mm)
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
When setting the standby coordinate to auto, standby is done on the coordinate where the scanner will be used firstly at work flow.
1-30
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(14) Camera magnification when ready (Set/Request)
Command
CameraWaitingScale
Description
Sets/Requests the camera magnification during standby.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,CameraWaitingScale=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
Command
RX,JOB=1000,CameraWaitingScale[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A
A:0 to 3
1
1 byte
Camera magnification
0: Fixed camera (Wide)
1 Fixed camera (Standard)
2: Coaxial Camera (Wide)
3: Coaxial Camera (Standard)
• The fixed camera cannot be selected for the MD-X2050(A). If the command is executed, an S024 Illegal Command Error will occur.
• This command cannot be used for the MD-X400(A)/450(A). If the command is executed, an S095 Model Limitation Error will occur.
• When the camera magnification is set with the CameraWaitingScale command, the lighting conditions specified in the job settings are
applied, so it is recommended to set these conditions with the CameraWaitingLight command.
(15) Internal lighting status when ready (Set/Request)
Command
CameraWaitingLight
Description
Sets/Requests the status of the internal lighting during standby.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,CameraWaitingLight=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,CameraWaitingLight[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
18 bytes
1 byte
A:0/1
Lighting status of the internal lighting
0: Off
1: On
This command cannot be used for the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A). If the command is executed, an S095 Model Limitation Error will occur.
(16) External lighting status when ready (Set/Request)
Command
CameraWaitingExternalLight
Description
Sets/Requests the status of the internal lighting during standby.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,CameraWaitingExternalLight=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,CameraWaitingExternalLight[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
26 bytes
1 byte
A:0/1
Lighting status of the external lighting
0: Off
1: On
When the lighting status of the external lighting is set to On, terminal number 40, External Lightning Control Output, turns on during standby.
(17) Type of lighting for the running job (Set/Request)
Command
LightingType
Description
Sets/Requests the type of lighting set by a job during operation.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,LightingType=A
Response
WX,OK
Command
RX,JOB=0000,LightingType
Response
RX,OK,A
Parameter
A:0/1/2
12 bytes
1 byte
* Type of lightings at normal
0: Internal lighting
1: Internal lighting (halation removal)
2: External lighting
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-31
Communication Interface
Parameter
18 bytes
Command Details
(18) Approach scan speed (Set/Request)
Command
ApproachScanSpeed
Description
Sets/Requests the approach scan speed.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999
WX
1
RX
Command
Response
WX,OK [CR]
RX,JOB=0000,ApproachScanSpeed[CR]
Communication Interface
Parameter
1-32
WX,JOB=0000,ApproachScanSpeed=A[CR]
Command
Response
17 bytes
RX,OK,A[CR]
A: Depends on the area size
Normal : 00000 to 04000
Other model :
“Approach scan speed” of “ModelSpecific Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
5 bytes
Approach scan speed (mm/s)
* Default value “1000”
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
String/Logo/Barcode setting
(1) Block type (Set/Request)
Command
BlockType
Description
Sets/Requests the block type.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,BlockType=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,BlockType[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
A:-04 to 004/009
1
3 bytes
Communication Interface
RX
Command
9 bytes
Block type
-04: Hatch logo
-03: Photo
-02: Workpiece image logo
-01: Logo
000: Horizontal characters
001 :Vertical characters
002: Arc clockwise
003: Arc counterclockwise
004: Fixed Point
009: Barcode, 2D code
• When creating a new block, send this command to a non-registered block No.
• When you change the block type, the association with the 3D shape No. and the X/Y/Z coordinate layout information will be initialized.
• Fixed point is only supported in stationary marking.
• When the changing command is sent, the character string becomes (a) space(s).
(2) Barcode type (Set/Request)
Command
CodeType
Description
Sets/Requests the barcode type.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CodeType=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CodeType[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
A:01 to 16
8 bytes
2 bytes
Barcode type
01: CODE39
02: ITF
03: 2of5
04: NW7
05: JAN
06: CODE128
07: QR Code Model 1
08: QR Code Model 2
09: Micro QR Code
10: DataMatrix ECC200
11: GS1 DataBar(Truncated)
12: GS1 DataBar(Truncated) CC-A
13: GS1 DataBar Stacked
14: GS1 DataBar Stacked CC-A
15: GS1 DataBar Limited
16: GS1 DataBar Limited CC-A
17: GS1 DataMatrix
18: CODE93
* Default value “1”
This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “09: Barcode/2D Code”.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-33
Command Details
(3) String and logo files (Set/Request)
Command
CharacterString
Description
Sets/Requests the string or logo/photo file.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
1
RX
Command
Communication Interface
1-34
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CharacterString=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CharacterString[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
15 bytes
A: String/Logo file name
-
• If the block type is “-4 to -1”, the parameters
are sent in the following format:
Logo: %L<File name>
External character %F<File name>
Workpiece image: %K<File name>
Hatch logo: %T<File name>
Photo: %Z<File name>
Grayscale photo: %I<File name>
High resolution photo: %X<File name>
• If the block type is “0 to 3”, send the
parameter in string format (in less than 510
single-byte or double-byte characters).
• If the block type is “9”, send a string that
adheres to the barcode/2D code character
input rules.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “-4: Hatch logo/-3: Photo/-2: Workpiece image/-1: Logo/00:
Horizontal characters/01: Vertical characters/02: Arc clockwise/03: Arc counterclockwise/09: Barcode/2D Code”.
• To send a “, (comma)” as a string, send it in the form of “%044A” (ASCII).
• To send a “%” as a string, send it in the form of “%%” (ASCII).
• To set update characters, send the following in ASCII format.
Without zero suppression
Type
Encoding
Year: 4 digits
None
%4Y
%4T
None
%2Y
%2T
Year: 2 digits
Month
None
%02M
None
yes
Minute
None
yes
Second
365 days
%02D
%02h
h
%02m
%03X
%1P
X
M
D
D
h
T
%2P
h
m
T
%3P
%1P
%2P
yes
%2P
W
yes
%P
S
I/O encoded
character
None
%1R
%1P
Y
T
%2P
1
Y
T
%2P
B
Week
yes
%2P
m
X
T
R
X
B
%1T
Time zone
is the encoding No. (0 to 9) and
-
-
M
%03T
%1B
yes
-
Y
-
-
Right-aligned
%2M
Left-aligned
%-2M
Right-aligned
%2T M
Left-aligned
%-2T M
-
-
Right-aligned
%2D
Left-aligned
%-2D
Right-aligned
%2T D
Left-aligned
%-2T D
-
-
Right-aligned
%2h
Left-aligned
%-2h
Right-aligned
%2T h
Left-aligned
%-2T h
-
-
Right-aligned
%2m
Left-aligned
%-2m
Right-aligned
%2T m
Left-aligned
%-2T m
-
-
Right-aligned
%2s
Left-aligned
%-2s
None
%3P
Y
T
%02T
m
%2P
%02s
None
%1P
%02T
%2P
With expiration
Y
%02T
D
%2P
Without expiration
T
%02T
M
%2P
None
yes
Day of week
Y
None
None
%2P
%1T
%1P
yes
Hour
%1Y
yes
yes
Day
Y
%2P
With expiration
Right-aligned
%3X
Left-aligned
%-3X
Right-aligned
%3T X
Left-aligned
%-3T X
-
-
-
-
T
B
-
T
W
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
is the expiration No. (0 to 9).
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-35
Communication Interface
Year: 1 digits
yes
Without expiration
With zero suppression
Command Details
• To set a counter, send the following in ASCII format.
Type
Zero suppression
Padding
Alignment
None
-
-
Auto
-
Serial counter
1
yes
Specify Digits
Encoding
yes
%0
P
None
C
C
C
%P
%0
C
C
%C
C
C
Right-aligned
%
P
C
C
%
C
C
Left-aligned
%-
P
C
C
%-
C
C
● is the encoding No. (0 to 9), ■ is the counter No. (0 to 9, A to J), and ▲ is the No. of digits (1 to 10).
Communication Interface
• To set a link, send the following in ASCII format.
Reference
Reference parameters
GS1 DataBar & CC-A
Barcode
GS1 DataMatrix
Setting code
GS1 DataBar
%H<
CC-A
%H<
2>
Add check digit
%H<
C>
1>
Add start-stop character
%H<
*>
Add check digit & Add start-stop character
%H<
C*>
Entire encoded string
%H<
00A>
Specify AI number (AI added)
%H<
A>
Specify AI number (AI not added)
%H<
Other blocks
-
%H<
>
>
is the block No. (000 to 255) and
is the referenced AI number (Nth AI).
The range specification options add the following before the “>” symbol.
“SxxxLxxx”: S is set with the start position, L is set with the number of reference characters, and XXX is set with the number of characters
(001 to 510).
• Send the following by ASCII when a control code is set to the barcode or 2D code.
1-36
Control code
Setting code
Control code
Setting code
Control code
NUL
%000A
CR
%013A
SUB
Setting code
%026A
SOH
%001A
SO
%014A
ESC
%027A
STX
%002A
SI
%015A
FS
%028A
ETX
%003A
DLE
%016A
GS
%029A
EOT
%004A
DC1
%017A
RS
%030A
ENQ
%005A
DC2
%018A
US
%031A
ACK
%006A
DC3
%019A
DEL
%127A
BEL
%007A
DC4
%020A
FNC1
%901A
BS
%008A
NAK
%021A
FNC2
%902A
HT
%009A
SYN
%022A
FNC3
%903A
LF
%010A
ETB
%023A
FNC4
%904A
VT
%011A
CAN
%024A
FF
%012A
EM
%025A
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(4) Font setting (Set/Request)
Command
CharacterFont
Description
Sets/Requests the font No., line type, line width, line count, and overlap rate used in a string.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CharacterFont=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CharacterFont[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
1
B: 0 to 2
1 byte
Line type
0: Single
1: Multiple
2: Wobble
* Default value “0”
C: Depends on the area size
Normal : 0.010 to 5.000
Other model :
“Line width” of “Model-Specific
Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
5 bytes
Thickness (mm)
* B: Fixed value of “0.1” when 0
* Default value “Normal: 0.2”/”Wide:
0.3”/”Small: 0.1”
D:0/1
1 byte
Auto number of lines
0: Any value
1: Auto
* B: Fixed value of “0” when 0
* Default value “0”
E:002 to 100
3 bytes
Number of multiples (lines)
* D: Fixed value of “2” when 1
* Default value “4”
F: 75.0 to 98.0
4 bytes
Overlap rate (%)
* B: Fixed value of “80” when other than 2
* Default value “80”
• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “00: Horizontal characters/01: Vertical characters/02: Arc
clockwise/03: Arc counterclockwise”. Cannot be sent to the block of TrueTypeFont.
• Multiple and Wobble thicknesses can be set to a ratio of up to x0.2 compared to the smaller character height or width.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-37
Communication Interface
2 bytes
Font No.
-1: Quick
00: Standard
01: Small
02 to 11: User font
* Quick: Available on only MD-U1000 series
* Default value “0”
A:00 to 11
Parameter
13 bytes
Command Details
(5) Character size (Set/Request)
Command
CharacterSize
Description
Sets/Requests the height, width, character layout, space, and full width/full height of a string.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
1
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CharacterSize=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CharacterSize[CR]
Response
Communication Interface
Parameter
13 bytes
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
A: Depends on the area size
Normal : 000.100 to 125.000
Other model :
“Height/Width” of “Model-Specific
Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
7 bytes
Height (mm)
* Default value “3”
B: Depends on the area size
Normal : 000.100 to 125.000
Other model :
“Height/Width” of “Model-Specific
Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
7 bytes
Character width (mm)
* Default value “2”
C:0/1/3
1 byte
Character Layout
0: Character space
1: Distribute
3: Character pitch
D: Depends on the area size
Normal : 000.000 to 180.000
Other model :
“Character space” of “ModelSpecific Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
8 bytes
Space (mm)
* Default value “0.5”
E: Depends on the area size
Normal : 000.100 to 180.000
Other model :
“Character full width/full height” of
“Model-Specific Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
7 bytes
Full width/Full height (mm)
* Default value “7”
F: Depends on the area size
Normal : 000.000 to 180.000
Other model :
“Character pitch” of “Model-Specific
Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
7 bytes
Character pitch
* Default value “0”
• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “00: Horizontal characters/01: Vertical characters/02: Arc
clockwise/03: Arc counterclockwise”.
• You can only set the character height/width ratio between x0.2 and x5.
• The character width and character spacing cannot be set when the ratio specification or proportional is enabled and when the font is a
TrueTypeFont. Also, they cannot be set when the character spacing of C is other than 0.
• C to F: Cannot be set when the character string is circle layout.
• The character pitch can be set for a TrueType font only.
(6) Logo size (Set/Request)
Command
LogoSize
Description
Sets/Requests the height and width of a logo (including hatch logo and workpiece image logo).
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,LogoSize=A,B[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,LogoSize[CR]
Response
Parameter
8 bytes
RX,OK,A,B[CR]
A: Depends on the area size
Normal : 000.002 to 125.000
Other model :
“Logo Height/Width” of “ModelSpecific Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
7 bytes
Logo height (mm)
* Default value depends on the original DXF
size
B: Depends on the area size
Normal : 000.002 to 125.000
Other model :
“Logo Height/Width” of “ModelSpecific Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
7 bytes
Logo width (mm)
* Default value depends on the original DXF
size
• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “-4: Hatch logo/-2: Workpiece image/-1: Logo”.
• When the aspect ratio is maintained, the logo height is set automatically based on the value of the logo width.
1-38
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(7) String proportional setting (Set/Request)
Command
CharacterProportional
Description
Sets/Requests the enable/disable of the proportional function and the minimum character width of a string.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
21 bytes
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CharacterProportional=A,B[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CharacterProportional[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B[CR]
1
1 byte
Proportional setting
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”
B: 000 to 100
3 bytes
Minimum character width (%)
* A: Fixed value of “20” when 0
* Default value “20”
Parameter
Communication Interface
A:0/1
This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “00: Horizontal characters/02: Arc clockwise/03: Arc
counterclockwise”.
(8) String ratio setting (Set/Request)
Command
CharacterRatio
Description
Sets/Requests the enable/disable of string ratio setting and the width and space ratios of a string.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CharacterRatio=A,B,C[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CharacterRatio[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]
Parameter
14 bytes
A:0/1
1 byte
Ratio setting
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”
B: 020.00 to 500.00
6 bytes
Character width ratio (%)
* A: Fixed value of “20” when 0
* Default value “66.67” if the character type is
system font and “100” if it is a TrueType font
7 bytes
Character space ratio (%)
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
* Default value “25” when the system font,
circle layout, and character layout are
“character spacing,” and “0” for others.
C: Depends on the block type
Horizontal characters/Vertical characters: -100.00 to
1000.00
Arc (counter) clockwise string: 0000.00 to 1000.00
• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “00: Horizontal characters/01: Vertical characters/02: Arc
clockwise/03: Arc counterclockwise”.
• The ratio specification cannot be set in the case of TrueTypeFont.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-39
Command Details
(9) Arc string character layout setting (Set/Request)
Command
ArcCharacter
Description
Sets/request the character layout, radius, space, character angle space, and open angle of an arc string.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
1
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,ArcCharacter=A,B,C,D,E[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,ArcCharacter[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E[CR]
Communication Interface
Parameter
12 bytes
A:0 to 2
1 bytes
Arc character layout
0: Character space
1: Angular interval
2: Distribute angle
* Default value “0”
B: 000.001 to 9999.99
7 bytes
Arc radius (mm)
* Default value “20”
C: Depends on the area size
Normal : 000.000 to 180.000
Other model :
“Arc character space” of “ModelSpecific Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
7 bytes
Arc character space (mm)
* A: Fixed value of “0” when other than 0
* Default value “0.5”
D: 000.000 to 359.999
7 bytes
Arc character angle space (°)
* A: Fixed value of “0” when other than 1
* Default value “10”
E: 000.000 to 359.999
7 bytes
Arc open angle (°)
* A: Fixed value of “0” when other than 2
* Default value “120”
This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “02: Arc clockwise/03: Arc counterclockwise”.
1-40
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(10) Barcode/2D code setting (Set/Request)
Command
CodeSetting
Description
Sets/Requests the format, check digit setting, DataMatrix 06 macro setting, and QR Code error correction rate of a
barcode/2D code.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CodeSetting=A,B,C,D[CR]
WX,OK [CR]
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CodeSetting[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D[CR]
A:0/1/2
B:0/1
C:0/1
D:0/1/2/3
1
1 byte
Format
0: Normal
1: Black/White inversion
2: Overprinting
* Default value “0”
1 byte
Check Digit
0: None
1: Yes
* Fixed value of “0” when the code type is
other than CODE39/ITF/NW7
* Default value “0”
1 byte
DataMatrix 06 macro
0: None
1: Add
* Fixed value of “0” when the code type is
other than DataMatrix ECC200
* Default value “0”
1 byte
QR Code error correction rate
0: L (7%)
1: M(15%)
2: Q(25%)
3: H (30%)
* Fixed value of “0” when the code type is
other than QR Model 1/2 or Micro QR
* Default value “3” when the code type is QR
model 1/2, “2” when micro QR, and “0” for
others.
• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “09: Barcode/2D Code”.
• If “Overprinting” is selected as the format, overprinting No.0 will be assigned to “Base” and overprinting No.1 will be assigned to “Code”,
respectively. Then, set the overprinting marking parameters (MultiPassMarkingParameter), overprinting pattern (MultiPassPattern), and
overprinting fill parameters (MultiPassFillParameters).
• If you set the format to “Normal or Black/White Inversion”, the parameters in all overprinting No. will be initialized.
• The format of “2: Overprinting” cannot be selected in the case of JAN/EAN/UPC/GS1 DataBar.
• The error correction proportion of a QR code cannot be set to H (30%) in the case of the micro QR.
(11) Barcode size (Set/Request)
Command
BarcodeSize
Description
Sets/Requests the height, narrow bar, bar ratio, and quiet zone width of a barcode.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,BarcodeSize=A,B,C,D[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,BarcodeSize[CR]
Response
Parameter
11 bytes
RX,OK,A,B,C,D[CR]
A: Depends on the area size
Normal : 000.200 to 125.000
Other model :
“Barcode height” of “Model-Specific
Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
7 bytes
Barcode height (mm)
* Default value “5”
B: 00.010 to 10.000
6 bytes
Narrow bar (mm)
* Default value “0.2”
C: 002.0 to 004.0
5 bytes
Bar ratio (x)
* Default value “2.5”
D: 01 to 99
2 bytes
Quiet zone (x)
* Default value “10”
• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “09: Barcode/2D Code” AND barcode type (CodeType) of
“01: CODE39/02: ITF/03: 2of5/04: NW7/05: JAN/06: CODE128/18: CODE93”.
• The bar ratio cannot be set in the case of JAN/EAN/UPC/CODE93/CODE128.
• The quiet zone cannot be set when the format is “Normal.”
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-41
Communication Interface
Response
Command
Parameter
11 bytes
Command Details
(12) GS1 DataBar size (Set/Request)
1
Command
GS1DataBarSize
Description
Sets/Requests the module width, linear code height, separator height, 2D module height, guard width, and quiet zone
width of GS1 DataBar.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
14 bytes
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,GS1DataBarSize=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
Communication Interface
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,GS1DataBarSize[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
A:00.010 to 10.000
6 bytes
Module width (mm)
* Default value 0.25
B: Depends on the area size
Normal : 000.200 to 125.000
Other model :
“Linear code height” of “ModelSpecific Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
7 bytes
Linear code height (mm)
* Default value “8.25” for GS1 DataBar
Truncated, “3” for GS1 DataBar Stacked
and “2.5” for GS1 DataBar Limited
C: 0.010 to 5.000
5 bytes
Separator height (mm)
* Fixed value of “0.25” when the barcode
type is GS1 DataBar (Truncated) and GS1
DataBar Limited.
* Default value “0.25”
D: 0.010 to 5.000
5 bytes
2D module height (mm)
* Fixed value of “0.5” when the barcode type
is other than CC-A
* Default value “0.5”
E:00 to 10
2 bytes
Guard (x)
* Default value “0”
F: 01 to 50
2 bytes
Quiet zone (x)
* Default value “1”
Parameter
• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “09: Barcode/2D Code” AND barcode type (CodeType) of “11
to 16: GS1 DataBar”.
• The guard can be set when the format is “Black/white inversion.”
• The quiet zone can be set when CC-A and the format is “Black/white inversion.”
(13) DataMatrix size (Set/Request)
Command
DataMatrixSize
Description
Sets/Requests the symbol size, cell size, and quiet zone width of DataMatrix.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,DataMatrixSize=A,B,C[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,DataMatrixSize[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]
14 bytes
Symbol size
0001:10x10
0020:16x48
0004:16x16
0023:72x72
0007:22x22
0026:96x96
0010:32x32 0029:132x132
0013:44x44
0003:14x14
0016:8x32
0006:20x20
0019:16x36
0009:26x26
0022:64x64
0012:40x40
0025:88x88
0015:8x18
0028:120x120 0018:12x36
0002:12x12
0021:52x52
0005:18x18
0024:80x80
0008:24x24 0027:104x104
0011:36x36 0030:144x144
0014:48x48
0031:8 x 48
0017:12x16
0032:8 x 64
A:0001 to 0030
4 bytes
B: 00.010 to 05.000
6 bytes
Cell size (mm)
* Default value “0.2”
C: 01 to 05
2 bytes
Quiet zone (x)
* Default value “1”
Parameter
0033:8 x 80
0034:8 x 96
0035:8 x 120
0036:8 x 144
0037:12 x 64
0038:12 x 88
0039:16 x 64
0040:20 x 36
0041:20 x 44
0042:20 x 64
0043:22 x 48
0044:24 x 48
0045:24 x 64
0046:26 x 40
0047:26 x 48
0048:26 x 64
• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “09: Barcode/2D Code” AND barcode type (CodeType) of
“10: DataMatrix, 17: GS1 DataMatrix”.
• The quiet zone cannot be set when the format is “Normal.”
1-42
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(14) DataMatrix cell size ratio in X direction (Set/Request)
Command
DataMatrixCellSizeRatioX
Description
Set or request the DataMatrix cell size ratio in the X direction
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,DataMatrixCellSizeRatioX=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,DataMatrixCellSizeRatioX[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
A:050.0 to 200.0
1
5 bytes
Ratio (%)
• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “09: Barcode/2D Code” AND barcode type (CodeType) of
“10: DataMatrix, 17: GS1 DataMatrix”.
(15) DataMatrix cell size ratio in Y direction (Set/Request)
Command
DataMatrixCellSizeRatioY
Description
Set or request the DataMatrix cell size ratio in the Y direction
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,DataMatrixCellSizeRatioY=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,DataMatrixCellSizeRatioY[CR]
Response
Parameter
24 bytes
RX,OK,A[CR]
A:050.0 to 200.0
5 bytes
Ratio (%)
• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “09: Barcode/2D Code” AND barcode type (CodeType) of
“10: DataMatrix, 17: GS1 DataMatrix”.
(16) QR Code size (Set/Request)
Command
QRCodeSize
Description
Sets/Requests the version, cell size, and quiet zone width of QR Code.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,QRCodeSize=A,B,C,D[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,QRCodeSize[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D[CR]
10 bytes
Version
A:0001 to 0030
4 bytes
Parameter
1: 1/M1
4: 4/M4
7: -/M7
10: -/M10
13: -/M13
16: -/M16
19: -/M19
22: -/M22
25: -/M25
28: -/M28
2: 2/M2
5: 5/M5
8: -/M8
11: -/M11
14: -/M14
17: -/M17
20: -/M20
23: -/M32
26: -/M26
29: -/M29
3: 3/M3
6: -/M6
9: -/M9
12: -/M12
15: -/M15
18: -/M18
21: -/M21
24: -/M24
27: -/M27
30: -/M30
* Default value “0”
* The input range for Model 1 is “0 to 14”
* The input range for Micro QR is “0 to 4”
B: 00.010 to 05.000
6 bytes
Cell size (mm)
* Default value “0.2”
C:0/1
1 byte
Mode Auto
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
* Default value “1”
D: 01 to 05
2 bytes
Quiet zone (x)
* Default value “4” for QR Code Model 1/2, “2”
for Micro QR Code
• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “09: Barcode/2D Code” AND barcode type (CodeType) of
“07: QR Model 1/08: QR Model 2/09: Micro QR”.
• The mode AUTO cannot be set in the case of the micro QR.
• The quiet zone can be set when the format is “Black/white inversion.”
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-43
Communication Interface
Parameter
24 bytes
Command Details
(17) QR code cell size ratio in X direction (Set/Request)
Command
QRCodeCellSizeRatioX
Description
Set or request the QR cell size ratio in the X direction
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
1
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,QRCodeCellSizeRatioX=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,QRCodeCellSizeRatioX[CR]
Response
Communication Interface
Parameter
20 bytes
RX,OK,A[CR]
A:050.0 to 200.0
5 bytes
Ratio (%)
• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “09: Barcode/2D Code” AND barcode type (CodeType) of
“07: QR Model 1/08: QR Model 2/09: Micro QR”.
• The mode AUTO cannot be set in the case of the micro QR.
(18) QR code cell size ratio in Y direction (Set/Request)
Command
QRCodeCellSizeRatioY
Description
Set or request the QR cell size ratio in the Y direction
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
20 bytes
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,QRCodeCellSizeRatioY=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,QRCodeCellSizeRatioY[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
A:050.0 to 200.0
5 bytes
Ratio (%)
• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “09: Barcode/2D Code” AND barcode type (CodeType) of
“07: QR Model 1/08: QR Model 2/09: Micro QR”.
• The mode AUTO cannot be set in the case of the micro QR.
(19) Block position (Set/Request)
Command
BlockPosition
Description
Sets/Requests the X/Y coordinates and Z coordinate reference of the common parameters of a block.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,BlockPosition=A,B,C[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,BlockPosition[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]
Parameter
1-44
13 bytes
A: Depends on the area size
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Wide :-165.000 to 0165.000
Small : -025.000 to 0025.000
8 bytes
X coordinate (mm)
* Default value “0”
B: Depends on the area size
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Other model :
“Y coordinate” of “Model-Specific
Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
8 bytes
Y coordinate (mm)
* Default value “0”
C: Depends on the area size and 3D shape type
• The 3D shape is XY plane
Normal/Wide : -021.000 to 0021.000
Small
: -015.000 to 0015.000
• The 3D shape is slope
Normal
: -083.500 to 0083.500
Wide
: -186.000 to 0186.000
Small
: -040.000 to 0040.000
• The 3D shape is cylinder, cone or sphere
Normal
: -261.000 to 0261.000
Wide
: -621.000 to 0621.000
Small
: -115.000 to 0115.000
• The 3D shape is Z-map
Normal
: -125.000 to 0125.000
Wide
: -330.000 to 0330.000
Small
: -050.000 to 0050.000
8 bytes
Z coordinate (mm)
* Fixed value of “9999.999” if the common
block marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “0”
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(20) Block layout (Set/Request)
Command
BlockLayout
Description
Sets/Requests the reference point, block angle, start angle, and character angle of a block.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,BlockLayout=A,B,C,D,E[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,BlockLayout[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E[CR]
1
A:0 to 8
1 bytes
Block reference point:
0: Left
1: Right
2: Center
3: Lower left
4: Lower right
5: Upper left
6: Upper right
7: Top
8: Bottom
* Default value “3”
B: -180.000 to 0180.000
8 bytes
Block angle (°)
* Fixed value of “0” when the block type is arc
character
* Default value “0”
C: -180.000 to 0180.000
8 bytes
Start angle (°)
* Fixed value of “0” when the block type is
other than arc character
* Default value “90” for clockwise “-90” for
counterclockwise
D:0/1
1 bytes
Set using character angle
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
* Default value “0.”
E:-180.000 to 0180.000
8 bytes
Character angle (°)
* Default value “0”
This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of other than “04: Fixed point”.
(21) Fixed point emission time (Set/Request)
Command
FixedPointProcessingTime
Description
Sets/Requests the fixed point emission time.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
24 bytes
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,FixedPointProcessingTime=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,FixedPointProcessingTime[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
A:00000.1 to 65000.0
7 bytes
Emission time (ms)
* Default value “1”
This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “04: Fixed point”.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-45
Communication Interface
Parameter
11 bytes
Command Details
Marking parameters
(1) Marking parameters (Set/Request)
1
Command
MarkingParameter
Description
Sets/Requests the laser power, scan speed, pulse frequency, spot variable, and marking count of a block.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
Communication Interface
RX
Command
1-46
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,MarkingParameter=A,B,C,D,E[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,MarkingParameter[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E[CR]
Parameter
16 bytes
A:000.0 to 100.0/999.9
5 bytes
Laser power (%)
* Fixed value of “999.9” if the common block
marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “0”
B: Depends on the area size
Normal : 00001 to 12000
Other model :
“Scan speed” of “Model-Specific
Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
5 bytes
Scan speed (mm/s)
* Fixed value of “99999” if the common block
marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “1000”
C: 000 to 400
3 bytes
Pulse frequency (kHz)
* Fixed value of “999” if the common block
marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “100”
D: Depends on the area size
Normal : -210 to 0210
Other model :
“Spot variable” of “Model-Specific
Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
4 bytes
Spot variable
* Fixed value of “9999” if the common block
marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “0”
E: 001 to 100/ 999
3 bytes
Marking count (times)
* Fixed value of “999” if the common block
marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “1”
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(2) Barcode/2D code pattern setting (Set/Request)
Command
CodePattern
Description
Sets/Requests the various pattern settings, cell marking order, and cell marking count of a barcode/2D code.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
11 bytes
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CodePattern=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CodePattern[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
1
3 bytes
Finder
000: None
001: F1
002: F2
255: Cell
* QR Code and B: Fixed value of “0” when
other than 0 to 2
* Default value “1”
3 bytes
Alignment
000: None
001: A1
002: A2
255: Cell
* DataMatrix and C: Fixed value of “0” when
other than 0 to 2
* Default value “1”
3 bytes
Cell
(QR Code/DataMatrix)
000: None/None
001: M1/C1
002: M2/C2
003: M3/C3
004: M4/C4
005: M5/C5
006: M6/C6
007: M7/C7
008: M8/C8
* Default value “1”
E:000 to 003
3 bytes
Cell marking order
0: None
1: Continuous
2: Skip 1 cell
3: Skip 2 cell
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 8 to 11
F: 001 to 100
3 bytes
Cell marking count (times)
* A: Fixed value of “1” when 8 to 11
* Default value “1”
A:000 to 13/254
B: 000 to 002/255
Parameter
C:000 to 002/255
D: 000 to 008
• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “09: Barcode/2D Code”.
• “D: 0” cannot be set when “B: 0/255.”
• “D: 0” cannot be set when “C: 0/255.”
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-47
Communication Interface
3 bytes
Pattern
(QR Code/DataMatrix/Bar Code)
000: -/-/Alternate
001: Pattern 1/A/Unidirectional
002: Pattern 2/B/003: Pattern 3/C/004: Pattern 4/D/005: Pattern 5/E/006: Pattern 6/F/007: Pattern 7/Entire pattern 1/008: Entire pattern 1/Entire pattern 2/009: Entire pattern 2/Entire pattern 3/010: Entire pattern 3/Entire pattern 4/011: Entire pattern 4/Entire pattern 5/012: Entire pattern 5/Entire pattern 6/013: Entire pattern 6/-/254: Individual/Individual/ * Default value “9” for QR, DataMatrix, “0” for
Bar Code
* Entire pattern 5/6: Available on only MDU1000 series
Command Details
(3) Hatch logo pattern setting (Set/Request)
Command
HatchPattern
Description
Sets/Requests the fill type, pattern, fill direction, start position, fill angle, and fill cross angle of a hatch logo.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
1
RX
Command
12 bytes
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,HatchPattern=A,B,C,D,E,F,G[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,HatchPattern[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F,G[CR]
Communication Interface
1 bytes
Fill Type
0: Boundary + Fill
1: Fill
2: Boundary
* Default value “0”
1 byte
Pattern
0: Slant
2: Cross
3: Contour
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 2
* Default value “0”
1 byte
Slant/Cross direction
0: Right to Left
1: Left to Right
2: Left to right, Right to left
3: Right to left, Left to right
4: Left to right, Right to left (High Speed)
5: Right to left, Left to right (High Speed)
* Fixed value of “2” when A is 0 or B is 2
* Default value “2”
* 4/5: Available on only MD-U1000 series
1 byte
Contour direction
0: Clockwise
1: Counterclockwise
2: Clockwise to Counterclockwise
3: Counterclockwise to Clockwise
* Fixed value of “0” when A is 2 or B is 0/1
* Default value “0”
E: 0/1
1 byte
Contour drawing start position
0: Inside
1: Outside
* Fixed value of “1” when A is 2 or B is 0/1
* Default value “0”
F: 000 to 359
3 bytes
Slant/Cross fill angle (°)
* Fixed value of “0” when A is 0 or B is 2
* Default value “0”
G: 000 to 359
3 bytes
Cross angle (°)
* Fixed value of “0” when A is 2 or B is 0/2
* Default value “0”
A:0 to 2
B: 0 to 3
C: 0 to 5
Parameter
D: 0 to 3
This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “-4: Hatch logo”.
1-48
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(4) TrueType font pattern setting (Set/Request)
Command
TTFPattern
Description
Sets/Requests the fill type, pattern, fill direction, fill angle, and fill cross angle of a TrueType font.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
10 bytes
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,TTFPattern=A,B,C,D,E[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,TTFPattern[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E[CR]
1
1 byte
Pattern
0: Slant
2: Cross
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 2
* Default value “0”
C: 0 to 5
1 byte
Fill direction
0: Right to Left
1: Left to Right
2: Left to right, Right to left
3: Right to left, Left to right
4: Left to right, Right to left (High Speed)
5: Right to left, Left to right (High Speed)
* A: Fixed value of “2” when 2/3
* Default value “2”
* 4/5: Available on only MD-U1000 series
D: 000 to 359
3 byte
Fill angle (°)
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 2
* Default value “0”
E:000 to 359
3 byte
Fill cross angle (°)
* Fixed value of “0” when A is 2 or B is 0
* Default value “90”
A:0 to 2
B:0/2
Parameter
This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “00: Horizontal characters/01: Vertical characters/02: Arc
clockwise/03: Arc counterclockwise” AND the font type of TrueType font.
(5) Barcode/2D code fill marking parameters (Set/Request)
Command
CodeFillParameter
Description
Sets/Requests the fill interval and shrink fill of a barcode/2D code.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
17 bytes
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CodeFillParameter=A,B[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CodeFillParameter[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B[CR]
A:0.000 to 1.000/9.999
5 bytes
Fill interval (mm)
* Fixed value of “9.999” if the common block
marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “Normal: 0.06”/”Wide:
0.08”/”Small: 0.03”
B: Bar Code: -5.000 to 05.000
QR Code/DataMatrix: -2.500 to 02.500
6 bytes
Shrink fill (mm)
* Default value “0”
Parameter
This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “09: Barcode/2D Code”.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-49
Communication Interface
1 byte
Fill Type
0: Boundary + Fill
1: Fill
2: Boundary
* Default value “0”
Command Details
(6) Hatch logo fill marking parameters (Set/Request)
1
Command
HatchParameter
Description
Sets/Requests the fill interval, common line interval setting reference, shrink fill, no. of skipped fill lines, overprinting
enable/disable, overprinting direction, overprinting count, shrink boundary, boundary fill setting, and printing order of a
hatch logo.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
Communication Interface
RX
Command
14 bytes
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,HatchParameter=A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,HatchParameter[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H[CR]
A:0.000 to 1.000/9.999
5 bytes
Fill interval (mm)
* Fixed value of “9.999” if the common block
marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “Normal: 0.06”/”Wide:
0.08”/”Small: 0.03”
B: 00.000 to 10.000
6 bytes
Shrink fill (mm)
* Default value “0”
C: 000 to 255
3 bytes
Skip line count (lines)
* Default value “0”
D:0/1
1 bytes
Overprinting setting
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”
E: 0/1
1 byte
Overprinting direction
0: Alternate
1: Forward
* Default value “0”
F: 001 to 255
3 bytes
Overprinting count
* Default value “1”
G: 00.000 to 10.000
6 bytes
Shrink boundary (mm)
* Default value “0”
H:0/1
1 byte
Writing Order
0: Boundary -> Fill
1: Fill -> Boundary
* Default value “1”
Parameter
This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “-4: Hatch logo” and the fill type in hatch logo pattern setting
(HatchPattern) of 0: Boundary + Fill/1: Fill”.
1-50
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(7) TrueType font fill marking parameters (Set/Request)
Command
TTFParameter
Description
Sets/Requests the fill interval, common line interval setting reference, shrink fill, no. of skipped fill lines, overprinting
enable/disable, overprinting direction, overprinting count, shrink boundary, and writing order of a TrueType font.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
12 bytes
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,TTFParameter=A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H[CR]
WX,OK[CR]
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,TTFParameter[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H[CR]
1
A:0.000 to 1.000/9.999
5 bytes
Fill interval (mm)
* Fixed value of “9.999” if the common block
marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “Normal: 0.06”/”Wide:
0.08”/”Small: 0.03”
B: 00.000 to 10.000
6 bytes
Shrink fill
* Default value “0”
C: 000 to 255
3 bytes
Skip line count (lines)
* Default value “0.”
D:0/1
1 bytes
Overprinting setting
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
* Default value “0.”
E: 0/1
1 bytes
Overprinting direction
0: Alternate
1: Forward
* Default value “0.”
F: 001 to 255
3 bytes
Overprinting count
* Default value “1”
G: 00.000 to 10.000
6 bytes
Shrink boundary (mm)
* Default value “0.”
H:0/1
1 bytes
Writing order
0: Boundary -> Fill
1: Fill -> Boundary
* Default value “1”
Parameter
This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “00: Horizontal characters/01: Vertical characters/02: Arc
clockwise/03: Arc counterclockwise” AND the font type of TrueType AND the fill type in the TrueType font pattering setting (TTFPattern) of “0:
Boundary + Fill/1: Fill”.
(8) Photo setting (Set/Request)
Command
PhotoSetting
Description
Sets/Requests the gamma correction, contrast, contrast enhancement, brightness, skip dots, and intensity of a photo.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
12 byte
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,PhotoSetting=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,PhotoSetting[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
A: 0.01 to 9.99 (High resolution only)
4 bytes
Gamma correction
Default value “0.6”
A: -128 to 0127 (High resolution only)
4 bytes
Contrast
Default value “0”
C: 0/1 (High resolution only)
1 byte
Contrast enhancement
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Default value “0”
D: -128 to 0127 (High resolution only)
4 byte
Brightness
Default value “0”
E: 1 to 8 (Grayscale only)
1 byte
Skip dots
Default value “1”
F: 1 to 8 (Grayscale only)
1 byte
Intensity
Default value “3”
Parameter
• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “-3: Photo”.
• It cannot be used on the MD-F3200/5200 series.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-51
Communication Interface
Response
Command
Command Details
(9) Marking flag (Set)
Command
MarkingEnable
Description
Sets the marking flag of a block.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
1
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,MarkingEnable=A,BBB---[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
Response
13 bytes
None
Communication Interface
A:0/1/2
1 byte
Reset the marking flag
0: Set the marking flag of all blocks to OFF
1: Set the marking flag of all blocks to ON
2: Do not change other than the specified
block
1 byte
Marking flag
0: Do not Mark
1: Mark
* You can change the marking flag of
continuous blocks in a batch by sending this
parameter in multiple digits.
Parameter
B:0/1
To change the marking flag of multiple blocks in a batch, send parameter B in multiple digits.
To set block No.10 to ON, No.11 to OFF, No.12 to ON and all other blocks to OFF, send the command as described below.
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=010,MarkingEnable=0,101[CR]
(10) Individual fill marking parameters (Set/Request)
Command
FillMarkingParameter
Description
Sets/Requests to enable/disable the function and the setting values of the individual fill parameters of a hatch logo.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
20 bytes
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,FillMarkingParameter=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,FillMarkingParameter[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
A:0/1
B: 000.0 to 100.0/9.999
C: Depends on the area size
Normal : 00001 to 12000
Other model :
“Scan speed” of “Model-Specific
Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
1 byte
Individual fill parameters
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
5 byte
Fill line laser power (%)
* Fixed value of “999.9” if the common block
marking parameters are referenced
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 1
* Default value “0”
5 bytes
Fill line scan speed (mm/s)
* Fixed value of “99999” if the common block
marking parameters are referenced
* A: Fixed value of “1000” when 1
* Default value “1000”
3 bytes
Fill line pulse frequency (kHz)
* Fixed value of “999” if the common block
marking parameters are referenced
* A: Fixed value of “100” when 1
* Default value “100”
4 bytes
Fill spot variable
* Fixed value of “9999” if the common block
marking parameters are referenced
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 1
* Default value “0”
3 bytes
Fill line marking count (times)
* Fixed value of “999” if the common block
marking parameters are referenced
* A: Fixed value of “1” when 1
* Default value “1”
Parameter
D: 000 to 400
E: Depends on the area size
Normal : -210 to 0210
Other model :
“Spot variable” of “Model-Specific
Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
F: 001 to 100/999
This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “-4: Hatch logo” or TrueTypeFont.
1-52
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(11) Jump Speed (Set/Request)
Command
JumpSpeed
Description
Sets/Requests the jump speed.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,JumpSpeed=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,JumpSpeed[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
A:0/1/2
1
1 byte
Jump speed
0: Top Speed
1: High Speed
2: Medium Speed
* Default value “0”
Communication Interface
Parameter
9 bytes
This command is enabled when the quality level (MarkingQuality) is not “05: Customize”.
(12) Nudge marking quality setting (Set/Request)
Command
MarkingQuality
Description
Sets/Requests the skip cross, common skip cross setting reference, quality level, common quality level setting
reference, and marking start wait time of a block.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,MarkingQuality=A,B,C[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,MarkingQuality[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]
6 bytes
Skip cross (mm)
* Fixed value of “99.999” if the common block
marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “0”
B: 00 to 06/99
2 bytes
Quality Level
00: Top speed
01: Speed priority
02: Standard
03: High quality
04: Top quality
05: Customize
06: Top speed
* Fixed value of “99” if the common block
marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “02”
C: 00000.0 to 65000.0
7 bytes
Wait time for start marking (ms)
* Default value “0”
A:00.000 to 10.000/99.999
Parameter
14 bytes
The skip cross can be set only for the character strings except TrueTypeFont.
(13) Approach (Set/Request)
Command
Approach
Description
Sets/Requests the block approach.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,Approach=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,Approach[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
8 bytes
A: Normal,Wide:0.000 to 5.000、Small:0.000 to
2.500
5 bytes
Approach (mm)
* Default value “0.500”
This command is enabled when the quality level (MarkingQuality) is “05: Customize”.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-53
Command Details
(14) Space approach (Set/Request)
Command
SpaceApproach
Description
Sets/Requests the space approach.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
1
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,SpaceApproach=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,SpaceApproach[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Communication Interface
Parameter
13 bytes
A:0.000 to 5.000
5 bytes
Space approach (mm)
* Default value “0.250”
This command is enabled when the quality level (MarkingQuality) is “05: Customize”.
(15) Curve correction (Set/Request)
Command
CurveCorrection
Description
Sets/Requests the curve correction.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
1-54
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CurveCorrection=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CurveCorrection[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
15 bytes
A:0/1
1 byte
Curve correction
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
* Default value “1”
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
Code overprinting parameters
(1) Barcode/2D code overprinting marking parameters (Set/Request)
Command
MultiPassMarkingParameter
Description
Specifies the overprinting order in the barcode/2D code overprinting setting and changes/requests the marking
parameters.
Target
WX
1
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255,OLP=0 to 9
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0,MultiPassMarkingParameter=A,B,C,D,E,F,G[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0,MultiPassMarkingParameter[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F,G[CR]
1 byte
Format
0: Code
1: Code (Black/white inversion)
2: Base
* Default value “2”
B: 000.0 to 100.0/999.9
5 bytes
Laser power (%)
* Fixed value of “999.9” if the common block
marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “0”
C: Depends on the area size
Normal : 00001 to 12000
Other model :
“Scan speed” of “Model-Specific
Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
5 bytes
Scan speed (mm/s)
* Fixed value of “99999” if the common block
marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “1000”
D: 000 to 400
3 bytes
Pulse frequency (kHz)
* Fixed value of “999” if the common block
marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “100”
E: Depends on the area size
Normal : -210 to 0210
Other model :
“Spot variable” of “Model-Specific
Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
4 bytes
Spot variable
* Fixed value of “9999.9” if the common block
marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “0”
F: 001 to 100/999
3 bytes
Marking count (times)
* Fixed value of “999” if the common block
marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “1”
G: Depends on the area size
Normal : 00.000 to 42.000
Other model :
“Deep dig amount” of “ModelSpecific Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
6 bytes
Deep dig amount (mm)
* Default value “0”
A:0 to 2
Parameter
• This command can be sent when the type of block (BlockType) is “09: Barcode/2D code” and the format setting of the barcode or 2D code
related settings (CodeSetting) is the block No. of “2: Overprinting.”
• The overprinting can be added when insetting No. is specified so that it becomes consecutive number at OLP.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-55
Communication Interface
RX
25 bytes
Command Details
(2) Barcode/2D code overprinting pattern setting (Set/Request)
Command
MultiPassPattern
Description
Specifies the overprinting order in the barcode/2D code overprinting settings and changes/requests the various pattern
settings, cell marking order, and cell marking count.
Target
1
WX
RX
16 bytes
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255,OLP=0 to 9
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0,MultiPassPattern=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
Communication Interface
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0,MultiPassPattern[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
3 bytes
Pattern
(QR Code/DataMatrix/2D Code base/Bar Code/
Bar Code base)
000: -/-/-/Alternate/001: Pattern 1/A/B1/Unidirectional/Alternate
002: Pattern 2/B/B2/-/Unidirectional
003: Pattern 3/C/B3/-/Alternate (Horiz.)
004: Pattern 4/D/B4/-/Unidirectional (Horiz.)
005: Pattern 5/E/B5/-/006: Pattern 6/F/B6/-/007: Pattern 7/Entire pattern 1/B7/-/008: Entire pattern 1/Entire pattern 2/B8/-/009: Entire pattern 2/Entire pattern 3/B9/-/010: Entire pattern 3/Entire pattern 4/-/-/011: Entire pattern 4/Entire pattern 5/-/-/012: Entire pattern 5/Entire pattern 6/-/-/013: Entire pattern 6/-/-/-/254: Individual/Individual/-/-/* Default value “0” for Bar Code, “9” for 2D
Code
* B7/8/9, Entire pattern 5/6: Available on only
MD-U1000 series
3 bytes
Finder
000: None
001: F1
002: F2
255: =Cell
* QR Code and B: Fixed value of “0” when
other than 0 to 2
* Default value “0”
3 bytes
Alignment
000: None
001: A1
002: A2
255: =Cell
* DataMatrix and C: Fixed value of “0” when
other than 0 to 2
* Default value “0”
3 bytes
Cell (QR Code/DataMatrix)
000: None/None
001: M1/C1
002: M2/C2
003: M3/C3
004: M4/C4
005: M5/C5
006: M6/C6
007: M7/C7
008: M8/C8
* Default value “0”
E:001 to 003
3 bytes
Cell marking order
001: Continuous
002: Skip 1 cell
003: Skip 2 cell
* A: Fixed value of “1” when 8 to 11
F: 001 to 100
3 bytes
Cell marking count (times)
* A: Fixed value of “1” when 8 to 11
* Default value “1”
A:000 to 13/254
B: 000 to 002/255
Parameter
C:000 to 002/255
D: 000 to 008
• This command can be sent when the type of block (BlockType) is “09: Barcode/2D code” and the format setting of the barcode or 2D code
related settings (CodeSetting) is the block No. of “2: Overprinting.”
• “D: 0” cannot be set when “B: 0/255”.
• “D: 0” cannot be set when “C: 0/255”.
1-56
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(3) Barcode/2D code overprinting fill parameters (Set/Request)
Command
MultiPassFillParameters
Description
Specifies the overprinting order in the barcode/2D code overprinting setting and changes/requests the fill interval,
common line interval setting, and shrink fill.
Target
WX
RX
23 bytes
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255,OLP=0 to 9
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0,MultiPassFillParameters=A,B[CR]
WX,OK [CR]
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0,MultiPassFillParameters[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B[CR]
1
A:0.000 to 1.000/9.999
5 bytes
Fill interval (mm)
* Fixed value of “9.999” if the common block marking
parameters are referenced
* Default value “Normal: 0.06”/”Wide: 0.08”/”Small: 0.03”
B:2D code: -2.500 to 02.500
Barcode: -5.000 to 05.000
6 bytes
Shrink fill (mm)
* Default value “0”
Parameter
This command can be sent when the type of block (BlockType) is “09: Barcode/2D code” and the format setting of the barcode or 2D code
related settings (CodeSetting) is the block No. of “2: Overprinting.”
(4) Quality level of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/Request)
Command
MultiPassQualityLevel
Description
In barcode/2D code overprinting settings, specify the overprinting order and change/request the quality level.
Target
WX
RX
21 bytes
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255,OLP=0 to 9
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0,MultiPassQualityLevel=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0,MultiPassQualityLevel[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
A: 00 to 06
2 bytes
Quality Level
00: Top speed
01: Speed priority
02: Standard
03: High quality
04: Top quality
05: Customize
06: Top speed
* Default value “02”
(5) Approach of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/Request)
Command
MultiPassApproach
Description
In barcode/2D code overprinting settings, specify the overprinting order and change/request the approach.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255,OLP=0 to 9
WX
RX
17 bytes
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0,MultiPassApproach=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0,MultiPassApproach[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
A:Normal/Wide: 0.000 to 5.000,
Small: 0.000 to 2.500
5 bytes
Approach (mm)
* Default value “0.500”
This command is enabled when the quality level of barcode/2D code overprinting (MultiPassQualityLevel) is “05: Customize”.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-57
Communication Interface
Response
Command
Command Details
(6) Space approach of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/Request)
Command
MultiPassSpaceApproach
Description
In barcode/2D code overprinting settings, specify the overprinting order and change/request the space approach.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255,OLP=0 to 9
WX
1
RX
Command
22 bytes
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0,MultiPassSpaceApproach=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0,MultiPassSpaceApproach[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Communication Interface
Parameter
A:0.000 to 5.000
5 bytes
Space approach (mm)
* Default value “0.250”
This command is enabled when the quality level of barcode/2D code overprinting (MultiPassQualityLevel) is “05: Customize”.
(7) Curve correction of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/Request)
Command
MultiPassCurveCorrection
Description
In barcode/2D code overprinting settings, specify the overprinting order and change/request the curve correction.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255,OLP=0 to 9
WX
RX
Command
24 bytes
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0 to 9,MultiPassCurveCorrection=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0 to 9,MultiPassCurveCorrection[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
1 byte
A:0/1
Curve correction
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”
(8) Jump speed of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/Request)
Command
MultiPassJumpSpeed
Description
In barcode/2D code overprinting settings, specify the overprinting order and change/request the jump speed.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255,OLP=0 to 9
WX
RX
18 bytes
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0 to 9,MultiPassJumpSpeed=A[CR]
Response
WX,OKA[CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0 to 9,MultiPassJumpSpeedA[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
A:0/1/2
1 byte
Jump speed
0: Top Speed
1: High Speed
2: Medium Speed
* Default value “0”
This command is enabled when the quality level of barcode/2D code overprinting (MultiPassQualityLevel) is not “05: Customize”.
(9) Wait time for start marking of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/Request)
Command
MultiPassBlockMarkingDelayTime
Description
In barcode/2D code overprinting settings, specify the overprinting order and change/request the wait time for start
marking.
Target
WX
RX
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255,OLP=0 to 9
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0 to 9,MultiPassBlockMarkingDelayTime=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0 to 9,MultiPassBlockMarkingDelayTime[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
1-58
30 bytes
A:00000.0 to 65000.0
7 bytes
Wait time for start marking (ms)
* Default value “0”
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
3D shape setting
(1) 3D shape setting (Set/Request)
Command
3DShape
Description
Sets/Requests the 3D shape setting enable/disable and the 3D shape No. to be inserted.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,3DShape=A,B[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,3DShape[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B[CR]
1
A:0/1
1 byte
3D shape setting
0: XY Plane
1: 3D Shape
* Default value “0”
B: 000 to 255
3 bytes
3D shape No.
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
* Default value “0”
Parameter
• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of other than “04: Fixed point”.
• The tilt correction target block of the Z tracking cannot be set for a target. When the block is set to the target, the communication error
S083 “3D information incorrect setting error” will occur.
(2) 3D shape type (Set/Request)
Command
3DShapeType
Description
Specifies the 3D shape No. and creates a new or requests a 3D shape type.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,3DS=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,3DS=000,3DShapeType=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,3DS=000,3DShapeType[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
A: -01/000 to 006/020
11 bytes
3 bytes
3D Shape
-01: Z map
000: Slope
001: Inside cylinder
002: Outside cylinder
003: Inside cone
004: Outside cone
005: Inside hemisphere
006: Outside hemisphere
020: XY Plane
* Default value “20”
• You cannot change a 3D shape No. for which a 3D shape has already been set. The 3D shape setting information is initialized when the
block associated with the 3D shape No. is removed.
• Therefore, associate the block using the 3DShape command following the 3DShapeType.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-59
Communication Interface
RX
Command
7 bytes
Command Details
(3) 3D shape position (Set/Request)
Command
3DShapePosition
Description
Specifies the 3D shape No. and changes/requests the X/Y/X coordinates and X/Y/Z rotation angles.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,3DS=000 to 255
WX
1
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,3DS=000,3DShapePosition=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,3DS=000,3DShapePosition[CR]
Response
Communication Interface
Parameter
15 bytes
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
A: Depends on the area size and block type
• The block type is other than arc character
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Wide :-165.000 to 0165.000
Small: -025.000 to 0025.000
• The block type is arc character
-9999.99 to 09999.99
8 bytes
X coordinate (mm)
* Default value “0”
B: Depends on the area size, block type, and 3D shape type
• The block type is other than arc character and 3D shape is
other than cone
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Other model :
“Y coordinate” of “Model-Specific Input
Value List” (Page 1-92)
• The block type is other than arc character and 3D shape is
cone
Normal :0000.000 to 0062.500
Wide :0000.000 to 0165.000
Small : 0000.000 to 0025.000
• The block type is arc character
-9999.99 to 09999.99
“Y coordinate” of “Model-Specific Input Value List” (Page
1-92)
8 bytes
Y coordinate (mm)
* Default value “0”
C: Depends on the area size and 3D shape type
• The 3D shape is cylinder, cone or sphere
Normal : -261.000 to 0261.000
Wide : -621.000 to 0621.000
Small :-115.000 to 0115.000
• The 3D shape is slope
Normal :-083.500 to 0083.500
Wide :-186.000 to 0186.000
Small :-040.000 to 0040.000
• The 3D shape is Z-map
Normal :-125.000 to 0125.000
Wide :-330.000 to 0330.000
Small : -050.000 to 0050.000
8 bytes
Z coordinate (mm)
* Default value “0”
D: -180.000 to 0180.000
8 bytes
X rotation angle (°)
* Default value “0”
E:-180.000 to 0180.000
8 bytes
Y rotation angle (°)
* Default value “0”
F: -180.000 to 0180.000
8 bytes
Z rotation angle (°)
* Default value “0”
• This command can be sent to a block No. having the 3D shape setting (3DShape) of “1: 3D Shapes”.
• Specify the target specifier 3DS based on the 3D shape No. of the 3D shape setting (3DShape).
1-60
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(4) Diameter of cylinder shape (Set/Request)
Command
CylinderDiameter
Description
Specifies the 3D shape No. and changes/requests the diameter of a cylinder shape.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,3DS=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,3DS=000,CylinderDiameter=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,3DS=000,CylinderDiameter[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
1
8 bytes
Cylinder diameter (mm)
* Default value “Normal/Wide: 40”/”Small: 20”
• This command can be sent to a block No. having the 3D shape setting (3DShape) of “1: 3D Shapes” AND the 3D shape type
(3DShapeType) of “01/02: Cylinder”.
• Specify the target specifier 3DS based on the 3D shape No. of the 3D shape setting (3DShape).
(5) Cone shape size setting (Set/Request)
Command
ConeSize
Description
Specifies the 3D shape No. and changes/requests the various sizes of a cone shape.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,3DS=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,3DS=000,ConeSize=A,B,C,D,E[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,3DS=000,ConeSize[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E[CR]
Parameter
8 bytes
A: Depends on the area size
Normal : 0000.200 to 0480.000
Other model :
“Bottom diameter of cone” of
“Model-Specific Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
8 bytes
Bottom diameter (mm)
* Default value “Normal/Wide: 40”/”Small: 20”
B:0/1
1 byte
Set with bus angle
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”
C: Depends on the area size
Normal : 0000.200 to 0480.000
Other model :
“Top diameter of cone” of “ModelSpecific Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
8 bytes
Top diameter (mm)
* Default value “Normal/Wide: 20”/”Small: 10”
D: Depends on the area size
Normal : 000.100 to 125.000
Other model :
“Cone height” of “Model-Specific
Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
7 bytes
Height (mm)
* Default value “Normal/Wide: 20”/”Small: 10”
E:-85.000 to 085.000
7 bytes
Bus angle (°)
* Default value “0”
• This command can be sent to a block No. having the 3D shape setting (3DShape) of “1: : 3D shape AND the 3D shape type (3DShapeType)
of “3/4: Cone”.
• Specify the target specifier 3DS based on the 3D shape No. of the 3D shape setting (3DShape).
• The bus angle cannot be set when the specification is disabled at the bus angle. The top diameter and height cannot be set when the
specification is enabled at the bus angle.
(6) Diameter of sphere shape (Set/Request)
Command
SphereDiameter
Description
Specifies the 3D shape No. and changes/requests the diameter of a sphere shape.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,3DS=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,3DS=000,SphereDiameter=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,3DS=000,SphereDiameter[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
A: Depends on the area size
Normal : 0000.200 to 0480.000
Other model :
“Sphere diameter” of “ModelSpecific Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
14 bytes
8 bytes
Diameter (mm)
* Default value “20”
• This command can be sent to a block No. having the 3D shape setting (3DShape) of “1: 3D Shapes” AND the 3D shape type
(3DShapeType) of “05/06: Sphere”.
• Specify the target specifier 3DS based on the 3D shape No. of the 3D shape setting (3DShape).
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-61
Communication Interface
A: Depends on the area size
Normal : 0000.200 to 0480.000
Other model :
“Cylinder diameter” of “ModelSpecific Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
Parameter
16 bytes
Command Details
(7) Position on 3D shape (Set/Request)
Command
3DSurfacePosition
Description
Sets/Requests a specified block’sX/Y/θ positions on the 3D shape.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
1
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,3DSurfacePosition=A,B,C[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,3DSurfacePosition[CR]
Response
Communication Interface
Parameter
17 bytes
RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]
A: Depends on the area size and block type
• The block type is other than arc character
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Wide
:-165.000 to 0165.000
Small : -025.000 to 0025.000
• The block type is arc character
-9999.99 to 09999.99
“X coordinate” of “Model-Specific Input Value
List” (Page 1-92)
8 bytes
X coordinate (mm) on 3D shape
* Default value “0”
B: Depends on the area size, block type, and 3D
shape type
• The block type is other than arc character and 3D
shape is other than cone
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Wide
:-165.000 to 0165.000
Small
: -025.000 to 0025.000
• The block type is other than arc character and 3D
shape is cone
Normal : 0000.000 to 0062.500
Wide
:0000.000 to 0165.000
Small
: 0000.000 to 0025.000
• The block type is arc character
-9999.99 to 09999.99
8 bytes
Y coordinate (mm) on 3D shape
* Default value “0”
C: -90.000 to 090.000
7 bytes
θ angle (°) on 3D shape
* Default value “0”
• This command can be sent to a block No. having the 3D shape setting (3DShape) of “01: 3D Shapes”.
• When the type of 3D shape (3DShapeType) is a cylinder or cone (001 to 004), the X coordinate on the 3D shape cannot be set.
• When the type of 3D shape (3DShapeType) is other than a cylinder or cone (001 to 004), the θ angle on the 3D shape cannot be set.
(8) Cone setting (Set/Request)
Command
ConeSetting
Description
Sets/Requests the character frame setting, layout, character angle space, and open angle of a cone.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,ConeSetting=A,B,C,D[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,ConeSetting[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D[CR]
11 bytes
1 byte
Char. Frame
0: Use fixed length
1: Use fixed angle
* Default value “0”
B:1 to 3
1 byte
Layout
1: Angular interval
2: Distribute angle
3: Character pitch
* Default value “1”
C: 000.000 to 180.000
7 bytes
Character angle space (°)
* B: Fixed value of “10” when 2/3
* Default value “10”
D: 000.000 to 180.000
7 bytes
Open angle (°)
B: Fixed value of “120” when 1/3
* Default value “120”
A:0/1
Parameter
• This command can be sent to a block No. having the 3D shape setting (3DShape) of “01: 3D Shapes” AND the 3D shape type
(3DShapeType) of “3/4: Cone”.
• B: 3 (Character Pitch) can be set only in the case of TrueTypeFont.
1-62
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
Work flow
(1) Enable/disable the XY tracking settings (Set/Request)
Command
XYTrackingEnable
Description
Sets/Requests to enable/disable the XY tracking settings.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999, TRK = 000 to 007
WX
WX,JOB=0000,TRK=000,XYTrackingEnable=A
Response
WX,OK
Command
RX,JOB=0000,TRK=000,XYTrackingEnable
Response
RX,OK,A
Parameter
1
1 byte
A:0/1
Communication Interface
RX
Command
16 bytes
XY tracking
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”
• When the non-existing XY tracking setting No. in TRK is specified, S103 tracking No. no registration error will occur.
• This command cannot be used for the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A).
(2) Enable/disable the Z tracking settings (Set/Request)
Command
ZTrackingEnable
Description
Sets/Requests to enable/disable the Z tracking settings.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999, TRK = 000 to 255
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,TRK=000,ZTrackingEnable=A
Response
WX,OK
Command
RX,JOB=0000,TRK=000,ZTrackingEnable
Response
RX,OK,A
Parameter
15 bytes
1 byte
A:0/1
Z tracking
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”
• When the non-existing Z tracking setting No. in TRK is specified, S103 tracking No. no registration error will occur.
• This command cannot be used for the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A).
(3) Set/Request the calibration of the Z tracking
Command
ZTrackingCalibration
Description
Sets/Requests the calibration of the Z tracking.
Target
JOB = 0 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,ZTrackingCalibration=A,B,C[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,ZTrackingCalibration[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]
A:0/1/2
Parameter
20 bytes
B:0/1/2
C:0/1/2
1 byte
Correction before marking
0: Do not correct
1: Correct (normal)
2: Correct (high accuracy)
* Default value “0”
1 byte
Correction after marking
0: Do not correct
1: Correct (normal)
2: Correct (high accuracy)
* Default value “1”
1 byte
Operation at temperature change
0: Do nothing
1: Calibrate automatically
2: Generate warning
* Default value “0”
It cannot be used on the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A) series.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-63
Command Details
(4) Set/Request the warning threshold of the XY tracking
XYTrackingCorrectionThreshold
Command
Description
Sets/Requests the warning threshold of the XY tracking.
Target
JOB = 0 to 1999, TRK = 000 to 007
WX
1
29 bytes
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,TRK=000,XYTrackingCorrectionThreshold=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,TRK=000,XYTrackingCorrectionThreshold[CR]
Response
Communication Interface
Parameter
RX,OK,A[CR]
A:01~99
2 bytes
Correlation value
It cannot be used on the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A) series.
(5) Set/Request to enable/disable the lens inspection before marking
Command
WindowCheckBeforeMarkingEnable
Description
Sets/Requests to enable/disable the lens inspection before marking.
Target
JOB = 0 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckBeforeMarkingEnable=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckBeforeMarkingEnable[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
30 bytes
1 byte
A:0/1
Lens inspection before marking
0: Do not conduct
1: Conduct
It cannot be used on the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A) series.
(6) Set/Request the warning threshold of the lens inspection before marking
Command
WindowCheckBeforeMarkingAlarmThreshold
Description
Sets/Requests the warning threshold of the lens inspection before marking.
Target
JOB = 0 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckBeforeMarkingAlarmThreshold=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckBeforeMarkingAlarmThreshold[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
A: 0 to 100
3 bytes
38 bytes
Warning threshold of the lens inspection
before marking
* Warning disabled at “0”
It cannot be used on the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A) series.
(7) Set/Request the sensitivity of the lens inspection before marking
Command
WindowCheckBeforeMarkingSensitivity
Description
Sets/Requests the sensitivity of the lens inspection before marking.
Target
JOB = 0 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
35 bytes
WX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckBeforeMarkingSensitivity=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckBeforeMarkingSensitivity[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
A:0/1/2
1 byte
Lens inspection sensitivity before marking
0: Standard
1: High sensitivity 1
2: High sensitivity 2
* Default value “0”
It cannot be used on the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A) series.
1-64
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(8) Set/Request to enable/disable the lens inspection after marking
Command
WindowCheckAfterMarkingEnable
Description
Sets/Requests to enable/disable the lens inspection after marking.
Target
JOB = 0 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckAfterMarkingEnable=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckAfterMarkingEnable[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
1
1 byte
A:0/1
Lens inspection after marking
0: Do not conduct
1: Conduct
Communication Interface
Parameter
29 bytes
It cannot be used on the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A) series.
(9) Set/Request the warning threshold of the lens inspection after marking
Command
WindowCheckAfterMarkingAlarmThreshold
Description
Sets/Requests the warning threshold of the lens inspection after marking.
Target
JOB = 0 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckAfterMarkingAlarmThreshold=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckAfterMarkingAlarmThreshold[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
37 bytes
A: 0 to 100
3 bytes
Warning threshold of the lens inspection after
marking
* Warning disabled at “0”
It cannot be used on the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A) series.
(10) Set/Request the sensitivity of the lens inspection after marking
Command
WindowCheckAfterMarkingSensitivity
Description
Sets/Requests the sensitivity of the lens inspection after marking.
Target
JOB = 0 to 1999
WX
RX
34 bytes
Command
WX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckAfterMarkingSensitivity=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckAfterMarkingSensitivity[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
A:0/1/2
1 byte
Lens inspection sensitivity after marking
0: Standard
1: High sensitivity 1
2: High sensitivity 2
* Default value “0”
It cannot be used on the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A) series.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-65
Command Details
(11) Marking confirmation function (Set/Request)
Command
MarkingConfirmationSetting
Description
Sets/Requests the enable/disable of the marking confirmation function and the various settings.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999
WX
1
RX
26 bytes
Command
WX,JOB=0000,MarkingConfirmationSetting=A,B,C,D,E
Response
WX,OK
Command
RX,JOB=0000,MarkingConfirmationSetting
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E
Communication Interface
A:0/1
1 byte
Marking confirmation
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”
B:0/1
1 byte
Sensitivity setting
0: Auto
1: Any value
* Default value “0”
C: 000 to 100
3 bytes
Sensitivity
* G: Fixed value of “50” when 0
* Default value “50”
D: 000 to 100
8 bytes
Error threshold
* Default value “50”
E:0.0 to 9.9
8 bytes
Capture delay
* Default value “0”
Parameter
• Only enabled for stationary marking.
• It can also be set when the 2D code reader function is enabled.
• Specify the reading coordinate in the “Custom Coordinate Specification” when the matrix function is used or 3D shaped block is read.
(12) 2D code quality check and various settings (Set/Request)
Command
CodeReaderSetting
Description
Sets/Requests the enable/disable of the 2D code quality check function when the marking is complete and the various
setting values.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,CodeReaderSetting=A,B,C,D
Response
WX,OK
Command
RX,JOB=0000,CodeReaderSetting
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D
Parameter
17 bytes
A:0/1
1 byte
0: Quality check disabled
1: Quality check enabled
* Default value “0”
B: 0.0 to 9.0
1 byte
Capture delay (s)
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
* Default value “0”
C: 0.0 to 9.0
3 bytes
Image hold time (s)
* Default value “5”
1 byte
Error threshold
0: Total grade A or higher is OK.
1: Total grade B or higher is OK.
2: Total grade C or higher is OK.
3: Total grade D or higher is OK.
4: Total grade F or higher is OK.
* Default value “4”
D: 0 to 4
• Only enabled for stationary marking.
• It can also be set when the marking verification function is enabled.
• If the 2D code reader function is not activated, an S040 “Operation Limitation Error (2D Code Reader)” will be returned.
1-66
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(13) Request internal lighting condition during 2D code reading
Command
CodeReaderLightSetting
Description
Requests the internal lighting condition in the 2D code reading setting of the workflow.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
22 bytes
None
Response
Command
RX,JOB=0000,CodeReaderLightSetting [CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E [CR]
A: 0/1
1 byte
Lighting condition for internal lighting 1
0: Off
1: On
B: 0/1
1 byte
Lighting condition for internal lighting 2
0: Off
1: On
C: 0/1
1 byte
Lighting condition for internal lighting 3
0: Off
1: On
D: 0/1
1 byte
Lighting condition for internal lighting 4
0: Off
1: On
E: 0/1
1 byte
Lighting condition for internal lighting 5
0: Off
1: On
Communication Interface
Parameter
1
• This command cannot be used for the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A).
• See the figure below for the relationship between the internal lighting numbers and positions.
4
5
3
2
1
(14) Capturing condition of the camera function (Set/Request)
Command
CameraImagingSetting
Description
Sets/Requests the capturing condition of the camera function in the work flow.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999, FNC = 00 to 01
WX
RX
20 bytes
Command
WX,JOB=0000,FNC=00,CameraImagingSetting=A,B,C,D
Response
WX,OK
Command
RX,JOB=0000,FNC=00,CameraImagingSetting
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D
Parameter
A: 0 to 3
1 byte
Camera zoom
0: Whole wide
1: Whole standard
2: Coax wide
3: Coax standard
* Default value “2”
B: -100 to 0100
4 bytes
Brightness
* Default value “0”
C: 0.1 to 5.0
3 bytes
Gamma correction value
* Default value “1.0”
1 byte
Lighting type
0: Internal lighting (normal)
1: Internal lighting (halation removal)
2: External lighting
* Default value “2”
D:0/1/2
• When FNC is out of range, S100 capturing condition invalid error will occur.
• If the marking verification function is not set when FNC=00 is specified, S032 no setting error (marking verification function) will occur.
• If the 2D code reader is not set when FNC=01 is specified, S031 no setting error (2D code reader) will occur. When it is non-activation,
S040 operation limitation error (2D code reader) will occur.
• When the Marking Builder Plus enables the function, the default of the lighting type is not “2”.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-67
Command Details
(15) Capturing position of the camera (Set/Request)
Command
CameraTargetSetting
Description
Sets/Requests the capturing position of the camera function in the work flow.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999, FNC = 00 to 01
WX
1
RX
19 bytes
Command
WX,JOB=0000,FNC=00,CameraTargetSetting=A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I
Response
WX,OK
Command
RX,JOB=0000,FNC=00,CameraTargetSetting
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I
Communication Interface
A:0/1
1 byte
0: Block No. specification
1: Custom coordinate specification
* Default value “0”
B: 000 to 255
3 bytes
Block No.
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 1
* Default value “0”
C: Depends on the area size
8 bytes
Reading X coordinate
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
* Default value “0”
D: Depends on the area size
8 bytes
Reading Y coordinate
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
* Default value “0”
E: Depends on the area size
8 bytes
Reading Z coordinate
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
* Default value “0”
1 byte
Whether to reflect the XY tracking result to the
reading coordinate
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
This parameter will be ignored and follow
the XY tracking settings associated to the
block.
* Default value “0”
2 bytes
The XY tracking No. to be reflected to the
reading coordinate
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
This parameter will be ignored and follow
the XY tracking settings associated to the
block.
* F: Fixed value of “0” when 0
* Default value “0”
1 byte
Whether to reflect the Z tracking result to the
reading coordinate
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
This parameter will be ignored and follow
the Z tracking settings associated to the
block.
* Default value “0”
3 bytes
The Z tracking No. to be reflected to the
reading coordinate
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
This parameter will be ignored and follow
the Z tracking settings associated to the
block.
* H: Fixed value of “0” when 0
* Default value “0”
F: 0/1
Parameter
G: 00 to 07
H:0/1
I: 000 to 255
• When FNC is out of range, S100 capturing condition invalid error will occur.
• When the marking verification function is not set if FNC=00 is specified, S032 no setting error (marking verification function) will occur.
• When the 2D code reader is not set if FNC=01 is specified, S031 no setting error (2D code reader) will occur. When the 2D code reader
has not been activated the S040 operation limitation error (2D code reader) will occur.
• If the XY tracking No. which is not set to G is specified when F=1, S103 tracking No. no registration error will occur.
• If the Z tracking No. which is not set to I is specified when H=1, S103 tracking No. no registration error will occur.
1-68
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(16) Request the workflow result
Command
WorkflowResultDetail
Description
Requests the result of the last workflow execution.
Target
None
WX
RX
20 bytes
Command
Response
Command
RX,WorkflowResultDetail [CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J,K,L,M [CR]
1
1 byte
Execution
0: Not executed
1: Executed
B: 0/1
1 byte
Workflow execution result
0: Canceled
1: Complete
C: 000000000000 ~ 999999999999
12 bytes
Execution time (ms)
D: 0/1/3
1 byte
Result of pre-marking capture
0: Not executed
1: Success
3: Failure
1 byte
Result of lens inspection before marking
0: Not executed
1: Success
2: Failure (out of judgment threshold)
3: Failure
1 byte
Result of XY tracking
0: Not executed
1: Success
2: Failure (out of judgment threshold)
3: Failure
G: 0 to 3
1 byte
Result of Z tracking
0: Not executed
1: Success
2: Failure (out of judgment threshold)
3: Failure
H: 0/1/3
1 byte
Marking result
0: Not executed
1: Success
3: Failure
1 byte
Result of post-marking capture
0: Not executed
1: Success
3: Failure
1 byte
Marking confirmation result
0: Not executed
1: Success
2: Failure (out of judgment threshold)
3: Failure
1 byte
2D code reading result
0: Not executed
1: Success
2: Failure (out of judgment threshold)
3: Failure
L: 0 to 3
1 byte
Result of lens inspection after marking
0: Not executed
1: Success
2: Failure (out of judgment threshold)
3: Failure
M: 0 to 2
1 byte
Marking Energy result
0: Not executed
1: Success
2: Failure (out of judgment threshold)
E: 0 to 3
F: 0 to 3
Parameter
I: 0/1/3
J: 0 to 3
K: 0 to 3
Communication Interface
A: 0/1
• The result of the last execution is acquired. The result of the last execution will be cleared when the job No. of the currently operating job
is changed.
• The result of marking energy cannot be acquired unless 2 seconds have passed after marking is complete.
• When there is more than one setting of XY tracking and Z tracking, the worst result will be returned.
The order of judgment results from the worst side is [Failure], [Failure (out of judgment threshold)], and [Success].
• The way that XY tracking and Z tracking results are judged varies between the XYTracking, ZTracking, ZTrackingMatrixCell, and
ZTrackingMatrixCellNo commands. With the WorkflowResultDetail command, even if the detection or distance measurement is
successful, the result will be a failure if the value is outside the judgment threshold.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-69
Command Details
(17) Request the marking result
Command
MarkingResult
Description
Requests the result of the last marking.
Target
None
WX
1
RX
Command
Response
None
Command
RX,MarkingResult
Response
RX,OK,A,B
Communication Interface
Parameter
13 bytes
A: 0/1
1 byte
Marking result
0: Failure
1: Success
B: 000000000000 to 999999999999
12 bytes
Execution time (ms)
• The result of the last execution is acquired. The result of the last execution will be cleared when the job No. of the currently operating job
is changed.
(18) Request the pre-marking lens inspection result
Command
WindowCheckBeforeMarkingResult
Description
Requests the last pre-marking lens inspection result
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
Response
None
Command
RX,WindowCheckBeforeMarkingResult [CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J,K,L,M [CR]
Parameter
30 bytes
A: 0/1
1 byte
Execution result
0: Not executed
1: Executed
B: 000 to 100
3 bytes
Total score
C: 000 to 100
3 bytes
First score
L: 000 to 100
3 bytes
Tenth score
M: 0000 to 9999
4 bytes
Execution time (ms)
…
(19) Request the post-marking lens inspection result
Command
WindowCheckAfterMarkingResult
Description
Requests the last post-marking lens inspection result
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
Response
None
Command
RX,WindowCheckAfterMarkingResult [CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J,K,L,M [CR]
Parameter
29 bytes
A: 0/1
1 byte
Execution result
0: Not executed
1: Executed
B: 000 to 100
3 bytes
Total score
C: 000 to 100
3 bytes
First score
L: 000 to 100
3 bytes
Tenth score
M: 0000 to 9999
4 bytes
Execution time (ms)
…
1-70
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(20) Request the filename of the image captured with the camera
Command
CameraImageFilepath
Description
Requests the filename of the image captured with the built-in camera during the last marking.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
None
Response
None
Command
RX,CameraImageFilePath=A,B [CR]
Response
RX,OK,C,D [CR]
1
A: 0 to 9
1 byte
Target image
0: Marking confirmation function
1: 2D code reader
2: Pre-marking capture
3: Post-marking capture
4: XY tracking
B: 000 to 007
3 bytes
XY tracking setting No.
* When A is 0 to 3, the value is fixed to 0.
C: 0/1
1 byte
Presence of target image
0: Absent
1: Present
File path
* image/yyyymmddhh/mm/file name
D: Character string
• Acquisition fails when Save is not selected for each image in [Image Save Settings] of the job settings.
• This command cannot be used for the MD-X400(A)/450(A).
• Starting from the image folder, the actual path to the saved file is returned in the file path.
(21) Request the marking confirmation results
Command
MarkingConfirmationResult
Description
Requests the result of the last marking confirmation function.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
Response
None
Command
RX,MarkingConfirmationResult [CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D [CR]
Parameter
25 bytes
A: 0/1
1 byte
Execution result
0: Not executed
1: Executed
B: 0/1
1 byte
Marking confirmation result
0: Failure
1: Success
C: 000 to 100
3 bytes
Score
D: 0000 to 9999
4 bytes
Execution time (ms)
The result of the last execution is acquired. The result of the last execution will be cleared when the job No. of the currently operating job is
changed.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-71
Communication Interface
Parameter
19 bytes
Command Details
(22) Request the 2D code reader result
Command
CodeReadResult
Description
Requests the result of the last 2D code reading.
Target
None
WX
1
RX
Command
Response
14 bytes
None
Command
RX,CodeReadResult=A [CR]
Response
RX,OK,B,(C ～ V,)W,X,Y [CR]
Communication Interface
A: 0/1
1 byte
Acquire detailed grade
0: Do not acquire
1: Acquire
B: A to D/F/-
1 byte
Total grade
C to V: A to D or 00.000 to 99.999
79 bytes
(including
comma)
Detailed grade
W: 000 to 100
3 bytes
Matching level
X: 000000 to 999999
6 bytes
Reading time
Y: Character string
Read data
Detailed grade
Parameter
C:
1 byte
DEC: Decoding success/failure
D:
1 byte
CC: Cell contrast
E:
6 bytes
CC: Cell contrast
F:
1 byte
CM: Cell modulation
G:
1 byte
RM: Reflectance margin
H:
1 byte
FPD: Fixed pattern damage
I:
1 byte
AN: Axial non-uniformity
J:
6 bytes
AN value: Axial non-uniformity
K:
1 byte
GN: Grid non-uniformity
L:
6 bytes
GN value: Grid non-uniformity
M:
1 byte
UEC: Unused error correction
N:
6 bytes
UEC value: Unused error correction
O:
1 byte
FID: Format information damage
P:
6 bytes
FID value: Format information damage
Q:
1 byte
VID: Model information damage
R:
6 bytes
VID value: Model information damage
S:
1 byte
PGH: Print scaling-horizontal
T:
6 bytes
PGH value: Print scaling-horizontal
U:
1 byte
PGV: Print scaling-vertical
V:
6 bytes
PGV value: Print scaling-vertical
• The last result of the 2D code reading performed by the method other than the workflow will also be acquired.
• The result of the last execution is acquired. The result of the last execution will be cleared when the job No. of the currently operating job
is changed.
• Controllers activated with the MD-AD-2DRA cannot acquire results other than the total grade and read data.
For reading time and matching level, “-” is returned. For detailed grade, “0” or “F” is returned.
• This command cannot be used for the MD-X400(A)/450(A).
1-72
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(23) Request the marking energy result
Command
MarkingEnergyResult
Description
Requests the last marking energy result.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
Response
None
Command
RX,MarkingEnergyResult [CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C [CR]
1
A: 0/1
1 byte
Execution result
0: Not executed
1: Executed
B: 0/1
1 byte
Marking Energy result
0: Failure
1: Success
C: 00000.01 to 99999.99
8 bytes
Energy (J)
Communication Interface
Parameter
19 bytes
• The result of marking energy cannot be acquired unless 2 seconds have passed after marking is complete.
• When this command is sent within 2 seconds after completion of marking, the Not executed result will be returned.
• This command cannot be used for the MD-X400(A)/450(A). If the command is executed, an S095 Model Limitation Error will occur.
(24) Acquire the number of marked matrix cells
Command
MatrixCellMarkingCount
Description
Acquires the number of marked matrix cells.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
Response
None
Command
RX,MatrixCellMarkingCount [CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C [CR]
Parameter
22 bytes
A: 00000 to 65025
3 bytes
Number of matrix cells
B: 00000 to 65025
3 bytes
Number of target cells
(Number of cells with marking flags set to ON)
C: 00000 to 65025
3 bytes
Number of marked cells
• For parameter C, the number of cells which have actually been marked is returned, and those with marking flags set to OFF or which
were not marked due to the result of Z tracking are excluded.
• The result of the last marking is acquired. The result of the last execution will be cleared when the job No. of the currently operating job is
changed.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-73
Command Details
Matrix setting
(1) Matrix row & column setting (Set/Request)
1
Command
MatrixSetting
Description
Sets/Requests the number of rows/columns and marking direction of a matrix.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999
WX
Communication Interface
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,MatrixSetting=A,B,C[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,MatrixSetting[CR]
Response
13 bytes
RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]
A:001 to 255
3 bytes
Line count
B: 001 to 255
3 bytes
Number of columns
1 byte
Marking direction
1: Horizontal
2: Vertical
4: Horizontal (Alternate)
5: Vertical (Alternate)
* Default value “1”
Parameter
C:1/2/4/5
(2) Matrix size setting (Set/Request)
Command
MatrixSize
Description
Sets/Requests the height, height specification method, width, and width specification method of a matrix.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,MatrixSize=A,B,C[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,MatrixSize[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]
Parameter
1-74
10 bytes
A:0/2/3
1 byte
Height specification method
0: Cell height
2: Maximum distance
3: Matrix height
* Default value “0”
B: Depends on the area size
Normal : 000.000 to 125.000
Other model :
“Matrix Height/Width” of “ModelSpecific Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
7 bytes
Height (mm)
* Default value “15” for Normal/Wide, and “5”
for Small
C:0/2/3
1 byte
Width specification method
0: Cell width
2: Maximum distance
3: Matrix width
* Default value “0”
D: Depends on the area size
Normal : 000.000 to 125.000
Other model :
“Matrix Height/Width” of “ModelSpecific Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
7 bytes
Width (mm)
* Default value “15” for Normal/Wide, and “5”
for Small
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(3) Matrix cell reference point (Set/Request)
Command
CellReferencePoint
Description
Sets/Requests the cell reference point of a matrix.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,CellReferencePoint=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,CellReferencePoint[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
A:2 to 6
1
1 bytes
Cell base point
02: Center
03: Lower left
04: Lower right
05: Upper left
06: Upper right
* Default value “2”
Communication Interface
Parameter
18 bytes
If you change the θ angle of the cell coordinates of the matrix (MatrixCell), it will rotate around this reference point.
(4) Cell individual setting (Set/Request)
Command
MatrixCell
Description
Specifies the matrix cell and changes/requests the marking enable/disable, X/Y/Z coordinate correction, θ angle
correction and marking start wait time.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999, CEL=00001 to 65025
WX
RX
10 bytes
Command
WX,JOB=0000,CEL=00001,MatrixCell=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,CEL=00001,MatrixCell[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
Parameter
A:0/1
1 byte
Marking flag
0: Do not Mark
1: Mark
* Default value “1”
B: Depends on the area size
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Wide :-165.000 to 0165.000
Small : -025.000 to 0025.000
8 bytes
X coordinate (mm)
Default value “0”
C: Depends on the area size
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Other model :
“Y coordinate” of “Model-Specific
Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
8 bytes
Y coordinate (mm)
Default value “0”
D: Depends on the area size
Normal : -021.000 to 0021.000
Wide :-021.000 to 0021.000
Small : -015.000 to 0015.000
8 bytes
Z coordinate (mm)
Default value “0”
E:-180.000 to 0180.000
8 bytes
θ angle (°)
Default value “0”
F: 00000.0 to 65000.0
7 bytes
Wait time for start marking (ms)
* Default value “0”
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-75
Command Details
(5) Cell marking flag (Set)
Command
MatrixCellEnable
Description
Sets the marking flag of matrix cells in binary.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999, CEL=00001 to 65025
WX
1
RX
16 bytes
Command
WX,JOB=0000,CEL=00001,MatrixCellEnable=A,BBB---[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
Response
None
Communication Interface
A:0/1/2
1 byte
Reset the marking flag
0: Set the marking flag of all cells to OFF
1: Set the marking flag of all cells to ON
2: Do not change other than the specified
cells
1 byte
Marking flag
0: Do not Mark
1: Mark
* You can change the marking flag of
continuous cells in a batch by sending this
parameter in multiple digits.
Parameter
B:0/1
To change the marking flag of multiple cells in a batch, send parameter B in multiple digits.
To set cell No.10 to ON, No.11 to OFF, No.12 to ON and all other cells to OFF, send the command as described below.
WX,JOB=0000,CEL=00010,MatrixCellEnable=0,101[CR]
(6) Matrix position setting (Set/Request)
Command
MatrixPosition
Description
Sets/Requests the reference point and X/Y coordinates of a matrix.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
WX,JOB=0000,MatrixPosition=A,B,C[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,MatrixPosition[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]
14 bytes
A:00 to 08
2 bytes
Base point
00: Left edge
01: Right edge
02: Center
03: Lower left
04: Lower right
05: Upper left
06: Upper right
07: Top
08: Bottom
* Default value “2”
B: Depends on the area size
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Wide :-165.000 to 0165.000
Small : -025.000 to 0025.000
8 bytes
X coordinate (mm)
* Default value “0”
C: Depends on the area size
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Other model :
“Y coordinate” of “Model-Specific
Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
7 bytes
Y coordinate (mm)
* Default value “0”
Parameter
(7) Count using invalid marking cells (Set/Request)
Command
InactiveCellCount
Description
Sets/Requests the setting of whether or not to count the invalid marking cells when marking a counter in a matrix.
Target
JOB = 0000 to 1999
WX
RX
Command
1-76
WX,JOB=0000,InactiveCellCount=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,InactiveCellCount[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
17 bytes
A:0/1
1 byte
Count the invalid marking cells
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
Group/Counter setting
(1) Group setting (Set/Request)
Command
GroupOffset
Description
Specifies the group and changes/requests the X/Y coordinate correction, θ angle correction, and marking enable/
disable setting.
Target
WX
1
JOB=0000 to 1999,GRP=000 to 255
Command
WX,JOB=0000,GRP=000,GroupOffset=A,B,C,D[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,GRP=000,GroupOffset[CR]
Response
Parameter
Communication Interface
RX
11 bytes
RX,OK,A,B,C,D[CR]
A: Depends on the area size
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Other model : “X coordinate” of “Model-Specific
Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
8 bytes
Shift X(mm)
* Default value “0”
B: Depends on the area size
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Other model :
“Y coordinate” of “Model-Specific
Input Value List” (Page 1-92)
8 bytes
Shift Y(mm)
* Default value “0”
C: -180.000 to 0180.000
8 bytes
Shift θ(mm)
D:0/1
1 byte
Marking flag
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
You can only create new groups using Marking Builder Plus. The group number assigned when you created a group in Marking Builder Plus
will be the number of the target specifier GRP.
(2) Counter setting (Set/Request)
Command
CounterSetting
Description
Specifies the counter No. and changes/requests the various counter settings.
Target
JOB=0000 to 1999,CTR=0 to 9/A to J,
WX
RX
14 bytes
Command
WX,JOB=0000,CTR=0,CounterSetting=A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,JOB=0000,CTR=0,CounterSetting[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I[CR]
Parameter
A:00000 to 10000
5 bytes
Step
* Default value “1”
B:0/1
1 byte
Enabling the default value
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”
C: 0000000000 to 4294967295
10 bytes
Default value
* B: Fixed value of “0” when 0
* Default value “0”
D: 0000000000 to 4294967295
10 bytes
Leading value
* Default value “0”
E:0000000000 to 4294967295
10 bytes
Final value
* Default value “4294967295”
F: 0000000000 to 4294967295
10 bytes
Marking count
* Default value “1”
G: 0 to 5
1 bytes
Reset timing
0: Trigger
1: I/O
2: Power on
3: When switching the job No.
4: When the date changes
5: When the shift code is switched
* Default value “1”
H:0/1
1 byte
Count timing
0: Trigger
1: Each matrix cell/group/marking
* Default value “0”
I: 02 to 36
2 bytes
Base
* Default value “10”
The target specifier JOB can be omitted if you are specifying a common counter.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-77
Command Details
Operation time
(1) Request the controller operating time
1
Command
OperatingTime
Description
Requests the operating time of the laser marker.
Target
None
WX
Communication Interface
RX
Command
Response
Command
Response
Parameter
13 bytes
None
RX,OperatingTime[CR]
RX,OK,A[CR]
A:00000 to 99999
5 bytes
Cumulative operation time (h)
(2) Request the laser excited
Command
LaserOperatingTime
Description
Requests the amount of time the laser has been in the excited state.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
Response
Command
Response
Parameter
18 bytes
None
RX, LaserOperatingTime[CR]
RX,OK,A[CR]
A: 00000 to 99999
5 bytes
Laser excited time (h)
(3) Request the scanner operating time
Command
ScannerOperatingTime
Description
Requests the scanner operating time
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
Response
Command
Response
Parameter
20 bytes
None
RX, ScannerOperatingTime[CR]
RX,OK,A[CR]
A: 00000 to 99999
5 bytes
Scanner operating time (h)
(4) Request the number of shutter operations
Command
ShutterOperatingCount
Description
Requests the number of shutter cycles performed.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
Response
None
Command
RX,ShutterOperatingCount[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
21 bytes
A:0000000000 to 4294967295
10 bytes
Number of shutter operations (times)
(5) Request the number of laser safety module operations
Command
LaserSafetyModuleOperatingCount
Description
Requests the number of times of times the laser safety module has been operated.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
Response
1-78
None
Command
RX, LaserSafetyModuleOperatingCount[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
31 bytes
A:0000000000 to 4294967295
10 bytes
Number of laser safety module operations
(times)
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(6) Request the head temperature
Command
MarkingUnitTemperature
Description
Requests the head temperature.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
Response
None
Command
RX,MarkingUnitTemperature[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
A:-999.9 to 0999.9
1
6 bytes
Head temperature (°C)
Communication Interface
Parameter
22 bytes
(7) Request the controller temperature (°C)
Command
ControllerTemperature
Description
Requests the controller temperature.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
Response
None
Command
RX,ControllerTemperature[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
21 bytes
A:-999.9 to 0999.9
6 bytes
Controller temperature (°C)
(8) Request the result of laser power calibration
Command
LaserPowerCalibrationResult
Description
Requests the result of laser power calibration.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
Response
None
Command
RX,LaserPowerCalibrationResult[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B[CR]
Parameter
27 bytes
A: 0/1
1 byte
Existence of calibration execution
0: None
1: Yes
B: 000.00 to 999.99
6 bytes
Calibration result (W)
(9) Cumulative marking count 1 and 2 (Set/Request)
Command
CumulativeMarkingCount
Description
Sets and request the cumulative marking count 1 and 2 .
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,CumulativeMarkingCount=A,B[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,CumulativeMarkingCount[CR]
Response
Parameter
22 bytes
RX,OK,A,B[CR]
A:0000000000 to 4294967295
10 bytes
Cumulative marking count 1
B: 0000000000 to 4294967295
10 bytes
Cumulative marking count 2
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-79
Command Details
Maintenance
(1) Request the lens inspection result
1
Command
WindowCheckResult
Description
Requests the result of the lens inspection maintainable as well as the date it was last performed.
Target
-
WX
Communication Interface
RX
Command
-
Response
-
Command
RX,WindowCheckResult[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E[CR]
Parameter
17 bytes
A:0 to 1
1 bytes
Whether the lens inspection has been
conducted
When not conducted at all: 0
When it has been conducted: 1
B: 0000 to 2099
4 bytes
Year conducted
(when not conducted at all: 0000)
C: 00 to 12
2 bytes
Month conducted
(when not conducted at all: 00)
D: 00 to 31
2 bytes
Day conducted
(when not conducted at all: 00)
E:000 to 100
3 bytes
Conducted result
(when not conducted at all: 000)
It cannot be used on the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A) series.
(2) Set/Request the sensitivity of the lens inspection
Command
WindowCheckSensitivity
Description
Sets/Requests the sensitivity of the lens inspection.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,WindowCheckSensitivity=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,WindowCheckSensitivity[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
22 bytes
A:0/1/2
1 byte
Lens inspection sensitivity at startup
0: Standard
1: High sensitivity 1
2: High sensitivity 2
* Default value “0”
It cannot be used on the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A) series.
(3) Set/Request the lens inspection at startup
Command
WindowCheckStartup
Description
Sets/Requests the lens inspection at startup
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,WindowCheckStartup=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,WindowCheckStartup[CR]
Response
RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter
18 bytes
1 byte
A:0/1
Lens inspection at startup
0: Do not conduct
1: At every startup
* Default value “1”
It cannot be used on the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A) series.
1-80
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Command Details
(4) Set/Request the lens inspection alarm threshold.
Command
WindowCheckAlarmThreshold
Description
Sets/Requests the lens inspection threshold. Inspection results under this threshold will produce a warning.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,WindowCheckAlarmThreshold=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
RX,WindowCheckAlarmThreshold[CR]
Response
Parameter
25 bytes
1
RX,OK,A[CR]
A:0~100
3 bytes
Value of the lens inspection result
Communication Interface
It cannot be used on the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A) series.
(5) Start the lens inspection
Command
WindowCheck
Description
Executes the lens inspection.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,WindowCheck[CR]
Response
WX,OK,A[CR]
Command
Response
Parameter
11 bytes
None
A:0~100
3 bytes
Value of the lens inspection result
It cannot be used on the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A) series.
(6) Laser power measurement
Command
LaserPowerCheck
Description
Measures the laser power. It takes about 10 seconds for the measurement. The shutter closes, and the marking point is
not irradiated.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,LaserPowerCheck=A,B[CR]
Response
WX,OK,C[CR]
Command
Response
Parameter
15 bytes
None
A:000.0~100.0
5 bytes
Laser Power (%)
B:000/040~400
3 bytes
Pulse frequency (kHz)
C:000.00~999.99
6 bytes
Output power (W)
It cannot be used on the MD-X400(A)/450(A) series.
(7) Delete all logging data
Command
LoggingClearAllData
Description
Deletes all logging data.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,LoggingClearAllData[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Command
Response
19 bytes
None
(8) Delete logging data with a specified period
Command
LoggingClearData
Description
Delete log data in the internal memory by specifying a period.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,LoggingClearData=A,B
Response
WX,OK
Command
Response
Parameter
16 bytes
None
A:0000000000 to 9999999999
8 bytes
Start date: yyyymmddhh
B: 0000000000 to 9999999999
8 bytes
End date: yyyymmddhh
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-81
Applied Functions
Applied Functions
This chapter provides information on omission of parameters, convenient command usages, and how to create new settings using only commands.
1
Variable-length support
The unwanted “0” can be omitted when sending the setting values to the laser marker using the Write command.
Communication Interface
„ Omission of the command for changing the currently running job No. to “1”
Command
WX,JobNo=0001[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Change the job No. to variable-length
Command
WX,JobNo=1[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Variable-length support complete
„ Omission of the command for changing the position correction values
Command
WX,AllPosition=-90.000,000.000,090.000,-062.500,0000.000,21.000[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Change the correction value to variable-length
Command
WX,AllPosition=-90,0,90,-62.5,0,21[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Variable-length support complete
Omission of target specifiers
In the following cases, you can send the command omitting the target specifier.
If the currently running job No. is the target
You can omit the target specifier if you are specifying the currently running job No. using the “JOB” target specifier.
„ Omission of the command for changing the title of the currently running job No.0001 to “ABC”
Command
WX,JOB=0001,Title=ABC[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
You can omit “JOB” as this is a currently running job No.
Command
WX,Title=ABC[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Omission complete
1-82
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Applied Functions
If block No.000 is the target
You can omit the target specifier if you are specifying block No. 000 using the “BLK” target specifier.
„ Omission of the command for changing the block No.000 string of the currently running job
No.0001 to “ABC”
Command
WX,JOB=0001,BLK=000,CharacterString=ABC[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
1
You can omit “BLK” for block No.000.
WX,JOB=0001,CharacterString=ABC[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Communication Interface
Command
You can omit “JOB” as this is a currently running job No.
Command
WX,CharacterString=ABC[CR]
Response
WX,OK [CR]
Omission complete
Omission of parameters
If you only wish to change some parameters using a command that have multiple parameters, you can send the command omitting those parameters
you do not need to change.
„ Omission of the command changing only the C: Day setting value out of the six date/time setting
parameters (A: Year, B: Month, C: Day, D: Hour, E: Minute, F: Second)
To change the current time setting of 2014/12/20/11: 38: 20 to 2014/12/21/11: 38: 20
Command
WX,TimeSetting=2014,12,21,11,38,20[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
Omit the unwanted parameters
Command
WX,TimeSetting=,,21,,,[CR]
Response
WX,OK【CR】
Variable-length support complete
• The omitted settings will retain their current status.
• The number of separator commas remain unchanged.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-83
Applied Functions
Sending of linked commands
You can link commands and send them together when sending commands to the same job No. for multiple times. Moreover, you can omit the alreadyspecified target specifier when linking commands. Enter a target specifier only if you wish to re-specify the target in the middle of a command.
• You cannot link and send a command targeting two or more job No.
• You cannot link and send commands that are related to “Operation/Current Value” or “Status/Controller Setup”.
1
For WX command
Communication Interface
To send the command with a linked WX command, link the command by adding “WX” only to the first command and removing “WX” from the second and
subsequent commands.
„ Omission of the command for changing the block No.1 string of the currently running job No.0001
to “ABC”, and the block No.2 string to “123”
1. Command
WX,JOB=0001,BLK=001,CharacterString=ABC[CR]
2. Response
WX,OK[CR]
3. Command
WX,JOB=0001,BLK=002,CharacterString=123[CR]
4. Response
WX,OK[CR]
You can link the commands as they are changing blocks in the same job No.
Command
WX,JOB=0001,BLK=001,CharacterString=ABC,JOB=0001,BLK=002,CharacterString=123[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
You can omit the “JOB” on the end as the job No. are the same.
Command
WX,JOB=0001,BLK=001,CharacterString=ABC,BLK=002,CharacterString=123[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
You can omit “JOB” as this is a currently running job No.
Command
WX,BLK=001,CharacterString=ABC,BLK=002,CharacterString=123[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
You can omit “0s” as they are unnecessary for the parameters.
Command
WX,BLK=1,CharacterString=ABC,BLK=2,CharacterString=123[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
Omission complete
1-84
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Applied Functions
For RX command
To send the command with a linked RX command, link the command by adding “RX” only to the first command and removing “RX” from the second and
subsequent commands. A response is returned in the order of the requesting commands.
„ Omission of the command for requesting the block No.1 (String: ABC) and No.2 (String: 123) string
setting of the currently running job No. 0001
RX,JOB=0001,BLK=001,CharacterString[CR]
2. Response
RX,OK,ABC[CR]
3. Command
RX,JOB=0001,BLK=002,CharacterString[CR]
4. Response
RX,OK,123[CR]
1
Communication Interface
1. Command
You can link the commands as they are requests in the same job No.
Command
RX,JOB=0001,BLK=001,CharacterString,JOB=0001,BLK=002,CharacterString[CR]
Response
RX,OK,ABC,123[CR]
You can omit the “JOB” on the end as the job No. are the same.
Command
RX,JOB=0001,BLK=001,CharacterString,BLK=002,CharacterString[CR]
Response
RX,OK,ABC,123[CR]
You can omit “JOB” as this is a currently running job No.
Command
RX,BLK=001,CharacterString,BLK=002,CharacterString[CR]
Response
RX,OK,ABC,123[CR]
You can omit “0s” as they are unnecessary for the parameters.
Command
RX,BLK=1,CharacterString,BLK=2,CharacterString[CR]
Response
RX,OK,ABC,123[CR]
Omission complete
Linking the communication command (WXC command)
You can link and send commands by using WXC command. Commands relating to operation can also be linked. The response will return when all the
command processing has been completed. If an error occurs on a command, commands before the error are executed but commands after the error are
not. In case of linking the commands, put “WXC,” at the beginning and link the commands with “,%,”.
„ In case of changing a character string and then continue the marking.
Command
WXC,WX,JOB=000,BLK=000,CharacterString=ABC,%,WX,StartMarking[CR]
Response
WXC,OK [CR]
• Up to 128 commands can be linked up.
• The request commands (RX commands) cannot be used. When the request commands are linked, no error will occur as long as
the commands are proccessed correctly, but the results of the requests do not return as a response.
„ When an error occurs in the middle of linking commands.
The following linking command that switches the marking job to No.10 after the recent job's marking is finished. The error response below returns if there
is no marking job in No.10.
Command
WXC,WX,StartMarking,%,WX,JobNo=10[CR]
Response
WXC,NG,cmd_index=002,E015,No Job Error[CR]
cmd_index = No. of the linking commands on which an error occurs. 000 indicates errors occur on WXC command. 001 or the subsequent number
indicates errors occur on the linking commands.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-85
Applied Functions
Creating new settings
Follow the workflow below if you are creating new settings using only a communication path.
(1) Starting the creation of a new program
Declare a start of job creation on a non-registered job No. using the following command:
1
Communication Interface
Command
CreateJob
Description
Declare a start of job creation on a non-registered job No. using the following command: The specified job No. will stop
the expansion processing until “EndJob” is input.
Target
None
WX
Command
WX,CreateJob=A[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
Command
RX
Response
Parameter
13 bytes
None
A:0000 to 1999
4 bytes
Specifies the job No.
• When you declare “CreateJob” on a non-registered job No., a job will be created with all parameters in their default values.
• By declaring “CreateJob” on an existing job No., you can change the desired job parts using this job file as a base.
• If you wish to initialize the job contents every time you create a job, insert “CreateJobWithAllClear” into the command.
• The XY tracking and Z tracking settings cannot be created.
• If you start editing with CreateJob, do not change any setting contents or edit anything other than the job number until ending editing with
EndJob. Doing so will cause an error in EndJob, preventing editing from completing normally.
(2) Setting the required job and block information
The command required to print a single block is described below.
Contents
Head orientation
Command
Reference
HeadDirection
1-25
BlockType
1-33
String settings
CharacterString
1-34
Character size
CharacterSize
1-38
Block coordinate
BlockPosition
1-44
MarkingParameter
1-46
Block type
Marking parameters
Since all commands other than the string setting command have a default value, you can create new settings even if you omit these values.
(3) Ending the program creation
You can finish editing the job using the command described below.
Command
EndJob
Description
Declares the end of job editing.
Target
None
WX
RX
Command
WX,EndJob[CR]
Response
WX,OK[CR]
Command
Response
Parameter
10 bytes
None
None
If the settings are in their default values and the mark data is the “ABC” string, the program can be configured using just three commands as
described below.
• WX,CreateJob=0001[CR]
• WX,JOB=0001,BLK=001,CharacterString=ABC[CR]
• WX,EndJob[CR]
1-86
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Communication Errors
Communication Errors
Error response
An error response is returned if there is an error in the command format or data range. All error responses will have the error number “S***” and error
code on the end of the command.
Send
WX,Command[CR]
Receive
Normal response: WX,OK[CR]
Error response: WX,NG,S***,ErrCode[CR]
1
Communication Interface
Error list
Error No.
Error name
Remedy
Job Incorrect Error
Check whether the parameter is within the input range.
Create the job again if no corrupt location can be found.
S001
Job Memory Full Error
Remove unwanted jobs from the controller.
S002
Built-in memory card full
error
Remove unwanted logos, fonts, and Z-MAP data from the controller.
S003
USB flash drive full error
Remove unwanted data from the USB flash drive.
S004
USB flash drive not
inserted error
Perform the operation after inserting a USB flash drive.
S005
USB flash drive cannot
be recognized error
Format the USB flash drive in FAT** format and try again.
Try using a different USB flash drive if the error reoccurs.
S006
Priority error
The console and/or external communication has acquired communication priority.
Check if the other devices are in test marking or finder mode, check if another device is controlling the
laser marker, and perform the operation after exiting from these modes.
S000
S008
No-File Error
Perform the communication again using an existing file as the target.
S009
Busy Error
Perform the operation when the laser is in the READY state.
S010
No marking block error
Set the marking flag to ON for one or more target blocks (Matrix).
S011
Logos/custom characters
Reduce the number of files.
over error
S012
Scan speed optimization
error
Reduce the line speed or adjust the character size, etc.
S013
Scan Optimize
unexecutable error
Set the quality level of all blocks to [Customize].
S014
Job Operation During
Execution Error
The currently running job cannot be deleted.
S015
Logo/custom character
file operation error
First remove the job that is using the logo or custom character you wish to delete.
S016
Acquiring Mastership
Error
Start marking after the device has gone into READY status or controlling status.
S017
Fixed point marking
parameter error
Modify the job to make sure that the fixed point and 3D shape blocks are not mixed.
S018
Barcode/2D code illegal
setting error
Please enter an encoding string.
S019
All-setup restoration error Make sure to use the backup data from the same model.
S020
Data Length Error
S021
S022
Noise may be entering the external communication cable if the error occurs in a sporadic manner.
Job Number Unregistered
Transfer the job to the controller by following the procedure below.
Error
Select [Settings] - [File Operations] in the ribbon menu, and then Transfer the job settings to the
Block No. Not Registered controller.
error
S023
Status error
Reset the error and try marking again.
S024
Illegal Command Error
Acquire the communication history and check the parameter input range and block type.
S025
Checksum Error
Check if the checksum settings for the laser marker and external devices (PLC, etc.) are both ON.
If there is no problem in the above, check if the checksum calculation method of the PLC is set to
horizontal parity (Exclusive OR).
Noise may be entering the external communication cable if the error occurs in a sporadic manner.
S026
Format error
Incorrect format in the communication command. Acquire the communication history and check the
command details.
If a comma (,) is used in the string, change it to "%044A" (special code representing a comma) before
sending it.
S027
Command
Unrecognizable Error
Invalid communication command. Acquire the communication history and check the command details.
S028
Response data length
error
Modify the request command to reduce the response data length.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-87
Communication Errors
1
Communication Interface
1-88
Error No.
Error name
Remedy
S029
Mark data request error
Send the command after marking has completed.
S030
Group number
unregistered error
Group the blocks in the job using Marking Builder Plus.
You can group blocks by following the procedure below.
Select and right-click on a block to open the context menu, and then select [Grouping].
S031
No Program Error
(2D code reader)
Activate the 2D code reader function in Marking Builder Plus.
S032
No Program Error
(Marking confirmation
function)
Activate the marking confirmation function in Marking Builder Plus.
S033
No Program Error
(3-Axis Tracking)
Activate the XY tracking or Z tracking function in Marking Builder Plus.
S040
Operation Limitation Error
(2D Code Reader)
S041
Operation Limitation Error
(3D Marking)
S042
Operation Limitation Error
(Z Tracking)
S043
Operation Limitation Error
(XY Tracking)
S050
Quick change of
character setup error
Check the following when using the high speed character edit command.
• Check if the block you wish to change is subject to high speed string editing.
• Check that the string to be sent is registered as the character type that supports high speed string
editing.
S051
Sample Marking
Unexecutable Error
Commence sample marking in READY state.
S052
Laser inspection
unexecutable error
Commence inspection laser in READY state.
S060
Block type incorrect
setting error
S061
Block assignment
incorrect setting error
S062
Character size incorrect
setting error
S063
Character assignment
incorrect setting error
S064
Character advanced
incorrect setting error
S065
Marking condition
incorrect setting error
S066
Barcode/2D code illegal
setting error
S067
Continuous marking
incorrect setting error
S068
Movement/marking
direction incorrect setting
error
S069
Job Program Incorrect
Error
S070
Matrix information
incorrect setting error
S071
Matrix cell information
incorrect setting error
S072
Character string incorrect
setting error
S073
Individual counter
incorrect setting error
S074
Common counter
incorrect setting error
Reconfigure the common counter settings by following the procedure below.
You can configure by selecting [Settings] - [Common Data] in the ribbon menu, followed by [Common
Counter].
S075
Encoding information
incorrect setting error
Reconfigure the encoding setting.
You can configure by selecting [Settings] - [Common Data] in the ribbon menu, followed by [Encoding].
S076
System information
incorrect setting error
S077
Font replacement
information incorrect
setting error
S078
Font scaling information
incorrect setting error
Delete the job that uses the inactivated function or activate the target function..
Recreate the job.
Modify the blocks whose character aspect ratio is greater than 1:5 or 5:1.
Recreate the job.
Recreate the job.
Reconfigure the character scaling settings.
You can configure by selecting [Settings] - [Common Data] in the ribbon menu, followed by [Character
scaling].
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Communication Errors
Error No.
Error name
Remedy
S080
Logo/custom character
buffer information
incorrect setting error
S083
3D information incorrect
setting error
S084
Operation limitation error
A job loaded on the controller is using a function that has not been activated (e.g. 2D code reader).
Delete the job that is using the unactivated function, or activate the necessary function.
S085
Data Version Error
The loaded job has been created in a higher version than that of the connected Marking Builder Plus.
Upgrade Marking Builder Plus to the latest version, or downgrade the version of the loaded job.
S086
Wobble Incorrect Setting
Error
Check if the marking line width, overlap rate and scan speed settings are within range.
Recreate the job.
2D code reading error
Modify the job so that code reading is possible in test marking, then run the job again.
S088
Working distance
measurement error
Height measurement may not be possible in the following cases:
• Distance measuring light cannot be detected correctly because of the surface condition of the target.
S089
Working distance
measurement limitation
error
Measure the work distance when the laser is in the READY state.
S090
Registered barcode error
Change the barcode verification string.
S091
Barcode/2D code link
setting error
Please check the following:
• Check if the 2D code overprinting setting is enabled for the target block.
• Check if the target overprinting No. exists.
S092
Barcode illegal
registration state error
Configure it in either Marking Builder Plus or the console.
S093
Marking Confirmation
Function Error
Check if the marked data exisits within the field of view of the confirmation coordinates.
S094
TrueType font file size
error
Reduce the number of TrueType font types being used.
S095
Model limitation error
Cannot be used.
S096
Open priority error
Restart the device.
S097
File Access Error
File may be read-only.
Check the file attribute and try again.
S100
Illegal Capturing
Condition Error
The FNC specifier of the communication command is specified other than 00 (marking confirmation
function) and 01 (2D code reader).
Send the command using the correct FNC specifier number.
S101
Window maintenance
cancelled
Window maintenance started by a communication command was cancelled.
S102
Z distance measuring
failure
Z coordinate acquisition performed by communication command failed.
S103
Tracking No. Registration
Review the requesting number.
Error
S104
Tracking Result Request
Error
S105
Logging Capture Result
Request Error
S106
Workflow Result Request
Error
S107
Cell number specification
The specified cell number does not exist. Specify one that does.
error
S108
Distance laser unexcited
error
The lens inspection start command was sent while the distance laser was not excited. Send this
command after exciting the laser.
S109
Capturing Condition Auto
Adjustment Error
If an error occurs in the “Capturing condition auto adjustment” of the 2D code reader, try again.
If an error occurs in the “Brightness and Magnification Adjustment” of the XY tracking, try again.
S110
No Log Data
Execute after saving log data.
S111
Routing Table Full Error
The routing table is full. The maximum number of paths that can be registered in this table is four.
Delete registered paths.
S112
User management
function disable error
The user management function is disabled.
S113
Simultaneous login
exceeded error
The number of allowable simultaneous logins (four) was exceeded. Wait for another user to log out
before logging in.
S114
User authentication
failure error
User authentication failed. Make sure the password is correct.
S115
No user information error
There is no user information. Make sure the user name is correct.
S116
OPC UA parameter error
This is the response when an OPC UA method argument is incorrect. Check the arguments.
S117
OPC UA internal error
Check whether the timing of OPC UA processing, the parameters being used, the server certificate, and
the list of expired certificates are correct.
Request the result after marking.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1-89
Communication Interface
S087
1
Communication Errors
Error No.
Error name
Remedy
S118
Unregistered OPC UA
session error
The OPC UA session has not been registered.
S120
Workflow error
A workflow process failed. Check the workflow error details.
1
Communication Interface
1-90
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Appendix
Appendix
ASCII code list
Upper 4 bit
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
NUL DLE SP
0
@
P
`
p
1
SOH DC1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
2
STX DC2
“
2
B
R
b
r
s
3
ETX DC3
#
3
C
S
c
4
EOT DC4
$
4
D
T
d
t
5
ENQ NAC %
5
E
U
e
u
6
ACK SYN &
6
F
V
f
v
7
BEL ETB
'
7
G
W
g
w
8
BS CAN
(
8
H
X
h
x
9
HT EM
)
9
I
Y
i
y
A
LF SUB
*
:
J
Z
j
z
B
VT ESC +
C
FF
;
K
[
k
{
FS
,
<
L
\
l
―
D
CR GS
-
=
M
]
m
}
E
SO RS
.
>
N
^
n
~
F
SI
/
?
O
_
o DEL
US
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
1
Communication Interface
Lower 4 bit
1
1-91
Appendix
Model-Specific Input Value List
MD-X2000/2500 Series
Parameter
1
Unit
Standard area
Wide area
Small spot
MD-X2000(A)/2500(A)
MD-X2020(A)/2520(A)
MD-X2050(A)
Communication Interface
Line width
mm
0.010 to 5.000
0.010 to 7.500
0.010 to 2.500
Height/Width
mm
000.100 to 125.000
000.100 to 330.000
000.001 to 050.000
Logo Height/Width
mm
000.002 to 125.000
000.005 to 330.000
000.001 to 50.000
Arc character space
mm
000.000 to 180.000
000.000 to 450.000
000.000 to 075.000
Character space
mm
000.000 to 180.000
000.000 to 450.000
000.000 to 075.000
Character full width/full height
mm
000.100 to 180.000
000.100 to 450.000
000.100 to 075.000
Character pitch
mm
000.000 to 180.000
000.000 to 450.000
000.000 to 075.000
Barcode height
mm
000.200 to 125.000
000.300 to 330.000
000.100 to 050.000
Linear code height
mm
000.200 to 125.000
000.500 to 330.000
000.100 to 050.000
X coordinate
mm
-062.500 to 0062.500
-165.000 to 0165.000
-025.000 to 0025.000
Y coordinate
mm
-062.500 to 0062.500
-165.000 to 0165.000
-025.000 to 0025.000
Z coordinate
mm
-021.000 to 0021.000
-021.000 to 0021.000
-015.000 to 0015.000
Sphere diameter, Cylinder diameter,
Bottom diameter of cone, Top diameter of
cone
mm
0000.200 to 0480.000
0000.200 to 1200.000
0000.200 to 0200.000
Cone height
mm
000.100 to 125.000
000.100 to 330.000
000.100 to 050.000
Scan speed
mm/s
00001 to 12000
00001 to 08000
00001 to 06000
Approach scan speed
mm/s
0 to 04000
0 to 06000
0 to 02000
Pulse frequency
kHz
Spot variable
-
-210 to 0210
-210 to 0210
000 to 400
-150 to 0150
Deep dig amount
mm
00.000 to 42.000
00.000 to 42.000
00.000 to 30.000
Matrix Height/Width
mm
000.000 to 125.000
000.000 to 330.000
000.000 to 050.000
Line speed
mm/s
0000.1 to 4000.0
0000.1 to 2000.0
0000.1 to 2000.0
Start Position
mm
-062.500 to 0062.500
-165.000 to 0165.000
-025.000 to 0025.000
End Position
mm
-062.500 to 0062.500
-165.000 to 0165.000
-025.000 to 0025.000
Z coordinate correction amount
mm
-42.000 to 042.000
-42.000 to 042.000
-30.000 to 030.000
Upper tolerance limit
mm
-20.999 to 042.000
-20.999 to 042.000
-14.999 to 030.000
Lower tolerance limit
mm
-42.000 to 20.999
-42.000 to 20.999
-30.000 to 014.999
Movement reference point X/Y
coordinates(Correct inside the horizontal
plane)
mm
-062.500 to 0062.500
-165.000 to 0165.000
-025.000 to 0025.000
Correction amount X/Y(Correct inside the
horizontal plane)
mm
-125.000 to 0125.000
-330.000 to 0330.000
-050.000 to 0050.00
X/Y coordinates position correction in the unit
setup
mm
-062.500 to 0062.500
-165.000 to 0165.000
-025.000 to 0025.000
Z coordinate position correction in the unit
setup
mm
-21.000 to 021.000
-21.000 to 021.000
-15.000 to 015.000
1-92
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
2
EtherNet/IP
2
EtherNet/IP
Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
What is EtherNet/IP?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
EtherNet/IP communication specifications
and functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Compatible laser markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Compatible PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Cyclic communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Cyclic communication with the laser marker. . . . . . . . . . 2-3
How to configure the laser marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Configuring the PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Status of device assignment of the MD information
area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Command communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
When “Request” bit does NOT work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Ladder Program Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
KEYENCE KV Series Program Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
OMRON PLC CJ2 Series Program Example. . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Ladder Program
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
2-1
Getting Started
Getting Started
What is EtherNet/IP?
EtherNet/IP is an industrial communication network proposed by the
ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association,Inc.).
EtherNet/IP communications can be shared and used with standard
Ethernet and network communications.
z Scanner and adapters
2
In EtherNet/IP, one of the two devices opens a communication line
called a “connection” with the other device. The side that opens a
connection is referred to as a “scanner” (originator); and the side that is
opened is referred to as an “adapter” (target). Typically, the PLC is used
for the scanner. The laser marker is an adapter device.
EtherNet/IP
z Cyclic communication
EtherNet/IP offers cyclic communication (Implicit message) for sending
and receiving data on a periodic basis. It allows you to set the RPI
(communication cycle) based on the priority of the sent/received data,
enabling sending and receiving of data with adjustment of the overall
communication load.
Communication cycle
(RPI) setting
MD-X2000(A) : 10ms
MD-X2020(A) : 50ms
MD-X2500(A) : 100ms
EtherNet/IP communication
specifications and functions
„ EtherNet/IP communication specifications of
the laser marker
Number of
connections
16
Keyence KV
Series
Cyclic communication
OMRON
(Implicit messages)
Communication CJ/CS series
size
Rockwell
Automation
ControlLogix
CompactLogix
2 to 320 bytes
2 to 320 bytes
2 to 320 bytes
„ Overview of the EtherNet/IP functions of the
laser marker
You can read the laser marker statuses and/or execute various
operations via the EtherNet/IP communication. Refer to the device map
for details.
Compatible laser markers
MD-X2000(A)
10ms
MD-X2020(A)
50ms
MD-X2500(A)
100ms
Laser marker model
Software
MD-X2000/2500 Series, MD-X400/450 Series
Marking Builder Plus
The MD-X400/450 Series can use an EDS file from the
MD-X2000 Series. EDS file.
In this case, some displays may be the contents of
the MD-X2000 series.
Compatible PLCs
For more details on how to configure each PLC, refer to the instruction manual of the corresponding PLC.
z Keyence
PLC model
EtherNet/IP communication unit
Firmware version
Software
KV-3000/5000 Series
KV-EP21V
Ver.2 or later
KV-7000/8000 Series
KV-XLE02/EP21V
Ver.2 or later
KV-5500/7500/8000
Built-in port/KV-EP21V
Ver.2 or later
KV STUDIO (Ver.6.0 or later)
*The KV-7300/7500 series uses Ver. 8.0 or later,
The KV-XLE02 uses Ver. 9.2 or later,
KV-8000 series uses Ver. 10.0 or later
Firmware version
Software
z OMRON
PLC model
EtherNet/IP communication unit
SYSMAC CJ2
Built-in port/CJ1WEIP21
V1.0 or later
SYSMAC CJ1
CJ1WEIP21
V1.0 or later
SYSMAC CS1
CS1WEIP21
V1.0 or later
Cx-One (Ver.3.0 or later)
z Rockwell Automation
PLC model
EtherNet/IP communication unit
Firmware version
1756 ControlLogix
1756-ENBT
Ver.13 or later
1769 CompactLogix
Built-in port
Ver.13 or later
1747 SLC5/05
Built-in port
OD firmwarelevel Series C,
FRN 10 or later
1761/1766 MicroLogix
1761-NETENI
1762/1763/1764 MicroLogix
1761-NETENI
Series A, Revision A, FRN1
Software
RsLogix5000 (Ver.13 or later)
RsLogix500 (Ver.7.10 or later)
Either a straight or crossover LAN cable can be used.
2-2
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Cyclic communication
Cyclic communication
Cyclic communication with the laser marker
How to configure the laser marker
Cyclic communication performs periodic communication (several to
several dozen ms) and is suitable for real-time control.
The communication cycle and communication size settings follow those
on the PLC settings.
The laser marker is configured as follows using Marking Builder Plus.
It is recommended to set the communication cycle to 10
ms or longer.
[Controller] from the [Settings] tab, and
1 Select
then [Ethernet Settings].
2 Set the Ethernet communication settings.
2
Set these items as appropriate for your network environment.
Setting example
MD-X2000/2500 series
Laser marker
information storage
area
Laser marker
information storage
area
Controller status
Controller status
Error status
Error status
Busy status
Busy status
Reading result
Requested
information Storage
area
Communication
cycle
Configured
on the PLC side
192.168.0.20
Subnet mask
255.255.255.0
Default gateway
0.0.0.0
EtherNet/IP
PLC
IP address
Reading result
Requested
information Storage
area
Marking instruction
Marking instruction
Reading instruction
Reading instruction
Command
instruction
Command
instruction
3 Set Industrial Ethernet to [EtherNet/IP].
The EtherNet/IP setting items will appear.
4 Set the Input/Output assembly size.
These items should be set according to the PLC settings.
• Read the “Safety Information” in the user's
manual for the applicable model to perform
operation in the state that the safety is secured
by using security function even when the network
failure occurs.
• Confirm the safe operation by considering the
communication delay due to the communication
time or network overload state.
Setting example
Endian
Little-Endian
Input assembly size
320 (bytes)
Output assembly size
288 (bytes)
Even if you specify the update time for cyclic
communication to 10 ms or longer, the processing
may be delayed or the communication may be
disconnected by temporary timeout due to the
excessive temporary or continuous load on the
controller, caused by simultaneous communication
functions being used in the controller such as dialog
operations and commands. In such case, the periodic
communication settings and use condition need to
be reviewed. Be sure to check for these and other
problems in the operating performance before entering
production.
If you modify the EtherNet/IP settings, the unit must
be restarted for the changes to take effect.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
2-3
Cyclic communication
Configuring the PLC
PLC settings
Configure the following settings on the PLC when using cyclic communication.
(1) The connection to be used
(2) The device settings to be used for cyclic communication
(For more details on the setting method, refer to the manual of each PLC.)
When using the KV series, (1) and (2) are set automatically when you make a selection in the KV STUDIO.
2
z Connection to be used
In EtherNet/IP, a connection is opened from the scanner during cyclic communication. There are many types of connections, and the connection available
is different for each device. The type of connection available for the laser marker is Exclusive Owner.
EtherNet/IP
Connection type
Exclusive Owner
(Data transmission + control)
Instance ID
Size (bytes)
Result data (Input Assemblies)
Data type
0X64 (100)
2 to 320
Control data (Output Assemblies)
0X65 (101)
2 to 288
RPI (ms)
1 to 10000
z What is Exclusive Owner?
This type of connection allows communication between the PLC and laser marker.
It allows you to send a marking start instruction from the PLC to the laser marker or send a status notification from the laser marker to the PLC.
Only a single [Exclusive Owner] connection can be set for a laser marker.
How to configure the KEYENCE KV series
Connect the KV with the PC using an Ethernet cable and launch KV STUDIO.
1 Create a new project.
Settings (2)] tab of the unit editor,
2 Insetthethe[Unit
IP address and subnet mask of the
3 Transfer the unit configuration to a PLC.
Select [Monitor/Simulator(N)] > [PLC Transfer(W)] to start the
transfer.
unit having the port for EtherNet/IP.
4 Display the EtherNet/IP settings.
Select [Tools(T)] > [Built-in EtherNet Settings(E)] > [EtherNet/
IP(W)] to open the setting screen.
• Set the IP address such that it is different from that
of the laser marker.
• Match the subnet mask value with that of the laser
marker.
• If you are using a unit other than KV5500/7500/8000, configure the IP address
and subnet mask after adding the EtherNet/IP
communication unit (KV-EP21V) to the unit.
2-4
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
5 Add the laser marker to a device.
Add the [MD-X2000/2500 Series] in the [Device List (1)] tab to the
device screen by drag and drop.
Cyclic communication
8 Register the device comment.
Double click the device comment in the project, and open the
device comment edit window. Switch distinct unit editing to “MD-X2”,
click the [Detail] button, and then click [Register unit Device] and
[Reg].
2
EtherNet/IP
If you cannot find the target model in the device list,
add MD-X2000/2500 from [EDS File(D)] > [Reg]. The
ez1 file is stored in the location described below.
C:\Program Files (x86)\keyence\Marking Builder
Plus_Ver*\etc\EtherNetIP\[model name]
(Ver* is the version of Marking Builder Plus.)
6 Set the IP address of the laser marker.
Match the IP address with the IP address set on the laser marker
side.
the settings and close the EtherNet/IP
7 Save
screen.
Save the settings and close the screen after confirming that the
laser marker has been added under EtherNet/IP as shown below.
The device comment related to EtherNet/IP of the
laser marker will be registered automatically as follow.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
2-5
Cyclic communication
How to configure the OMRON CJ2 series
Connect the PLC with the laser marker using an Ethernet cable and launch
CX-Programmer.
4 Set the IP address of PLC.
After setting the IP address and subnet mask, select [Transfer[PC to
Unit]], and transfer the parameter to the unit.
1 Create a new project.
2 Connect PLC.
Select [Auto Online] > [Direct Online] from [PLC] menu. Select the
connection type with PLC to connect.
2
EtherNet/IP
• Set the IP address such that it is different from that
of the laser marker.
• Match the subnet mask value with that of the laser
marker.
• To enable the transferred settings, the unit needs to
be restarted.
5 Start up Network Configurator.
Right click [Built In EtherNet/IP Port] of connected PLC, select [Start
Special Application] and then [Start with Settings Inherited].
The [Select Special Application] screen appears, and select
[Network Configurator].
This part describes how to connect via USB.
3 Display the TCP/IP parameter edit screen of PLC.
Double click [I/O Table and Unit Setup] in the project workspace,
then double click [Built In EtherNet/IP Port] of connected PLC.
6 Select interface.
Select [Select Interface] > [CJ2 USB/Serial Port] from [Option] menu.
2-6
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Cyclic communication
7 Connect with PLC.
Select [Connect] from the [Network] menu, set [Setup Interface] >
[Select Connect Network Port] > [Select Network] according to the
device environment, and then connect it.
10 Display the device parameter edit window
Right click the PLC icon in the network window, and select
[Parameter] > [Edit].
8 Upload the network setting.
If [Upload] is selected from the [Network] menu, the IP address
of the device which has been connected to network is displayed.
Check that the IP address of the connection target device has been
displayed, select [OK], and complete the upload.
11 Set the In-Consume/Out-Produce area tag.
Select the [In-Consume] tab, and click [New].
Set the tag name to “E0_00000” (first address of input data
memory), and set the size to “320 Byte”.
2
EtherNet/IP
9 Install EDS file
Select [Install] from [EDS File] menu.
Next, select the [Out-Produce] tab, and click [New].
Set the tag name to “D00000” (first address of output data memory),
and set the size to “288 Byte”.
The EDS file of the laser marker is located in the
folder below.
C:\Program Files (x86)\keyence\Marking Builder
Plus_Ver*\etc\EtherNetIP\[model name]
(Ver* is the version of Marking Builder Plus.)
The data size of this setting method is the default
setting value.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
2-7
Cyclic communication
12 Associate the tags between PLC and MD-X
Select the [Connection] tab.
Select the MD-X in the [Unregister Device List]. Then click [↓] to
register the device in [Register Device List].
2
EtherNet/IP
click the device to be registered, and
13 Double
display the [Edit Connection] screen.
Set “Connection I/O Type”, “Originator Device”, and “Target Device”
as follow, and click [Reg].
z Setting example
€Connection I/O Type
Class1
€Originator Device (PLC)
Input Tag Set
E0_00000
Connection Type
Multi-cast connection
Output Tag Set
D00000
Connection Type
Point to Point connection
€Target Device (Laser Marker)
Output Tag Set
Input_100
Input Tag Set
Input_100
to the [Edit Device Parameters] screen,
14 Return
and select [OK].
The PLC setting is completed by the above setting method.
For details about how to operate CX-Programmer and
Network Configurator, refer to PLC user's manual.
2-8
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Cyclic communication
How to configure the Allen-Bradley
Control/Compact Logix series
Connect the PLC to the laser marker using an Ethernet cable and
launch RSLogix5000.
3 Configure the MD-X Ethernet Module
Name the module and enter the Ethernet IP Address of the MD-X
laser marker.
Then, click [Change] and change the data size from [SINT] to [INT].
Click [OK] when finished.
1 Install the MD-X EDS File.
In RSLogix5000, click [Tools] then select [EDS Hardware
Installation Tool].
Follow Rockwell Automation EDS wizard for registering an EDS
file.
2
EtherNet/IP
The EDS file of the laser marker is located in the
folder below.
C:\Program Files (x86)\keyence\Marking Builder
Plus_Ver*\etc\EtherNetIP\[model name]
(Ver* is the version of Marking Builder Plus.)
2 Add an MD-X Ethernet Module.
Right click [I/O Configuration] > [Ethernet], and select [New Module].
Select [MD-X2000/2500] and click [Create].
[INT] should be selected since the MD-X2000/2500
series uses 16-bit (2 bytes) addresses. You must
enter the assembly size obtained by dividing the
assembly size of the laser marker by 2.
By default, the laser marker's input assembly size
is 320 and output assembly size is 288. Therefore
the PLC's input assembly size should be 160 and
output assembly size should be 144.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
2-9
Cyclic communication
Status of device assignment of the MD information area
In the device, there is an area for writing laser marker state to the PLC and an area for writing instructions from the PLC to the laser marker. It is divided
into bit area and word area.
Input Assemblies Memory Map
Laser marker -> PLC
Address
2
Bit15
0
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
External
Lighting
Control Status
Logging
Trigger
Status
Laser Safety
Module
Status
Remote
Interlock
Status
Shutter
Control
Status
Laser
Emitted
Status
1
EtherNet/IP
2
Mark Check Mark Check
Marking
/2DC Read /2DC Read
Complete1
NG Status 1 OK Status 1
Counter
End4
Status
Counter
End3
Status
Counter
End2
Status
Counter
End1
Status
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Distance
Job Change
Laser
Ready Status
Ready Status
Bit7
Bit6
Network
Status
Shutter
Status
I/O Error
Status
Warning
Status
Error
Status
Ready
Status
Window
Monitoring
Busy Status
Job Edit
Busy
Status
Communication
Guide
Job Change
Priority Error
Laser Busy
Busy Status
Status
Status
Marking
Busy
Status
Busy
Status
Distance
Laser Stop
Status
Internal
Lighting
Status
Operation
Stop
Status
Trigger
Lock
Status
Mark Check
/2DC Read
Busy Status
Date Attach
Status
Date Hold
Status
Laser
Control
Status
Mark Check Mark Check
3-Axis
3-Axis
Tracking /2DC Read /2DC Read
Tracking
NG Status OK Status NG Status 2 OK Status 2
3
4
Job Edit
Complete
5
System Info
ID Change
Complete
Window
Guide
2DC Read Error Clear Laser Stop
Marking
Monitoring
Laser
Complete Complete Complete
Complete2
Complete
Complete
Counter
Reset
Complete
Counter
Counter
Rank
Counter Up
Counter No
Down
Value
Change
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Job
Change
Complete
Marked
String Read
Complete
Setting
String Read
Complete
String
Change
Complete
6
7
Z Tracking XY Tracking Command
Result Read Result Read
Send
Complete
Complete Complete
8
Job Edit
Error
Window
2DC Read Error Clear
Stop Marking Guide Laser Start Marking
Request
Monitoring
Request
Request Error Request Error Request Error
Request Error
Error
Error
9
System Info
ID Change
Error
Counter
Counter Up Counter
Counter
Counter Down
Rank Change Job Change
Reset
Request Value Change No Change
Request Error
Request Error Request Error
Request Error
Request Error Request Error
Error
Marked String Setting String
String Change
Read Request Read Request
Request Error
Error
Error
10
11
12
Z Tracking XY Tracking Command
Result
Result
Send Request
Request Error Request Error
Error
Error Code 1
13
Error Code 2
14
Command Send Error Status
15
16
Job No Status
17
Counter No Status
18/19
Counter Value Status
20
Rank Value Status
21
System Info ID
22/23
System Info Value
24
Marking Check Score/2DC Read Grade Status1
25
Marking Check/2DC Read Total Count Status1
26
Marking Check Score/2DC Read Grade Status 2
27
Marking Check/2DC Read Total Count Status 2
28/29
Total Marking Count Status
30
Response Data Size
31 - 155
Response Data
2-10
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Cyclic communication
„ Bit area for writing laser marker state on the PLC
In the following areas, information is divided by bit. The bit values are either 0 or 1.
The laser marker information is written in the PLC bit area via cyclic communication. An area without a description is reserved.
Address bit
0
1
Ready Status
Error Status
Status Information
0: Not Ready
1: Ready
0: Not Error
1: Error
Description
Displays the ready status. When the device status is Ready, operations such
as start marking, job change, and character string change are accepted
Linked I/O Terminal
Error output
Displays the warning error (W***) status.
2
Warning Status
0: Not Warning
1: Warning
3
I/O Error Status
0: Not I/O Error
1: I/O Error
4
Shutter Status
0: Open Shutter
1: Close Shutter
5
Network Status
0: No Connection
1: Connection
6
Job Change Ready
Status
0: Not Ready
1: Ready
Displays the job switching ready status.
0: Not Ready
1: Ready
Displays the Ready state of the distance laser.
Laser Emitted Status
0: Laser Not Excited
1: Laser Excited
Displays the laser excitation status.
Shutter Control Status
0 : OFF (Close)
1 : ON (Open)
Displays whether the shutter control input is on or off.
10 Remote Interlock Status
0 : OFF (Close)
1 : ON (Open)
Displays whether the remote interlock input is on or off.
Laser Safety Module
Status
0 : OFF (Close)
1 : ON (Open)
Displays whether the laser safety module control input is on or off.
Displays the status where the laser emission stops when it is “1 (ON)”. When
the laser safety module (MD-C1) is not mounted, it is always “0”.
7
8
9
11
Distance Laser Ready
Status
12 Logging Trigger Status
13
External Lighting Control
Status
0
Busy Status
1
Marking Busy Status
2
Linked I/O Terminal
2
Warning output
Displays the terminal block error (T***) status.
Displays whether the internal shutter is opened or closed.
Linked I/O Terminal
Shutter status output
Displays the Fieldbus network communication status.
Linked I/O Terminal
Linked I/O Terminal
Linked I/O Terminal
Job switching ready status
Distance laser operation ready output
Laser excitation status output
0: OFF
1: ON
Displays whether the logging trigger input is on or off.
0: OFF
1: ON
Displays whether the external lighting control output is on or off.
Linked I/O Terminal
Linked I/O Terminal
Logging trigger input
External Lighting Control Output
If one or more of the following busy statuses are on, Busy Status turns on.
Marking Busy, Guide Laser Busy, Job Change Busy, Commmunication
Priority, Job Edit Busy, Mark Cheeck/2DC Read Busy Status Window
Monitoring Busy
Turns on during marking (including laser inspection).
Linked I/O Terminal
Output During Marking
Turns on when guide laser marking is in operation (including the distance
pointer).
Guide Laser Busy Status
Linked I/O Terminal
1
Trigger ready output
Linked I/O Terminal
Displays the error (E***) status. To recover from an error, eliminate the
causes of the error first, and then turn on Error Clear.
EtherNet/IP
0
Name
Guide Laser Output
Turns on when a job is being deployed.
(Deployment timing: when changing marking jobs, content, and so on)
3
Job Change Busy Status
4
Communication Priority
Error Status
5
Job Edit Busy Status
Turns on when the Job Edit Start Request turns on and editing starts.
Returns to “OFF” when the Job Edit Start Request is turned off and editing is
completed.
6
Mark Check /2DC Read
Busy Status
Turns on when the marking verification function or 2DC reading is operating.
7
Window Monitoring Busy
Status
Turns on during the lens inspection. Also turns on during maintenance and
workflow lens inspections.This not only turns on when the operation is started
by Profinet and Ethernet/IP communications, but also when this operation is
started by another communication before or after marking.
0: Not Busy
1: Busy
Displays the communication priority status. Turns on when the laser marker
is connected to an external control device and in the no priority state.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
2-11
Cyclic communication
Address bit
2
Name
Status Information
Description
0
Trigger Lock Status
Displays whether the trigger lock input is on or off.
1
Operation Stop Status
Displays whether the processing operation stop input is on or off.
2
Laser Control Status
3
Date Hold Status
4
Internal Lighting Status
Displays whether the internal lighting control input is on or off.
5
Distance Laser Stop
Status
Displays whether the distance laser enable input is on or off.
8
Date Attach Status
9
Counter End1 Status
10 Counter End2 Status
EtherNet/IP
11
Counter End3 Status
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: Not Complete
1: Complete
12 Counter End4 Status
0→1: OK
1→0 : Mark Check/2DC Read
OK Status 1
[Reset Timing]
Reset when 2DC Read Request
or 2DC Read Complete Bit Clear
turns on.
0→1: NG
1→0 : -
14
Mark Check/2DC Read
NG Status 1
15 Marking Complete 1
0
Mark Check/2DC Read
OK Status 2
[Reset timing]
Reset when 2DC Read Request
or 2DC Read Complete Bit Clear
turns on.
3
2
Mark Check/2DC Read
NG Status 2
3-Axis Tracking OK
Status
Displays the status of date attach output.
Linked I/O Terminal
Displays the status of counter end output 1 - 4. You can use the Controller
settings of the Marking Builder Plus to assign the individual and common
counters (0 to 9, A to J).
3-Axis Tracking NG
Status
Linked I/O Terminal
Marking/2D code check OK output
Displays whether the marking verification function or 2D code grade
assessment result is OK or not. 1
Displays the 2D code grade result by default, and the assessment result of
the marking verification function will be displayed in Mark Check/2DC Read
NG Status 2. Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the communication setting
screen.
Linked I/O Terminal
Marking/2D code check OK output
Displays the status of marking complete output.
0→1: OK
1→0 : -
Displays whether the marking verification function or 2D code grade
assessment result is OK or not.* 1
Displays the marking verification result by default, and the grade assessment
result of the 2D code will be displayed in Mark Check/2DC Read OK Status 1.
Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the communication setting screen.
[Reset Timing]
Reset when 2DC Read Request
or 2DC Read Complete Bit Clear
turns on.
[Reset Timing]
Reset when 2DC Read Request
or 2DC Read Complete Bit Clear
turns on.
Linked I/O Terminal
Linked I/O Terminal
Marking complete output
Marking/2D code check OK output
Displays whether the marking verification function or 2D code grade
assessment result is OK or not.* 1
Displays the marking verification result by default, and the grade assessment
result of the 2D code will be displayed in Mark Check/2DC Read NG Status 1.
Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the communication setting screen.
Linked I/O Terminal
Marking/2D code check NG output
0→1: OK
1→0 : -
Turns on for a fixed time when using the XY tracking/Z tracking function,
or when the tracking has been completed successfully. Turns on by AND
condition when using multiple tracking settings.
0→1: NG
1→0 : -
Turns on for a fixed time when using the XY tracking/Z tracking function, or
when the tracking has failed. Turns on by OR condition when using multiple
tracking settings.
Linked I/O Terminal
3-Axis Tracking OK Output
3-Axis Tracking NG Output
0
Marking Complete 2
Displays the completion status of marking initiated with Start Marking
Request. If marking has been canceled, it does not turn on.* 2
1
Guide Laser Complete
Displays the completion status of guide laser marking started with Guide
Laser Request. If completed, regardless of how it was canceled, be it
communications, I/O, or the like, it turns on.* 2
2
Laser Stop Complete
4
2-12
Counter end output 1 - 4
Displays whether the marking verification function or 2D code grade
assessment result is OK or not.* 1
Displays the 2D code grade result by default, and the assessment result of
the marking verification function will be displayed in Mark Check/2DC Read
OK Status 2. Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the communication setting
screen.
Linked I/O Terminal
3
Date attach output
0: Not Complete
1: Complete
0→1: OK
1→0 : 1
Displays whether the date hold input is on or off.
Linked I/O Terminal
2
13
Displays whether the laser stop input is on or off.
0: Not Complete
11: Complete
[Reset timing]
Reset when the Complete Clear
Bit statuses turn on or the next
Request turns on.
Displays the completion status of Stop Marking Request. Even if marking is
started from other communications or I/O, if cancellation is completed with
Stop Marking Request, the bit turns on.
Displays the completion status of Error Clear Request. After completion, it
turns on, regardless of whether error clearing was successful or not.* 2
3
Error Clear Complete
4
2DC Read Complete
5
Window Monitoring
Complete
Turns on when completing the lens inspection.* 2
8
Job Edit Complete
Displays the completion status of editing initiated with Job Edit Start Request.
If it completes successfully, the bit turns on.
Displays the completion status of 2DC Read Request.* 2
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Cyclic communication
Address bit
5
7
8
1
Rank Change Complete
Displays the completion status of Rank Change Request.* 2
2
Counter No Complete
Displays the completion status of Counter No Change Request.* 2
3
Counter Value Complete
Displays the completion status of Counter Value Change Request.* 2
4
Counter Up Complete
Displays the completion status of the value changed with Counter Up
Request.* 2
5
Counter Down Complete
Displays the completion status of the value changed with Counter Down
Request.* 2
6
Counter Reset Complete
8
System Info ID Change
Complete
0
Setting String Read
Complete
1
Marked String Read
Complete
0: Not Complete
11: Complete
[Reset timing]
Reset when the Complete Clear
Bit statuses turn on or the next
Request turns on.
Displays the completion status of the reset with Counter Reset Request.* 2
Displays the completion status of the operation information ID by System Info
ID Change Request.
Displays the completion status of Setting String Read Request.* 2
Displays the completion status of Marked String Read Request.* 2
2
String Change Complete
Displays the completion status of String Change Request.* 2
8
Command Send
Complete
Displays the completion status of Command Send Request.* 2
9
XY Tracking Result Read
Complete
Display the completion status of XY Tracking Result Request.* 2
10
Z Tracking Result Read
Complete
Display the completion status of Z Tracking Result Request.* 2
0
Start Marking Request
Error
If the marking operation started with Start Marking Request fails, the bit turns
on.
If marking is canceled or marking cannot start without priority, it turns on.* 3
1
Guide Laser Request
Error
If the guide laser operation started with Guide Laser Request fails, the bit
turns on. If Guide Laser Request is turned on when the guide laser cannot be
irradiated or cannot be started without priority, it turns on.* 3
2
Stop Marking Request
Error
If a Stop Marking Request fails to stop marking, the bit turns on.
*3
3
Error Clear Request Error
If an Error Clear Request fails to clear the error, it turns on.* 3
4
2DC Read Request Error
If a 2DC Read Request fails to read a 2D code, the bit turns on.
5
Window Monitoring
Request Error
If a Window Monitoring Request fails in the lens inspection operation, it turns
on.* 3
8
Job Edit Error
0
Job Change Request
Error
1
Rank Change Request
Error
2
Counter No Change
Request Error
If a number change with a Counter No Change Request fails, the bit turns on.
*3
3
Counter Value Change
Request Error
If a value change with a Counter Value Change Request fails, the bit turns
on.
*3
4
Counter Up Request
Error
If a value change with a Counter Up Request fails, it turns on.* 3
Receivable condition: Ready ON
5
Counter Down Request
Error
If a value change with a Counter Down Request fails, it turns on.* 3
Receivable condition: Ready ON
6
Counter Reset Request
Error
If a reset with a Counter Reset Request fails, it turns on.* 3
Receivable condition: Ready ON
8
System Info IDChange
Error
If a change of the operation information ID with a System Info ID Change
Request fails, it turns on.* 3
0
Setting String Read
Request Error
0: Not Complete
1: Complete
If reading with a Setting String Read Request fails, it turns on.* 3
1
Marked String Read
Request Error
If reading with a Marked String Read Request fails, the bit turns on.
*3
2
String Change Request
Error
[Reset timing]
Reset when the Complete Bit
Clear statuses turn on or the next
Request turns on.
0: Not Error
1: Error
[Reset timing]
Reset when the Complete Bit
Clear statuses turn on or the next
Request turns on.
Command Send Request 0: Not Complete
Error
1: Complete
XY Tracking Result
[Reset timing]
9
Request Error
Reset when the Complete Bit
Clear statuses turn on or the next
Z Tracking Result
10
Request turns on.
Request Error
8
11
Description
Displays the completion status of Job Change Request.* 2
9
10
Status Information
Job Change Complete
If a Job Edit Start Request fails to edit the job, it turns on.* If edit start is not
received or if data cannot be deployed when editing finishes, the bit turns on.
If a job change with a Job Change Request fails, it turns on.* 3
If an I/O specified character change with a Rank Change Request fails, it
turns on.* 3
If a change with a String Change Request fails, the bit turns on.
It will also fail if the data length exceeds 250 bytes.* 3
If Command Send Request fails, the bit turns on.
It will also fail if the data length exceeds 250 bytes.* 3
When XY Tracking Result Request fails, it turns on.* 2
When Z Tracking Result Request fails, it turns on.* 2
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
2
EtherNet/IP
6
Name
0
2-13
Cyclic communication
* 1 If a code is read with the settable 2D code reading function on Marking Builder Plus, OK/NG is output with the grade that is set as the
threshold as the reference. If code is read with 2DC Read Request, OK/NG is output for whether the code was successfully read or not. (Even
if the code reads with a F Grade, OK is output.)
* 2 The bit turns at completion only if the operation is started by Profinet and Ethernet/IP communications. If you start the operation with other
forms of communication or I/O, the bit will not turn on, even if the operation completes.
* 3 The bit turns on at error only if the operation is started by Profinet and Ethernet/IP communications. If you started the operation with other
forms of communication or I/O, the bit will not turn on, even if an error occurs.
Remote interlock input, shutter interlock input, and laser excitement input cannot be controlled from Ethernet/IP. Control those inputs from I/O.
„ Word area for writing laser marker state on the PLC
2
Address
Data Type
12
Word
Error Code 1
EtherNet/IP
In the following areas, the information is divided by word. The information is shown with 2-byte unsigned integer (0 to 65535).
The laser marker information is written in the PLC word area via cyclic communication. An area without a description is reserved.
13
Word
Error Code 2
Name
Status Information
Error Number
Description
Displays the number for the error currently occurring. The error
number display differs to the normal display.
The error codes are displayed as four digits such as 1*** for an
error (E***), 2*** for a warning error (W***), and 3*** for an I/O
error (T***).
Up to two errors can be displayed. When three or more errors
occur, confirm the errors through Marking Builder Plus.
Error Number
14
Word
Command Send Error
Status
16
Word
Job No Status
[Reset timing]
Command Send Request
Reset when Complete Bit Clear
turns on or the next Command
Send Request turns on.
If Command Send Request fails due to a software error, the
error number is displayed. The error number display differs to
the normal display. A software error (S***) is displayed as 4*** in
four digits.
Job Number (0 to 1999)
Displays the currently selected job number.
17
Word
Counter No Status
Counter Number (0 to 19)
• Counter Value Change/Up/Down/Reset Request that is to be
changed
• Counter Value Status that is to be displayed
Displays the number of the target counter listed above.
Changes with Counter No Change Request.
Individual Counter(0 to 9): 0 to 9
Common Counter(A to J):10 to 19
18/19
DWord
Counter Value Status
Counter Value
(0 to 4294967295)
Displays the current counter value set to be displayed for
Counter No Change Request.
20
Word
Rank Value Status
I/O Encoded Character Value
(0 to 35)
Displays the value for I/O specified characters.
21
Word
System Info ID
System Info ID (0 to 301)
Displays the currently selected operation information ID.
System Info Value
System Info Value
(0 to 4294967295)
Displays the operation information specified by System Info ID.
22/23
DWord
[When acquiring 2DC reading]
0 to 4
24
25
Word
Word
[When using the marking
verification function]
Marking Check Score/
000 to 100
2DC Read Grade Status 1
[Reset timing]
Reset when 2DC Read Complete
Bit Clear turns on or the next 2DC
Read Request turns on.
Marking Check/
2DC Read Total Count
Status 1
0 to 65535
[Reset timing]
It will be reset to “0” when the
power is turned off.
[When using the marking
verification function]
000 to 100
26
2-14
Word
[When acquiring 2DC reading]
Marking Check Score/
0 to 4
2DC Read Grade Status 2
[Reset timing]
Resets when 2DC Read Complete
Bit Clear turns on or the next 2DC
Read Request turns on.
Any of the following are displayed:
• 2D code reading (Defaults) :Read fail of AIM DPM
comprehensive determination
grade or F(0)/D(1)/C(2)/B(3)/A(4)
• Marking verification function : score
Displays the 2D code grade result by default, and the
assessment result of the marking verification function will be
displayed in Marking Check Score/2DC Read Grade Status 2.
Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the communication setting
screen of Marking Builder Plus.
When displaying the result of the 2D code reading grade,
even if you started the operation with communications and I/O
other than 2DC Read Request, the result is displayed after the
operation is completed.
Displays the execution count of the 2D code reading or the
execution count of the marking verification functions. Displays
the execution count of the 2D code reading by default, and the
execution count of the marking verification functions will be
displayed in Marking Check/2DC Read Total Count Status 2.
Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the communication setting
screen of Marking Builder Plus.
Any of the following are displayed:
• Marking verification function (defaults) : score
• 2D code reading :Read fail of AIM DPM comprehensive
determination grade or
F(0)/D(1)/C(2)/B(3)/A(4)
Displays the marking verification result by default, and the grade
result of the 2D code reading will be displayed in Marking Check
Score/2DC Read Grade Status 2. Status 1 and 2 can be reversed
in the communication setting screen of Marking Builder Plus.
When displaying the result of the 2D code reading grade,
even if you started the operation with communications and I/O
other than 2DC Read Request, the result is displayed after the
operation is completed.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Cyclic communication
Address
Data Type
Name
Status Information
0 to 65535
27
Word
Marking Check/
2DC Read Total Count
Status 2
28/29
DWord
Total Marking Count
Status
Marking Count
(0 to 4294967295)
30
Word
Response Data Size
Data size (2 bytes)
[Reset timing]
It will be reset to “0” when the
power is turned off.
Response
Character
Response Data
[Reset timing]
Reset when each Complete Bit
Clear request turns on or the next
Request turns on.
Displays the marking count.
Stores the data length of “Response Data” in 16-bit binary data.
The following response data are displayed:
• Setting/Marked String Request
• 2DC Read Request (read content)
• Command Send Request
• XY Tracking Result Request
• Z Tracking Result Request
• Window Monitoring Request
* Selectable capacities are from 32, 64, 128, and 252 bytes on
the PLC settings. (Default: 128 bytes. Fixed at 250 bytes in the
KEYENCE PLC “KV Series”.) However, if the response data
is greater than the selected byte number, all the data cannot
be received. Additionally, even if 252 bytes is selected, the
maximum amount of data that will be received is 250 bytes.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
2-15
2
EtherNet/IP
31 to 155
Description
Displays the execution count of the marking verification function
or the execution count of the 2D code reading. Displays the
execution count of the marking verification function by default,
and the execution count of the 2D code reading in Marking
Check/2DC Read Total Count Status 1.
Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the communication setting
screen of Marking Builder Plus.
Cyclic communication
Output Assemblies Memory Map
PLC -> Laser Marker
Address
2
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
0
Job Edit
Start
Request
1
System Info
ID Change
Request
2
String
Change
Request
Marked
Set String
String Read
Read
Request
Request
3
Z Tracking
Result
Request
XY Tracking Command
Result
Send
Request
Request
Bit7
EtherNet/IP
4
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Error
Clear
Request
Stop
Marking
Request
Guide
Laser
Request
Start
Marking
Request
Counter
Down
Request
Counter
Counter
Counter
Up
Value Change No Change
Request
Request
Request
Rank
Change
Request
Job
Change
Request
Distance Laser
Stop Request
Internal
Lighting
Request
Laser
Stop
Request
Operation
Stop
Request
Trigger
Lock
Request
Window
Monitoring
Complete
Bit Clear
2DC Read Error Clear Laser Stop
Complete Complete Complete
Bit Clear
Bit Clear
Bit Clear
Guide
Laser
Complete
Bit Clear
Marking
Complete
Bit Clear
Counter
Counter
Counter Reset Counter Down Counter Up
Value Change No Change
Complete Bit Complete Bit Complete
Complete Bit Complete
Clear
Clear
Bit Clear
Clear
Bit Clear
Rank
Change
Complete
Bit Clear
Job
Change
Complete
Bit Clear
Window
2DC Read
Monitoring
Request
Request
Counter
Reset
Request
Date Hold
Request
5
6
Job Edit
Complete
Bit Clear
7
System Info
ID Change
Complete
Clear
Set String
String
Marked
Read
Change String Read
Complete Complete Complete
Bit Clear
Bit Clear
Bit Clear
8
9
3-Axis
Command
Tracking
Send
Result Read
Complete
Complete Bit
Bit Clear
Clear
10/11
Request No
12
Request Data Size
13 - 137
Request Data
2-16
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Cyclic communication
„ Bit area for writing the request from the PLC onto the laser marker
In the following areas, information is divided by bit. The bit values are either 0 or 1.
The request from the PLC is written onto the laser marker via cyclic communication. An area without a description is reserved.
Address
bit
0
Name
Start Marking Request
Status Information
0→1: Start
1→0 : [Condition of operation]
The Ready Status is turned on.
Description
Starts the marking. If marking cannot be performed or is canceled, Start
Marking Request Error turns on. The Marking Busy Status turns on during
marking. If marking completes successfully, Marking Complete 1 and 2 turn on.
Starts guide laser marking. Enter the number into Request No. beforehand.
0→1: Start
1→0 : 1
Guide Laser Request
1: Guide laser once
2: Guide laser continuously
3: Area frame
4: Work image
5: Block frame
If marking completes or is canceled (including canceled due to an error)
after a set amount of time, the Guide Laser Request Complete bit turns on. If
guide laser marking cannot start, Guide Laser Request Error turns on.
If the move marking setting is selected, guide laser marking cannot be used.
The error bit turns on.
0→1: Stop
1→0 : 2
Stop Marking Request
0
3
Error Clear Request
4
2DC Read Request
5
Window Monitoring
Request
8
Job Edit Start Request
Cancels marking.
[Condition of operation]
The Marking Busy Status is turned
on.
0→1: Error Clear
1→0 : -
0→1: Start
1→0 : [Condition of operation]
The Ready Status is turned on.
0→1: Start
1→0 : [Condition of operation]
The Ready Status is turned on.
0→1: Edit Start
1→0: Edit End
If an error occurs, remove the cause of the error and then turn this bit on to
clear the error. An Error Status Bits error cannot be cleared (it is reset when
the Complete Bit Clear statuses turn on or the next Request turns on). After
the operation has been completed, Error Clear Complete turns on regardless
of whether the error is cleared successfully or not. If the error clearing
operation cannot be accepted, Error Clear Request Error turns ON.
Reads 2D code. The reading position is the current scanner coordinates.
Reading is performed with the coaxial camera in wide mode. The internal
lighting does not turn on automatically during reading. To use this lighting,
turn it on via communication or I/O before executing the 2DC Read Request.
If this request is run when the condition of operation is not satisfied, Mark
Check/2DC Read OK Status, Mark Check/2DC Read NG Status, and 2DC
Read Complete are reset, and 2DC Read Request Error turns on.
* It cannot be used on the MD-X400(A)/450(A) series.
Starts the lens inspection. The score is stored in Response Data. If this
request is run when the condition of operation is not satisfied, Window
Monitoring Complete is reset, and Window Monitoring Request Error is turned
on.
* It cannot be used on the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A) series.
Starts the job editing. If the start edit request is received successfully, the
job change request after that is retained temporarily in the controller, and the
job is deployed all at once when editing is completed. Use this request if you
want to reduce the communication time used by job editing. If edit start is
received successfully, Job Edit Busy Status turns on. Additionally, if edit start
is received successfully, Job Edit Complete turns on. 1
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
2-17
2
EtherNet/IP
[Condition of operation]
The Ready Status is turned on.
* During shutter control, laser
safety module control, and safety
shutter control, it is accepted even
if the Ready Status is turned off.
0: Distance pointer
Cyclic communication
Address
2
bit
Name
Status Information
Description
0
Job Change Request
Changes the job number. * 1
1
Rank Change Request
Changes the I/O specified characters. * 1
2
Counter No Change
Request
Changes the number of the counter to be changed. * 1
Individual Counter(0 to 9): 0 to 9
Common Counter(A to J):10 to 19
3
Counter Value Change
Request
Changes the value of the counter set to be displayed for Counter No Change
Request. * 1
4
Counter Up Request
Increases the value of the counter set to be displayed for Counter No Change
Request. * 1
5
Counter Down Request
Reduces the value of the counter set to be displayed for Counter No Change
Request. * 1
6
Counter Reset Request
EtherNet/IP
1
0→1: Request
1→0 : -
Resets the counter set to be displayed for Counter No Change Request. * 1
Changes the operation information ID. The operation information to the ID is
displayed to System Info Value.* 1
Operation ID
8
2
3
System Info ID Change
Request
8
Setting String Read
Request
9
Marked String Read
Request
Controller operating time
2
Laser excited time
3
Scanner operating time
101
Number of shutter operations
102
Number of times the laser safety module has
been operated
201
Head temperature
202
Controller temperature
301
Results of the laser power calibration
302
Final execution result of the lens inspection
Loads the settings.* 2
0→1: Request
1→0 : -
Loads the marked content.* 2
Sending the request before marking results in an error.
10 String Change Request
Changes the content to be marked in the current job. Store the block no.
in Request No., the string in Request Data, and the length of the string in
Request Data Size. The maximum data length is 250 bytes.
8
Command Send Request
Sends communication commands. Store the communication command
in Request Data and the length of the string in Request Data Size. The
maximum data length is 250 bytes. Store the response in Response Data.
9
XY Tracking Result
Request
10
Z Tracking Result
Request
Loads the result of the Z tracking. Enter the Z tracking No. into Request No.
Store the response in Response Data. Sending the request before marking
results in an error.
0
Trigger Lock Request
Disables the trigger input. If this bit turns on while marking, the trigger lock
status is activated after all of the mark data is marked. Test marking and
sample marking is immediately canceled when this bit turns on.
1
Operation Stop Request
Stops the laser radiation (the internal shutter remains open). Use this bit to
stop the laser radiation at the desired position while processing a workpiece.
2
Laser Stop Request
3
Date Hold Request
If the controller's internal clock passes midnight when this bit is turned on,
the date of updated string is subtracted one day and the subtracted date is
marked.
4
Internal Lighting Request
Turns on an internal lighting.
* It cannot be used on the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A) series.
5
Distance Laser Stop
Request
Stops the distance laser.
* It cannot be used on the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A) series.
4
2-18
Operation information
1
0→1: Request
1→0 : -
0: Input Off
1: Input On
Loads the result of the XY tracking. Enter the XY tracking No. into the
Request No. Store the response in Response Data. Sending the request
before marking results in an error.
Stops the marking laser and the guide laser. The internal shutter closes while
this bit is turned on.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Cyclic communication
Address
6
bit
Status Information
Description
0
Marking Complete Bit
Clear
Resets Marking Complete and Start Marking Request Error.
1
Guide Laser Complete
Bit Clear
Resets Guide Laser Complete and Guide Laser Request Error.
2
Laser Stop Complete Bit
Clear
Resets Laser Stop Complete and Stop Marking Request Error.
3
Error Clear Complete Bit
Clear
4
2DC Read Complete Bit
Clear
Resets 2DC Read Complete and 2DC Read Request Error.
Mark Check/2DC Read OK Status and Mark Check/2DC Read NG Status is
also cleared at the same time.
5
Window Monitoring
Complete Bit Clear
Resets Window Monitoring Complete.
8
Job Edit Complete Bit
Clear
Resets Job Edit Complete and Job Edit Error.
0
Job Change Complete Bit
Clear
Resets Job Change Complete and Job Change Request Error.
1
Rank Change Complete
Bit Clear
Resets Rank Change Complete and Rank Change Request Error.
2
Counter No Change
Complete Bit Clear
Resets Counter No Complete and Counter No Change Request Error.
3
Counter Value Change
Complete Bit Clear
4
Counter Up Complete Bit
Clear
5
Counter Down Complete
Bit Clear
Resets Counter Down Complete and Counter Down Request Error.
6
Counter Reset Complete
Bit Clear
Resets Counter Reset Complete and Counter Reset Request Error.
8
System Info ID Change
Complete Clear
Resets System Info ID Change Complete and System Info ID Change Error.
0
Setting String Read
Complete Bit Clear
Resets Setting String Read Complete and Setting String Read Request Error.
1
Marked String Read
Complete Bit Clear
2
String Change Complete
Bit Clear
8
Command Send
Complete Bit Clear
9
9
3-Axis Tracking Result
Read Complete Bit Clear
0→1: Complete Clear
1→0 : -
0→1: Complete Clear
1→0 : -
0→1: Complete Clear
1→0 : -
Resets Error Clear Complete and Error Clear Request Error.
Resets Counter Value Complete and Counter Value Change Error.
Resets Counter Up Complete and Counter Up Request Error.
Resets Marked String Read Complete and Marked String Read Request
Error.
Resets String Change Complete and String Change Request Error.
Resets Command Send Complete and Command Send Request Error.
0→1: Complete Clear
1→0 : -
Resets XY Tracking Result Read Complete, Z Tracking Result Read
Complete, 3-Axis Tracking OK Status, 3-Axis Tracking NG Status, XY
Tracking Result Request Error, and Z Tracking Result Request Error.
* 1 Turns on this bit after storing the job No., I/O specified character No., counter value, counter No., and operation information No. in the
applicable Request No.
* 2 If you turn on this bit after storing the block No. in Request No., the content will be loaded from the specified block in the current job. Store
the load result in Response Data.
Word area for writing a PLC request
In the following areas, the information is divided by word. The information is shown with 2-byte unsigned integer (0 to 65535).
The detailed information of the request from the PLC is written.
Address
Data Type
Name
Status Information
Description
10/11
DWord
Request No
Numbers (Four bytes)
Stores the job No., block No., counter value, and counter No. to be
changed.
12
Word
Request Data Size
Data size (Two bytes)
Stores the data length of “Request Data” in 16-bit binary data.
Request Data
Use for String Change Request and Command Send Request. Store
the change string and communication command data. Headers and
Command function
delimiters are not required.
(Default: 250 bytes)
* Selectable capacities are from 32, 64, 128, and 252 bytes on the
* Selectable from 32, 64, 128, and
PLC settings. (Default: 250 bytes.)
252 bytes on the PLC.
However, even if 252 bytes is selected, the maximum amount of
data that can be sent is 250 bytes.
13 to 137
Character
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
2
EtherNet/IP
7
8
Name
2-19
Cyclic communication
Command communications
Control via the command communication can also be made when using EtherNet/IP.
Since the communication mode is “command/response type”, multiple commands cannot be sent simultaneously. Therefore, make sure to send the
command only after a response has been received.
z Communication format
Header and delimiter settings are not required.
Store the send data size in “Request Data Size” and the send data in “Request Data” in the PLC command area. Then set the “Command Send Request”
bit to “1” to enable the stored data to be sent to the controller.
For further details of the communication command, refer to
“Chapter 1 Communication Interface” (Page 1-1) .
2
When “Request” bit does NOT work
EtherNet/IP
If a request is turned on but does not work, check the communications history.
You can check the history of commands sent and received between the PLC and laser marker in the Marking Builder Plus communications history.
z Confirmation method
Start Marking Builder Plus, and select the [Maintenance] tab > [Communication] > [Communication History].
The [Communication History] window appears. Click the [Update] button to display the latest history.
If the communication history is empty, the laser marker has not received any communication.
Double check the communication settings between the laser marker and the PLC, and make sure that the HUB and cable are not defective.
z Request format
Each request will be stored in the communication history in the following format:
Command: ***** Request
Response: ***** Request,X (X = 0: Success; X = 1: Fail)
However, the requests below have a different format. (X = 0: Success; X = 1: Fail)
Request
History format (“>” = command; “<” = response)
2DC Read Request
> 2DC_Read_Request,0
< 2DC_Read_Request,X,[Grade],[Content]
Job Edit Start Request
> Job_Edit_Start_Request,[Job No]
< Job_Edit_Start_Request,X
Job Change Request
> Job_Change_Request,[Job No]
< Job_Change_Request,X
Rank Change Request
> Rank_Change_Request,[I/O Character No]
< Rank_Change_Request,X
Counter No Change Request
> Counter_No_Change_Request,,[Counter No],1
< Counter_No_Change_Request,X,[Counter Current Value]
Counter Value Change Request
> Counter_Value_Change_Request,,[Counter No],[Counter Current Value]
< Counter_Value_Change_Request,X
System Info ID Change Request
> System_Info_ID_Change_Request,[System_Info_ID]
< System_Info_ID_Change_Request,X
Setting String Read Request
> Setting_String_Read_Request,BLK=[Block No],CharacterString
< Setting_String_Read_Request,[OK/NG],[Character String]
Marked String Read Request
> Marked_String_Read_Request,MarkedCharacter=[Job No],[Block No]
< Marked_String_Read_Request,[OK/NG],[Character String]
String Change Request
> String_Change_Request,,[Block No],[Character String]
< String_Change_Request,X
Window Monitoring Request
> Window_Monitoring_Request,WindowCheck
< Window_Monitoring_Request,[OK/NG], [Score]
XY_Tracking_Result_Request
> XY_Tracking_Result_Request,0
< XY_Tracking_Result_Request, [OK/NG], [X Coordinate Gap Amount], [Y Coordinate Gap Amount], [θ Gap Amount], [Correlation
Value], [Execution Time], [Result]
Z_Tracking_Result_Request
> Z_Tracking_Result_Request
< Z_Tracking_Result_Request, [OK/NG], [Z Coordinate Gap Amount], [X Rotation Angle], [Y Rotation Angle], [Stability], [Execution
Time], [Result]
Command Send Request
> [Stored data for Request Data]
< [Response]
An error may be the cause of the request not working. You can check up to two error codes simultaneously, Error Code 1 and Error Code 2.
Error details and resolutions are listed in the User's Manual for the applicable model.
2-20
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Ladder Program Example
Ladder Program Example
KEYENCE KV Series Program Example
This chapter introduces an example of a ladder program for controlling the laser marker using the KV series. The data memory numbers are described
based on the default values of KV-5500/7500. Modify the numbers as necessary according to your environment.
Changing the job No. and starting the marking (An example of bit control)
z Reference ladder
z Timing chart
2
Ready Status
EtherNet/IP
Request No
Job Change Request
Job Change Complete
Start Marking Request
Marking Complete 2
Marking Complete /
Job Change Complete Bit
Clear
z Sequence
(1) If Ready Status is ON at the rising edge of MR000,
transfer job No.”0” to Request No.
End the sequence if Ready Status is OFF.
(2) Execute Job Change Request after the completion of
sequence (1).
• “Ready Status” becomes OFF and the “Busy” bit
becomes ON while the job No. switching is in progress.
• If the job No. switching fails, “Job Change Request
Error” will become ON.
• “Job Change Complete” retains its ON status until “Job
Change Complete Clear” becomes ON or until “Job
Change Request” becomes ON again.
• “Marking Complete” retains its ON status until “Marking
Complete Bit Clear” becomes ON or until “Marking
Request” becomes ON again.
• The request bit should be ON for longer than the cyclic
communication time interval (RPI).
A switch is made to job No.0.
(3) When Job Change Complete becomes ON, Start
Marking Request is set to ON.
The marking process starts.
(4) When Marking Complete2 becomes ON, Job Change
Complete Bit Clear and Marking Complete Bit Clear are
set to ON.
The completion flag is cleared.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
2-21
Ladder Program Example
Changing the string (An example of bit control)
z Reference ladder
z Timing chart
Ready Status
Request Data No
Request Data Size
2
Request Data
String Change Request
EtherNet/IP
String Change Complete
String Change Complete Bit
Clear
z Sequence
(1) Perform the following at the rising edge of MR001:
• “Ready” becomes OFF and “Busy” becomes ON while a
string is being changed.
• If changing the string fails, the [String Change Request
Error] will turn on.
• “String Change Complete” will not become OFF until
“String Change Complete Bit Clear” becomes ON or until
“String Change Request” becomes ON again.
• The request bit should be ON for longer than the cyclic
communication time interval (RPI).
• Transfer the block No. “0” to Request No.
• Transfer “8” to Request Data size
• Transfer “MD-X2000” to Request Data
The character string data needs to arrange the order
(endian) according to the CIP rules. By the RCPSASC
command of KVSeries convert the character string
stored in “DM100” into the CIP character string type
data, and store the converted data in “W092(Request
Data Size)”*, and store the converted data size in
“DM200”.
* The character string data length is stored in
“W092(Request Data Size)” and “W093(Request
Data (0))”.
If Ready Status is ON, perform String Change Request.
The command for changing the string of block No.0 to “MD-X2000”
will be sent.
(2) When String Change Complete becomes ON, String
Change Complete Bit Clear is set to ON.
The completion flag is cleared.
2-22
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Ladder Program Example
Sending a command (An example of command communication)
z Reference ladder
z Timing chart
Ready Status
Request Data Size
Request Data
2
Command Send Request
Command Send Complete
EtherNet/IP
Response Data Size
Response Data
z Sequence
(1) Perform the following at the rising edge of MR002:
• Transfer the number of sent bytes “30” to Request Data Size
• Transfer “WX,BLK=000,CharacterString=ABC” to Request Data
• For further details of the communication command,
refer to
“Chapter 1 Communication Interface”
(Page 1-1).
• The send data needs to arrange the order (endian)
according to the CIP rules. By the RCPSASC
command of KV Series, convert the character string
(“WX,BLK=000,CharacterString=ABC”) stored in
“DM1000” into the CIP character string type data,
and store the converted data in “W092(Request
Data Size)”*, and store the data size after being
converted into “DM2000”.
* The character string data length is stored in
“W092(Request Data Size)” and “W093(Request
Data (0))”.
• “Ready” becomes OFF and “Busy” becomes ON while
a string is being changed via sending communication
commands.
• “Command Send Request Error” turns ON when the
command sending fails.
• “Command Send Complete” will not become OFF until
“Command Send Complete Bit Clear” becomes ON or
until “Command Send Request” becomes ON again.
• The response to “Command Send Request” stores the
data length in “Response Data Size” and data content in
“Response Data”.
• The request bit should be ON for longer than the cyclic
communication time interval (RPI).
If Ready Status is ON at the rising edge of MR002, perform
Command Send Request, and the command to change the
character string of block No. 0 to “ABC” will be sent.
(2) When Command Send Complete becomes ON, store
Response Data in the data memory “DM3000”.
Once the command communication ends, the received
data will be stored in “W012 (Response Data Size)” and
“W013 (Response Data)”.
The received data likewise needs to arrange the order
(endian). By using the CPSASC command of KV Series
convert the “W012 (Response Data Size)” and “W013
(Response Data)” into the converted data in DM3000.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
2-23
Ladder Program Example
OMRON PLC CJ2 Series Program Example
This chapter introduces an example of a ladder program for controlling the laser marker using the CJ2 series. The data memory numbers are described
based on the default values of CJ2 series. Modify the numbers as necessary according to your environment.
Changing the job No. and starting the marking (An example of bit control)
z Reference ladder
z Timing chart
Ready Status
2
Request No
EtherNet/IP
Job Change Request
Job Change Complete
Start Marking Request
Marking Complete 2
Marking Complete /
Job Change Complete Bit
Clear
z Sequence
(1) If Ready Status is ON at the rising edge of 0.01,
transfer job No.”1” to Request No.
End the sequence if Ready Status is OFF.
(2) Execute Job Change Request after the completion of
sequence (1).
A switch is made to job No.1.
(3) Set Start Marking Request at the rising edge of 0.02 to
ON .
The marking process starts.
(4) Set Job Change Complete Bit Clear at the rising edge
of 0.03, and set Marking Complete Bit Clear at the
rising edge of 0.04 to ON.
• “Ready Status” becomes OFF and the “Busy” bit
becomes ON while the job No. switching is in progress.
• If the job No. switching fails, “Job Change Request
Error” will become ON.
• “Job Change Complete” retains its ON status until “Job
Change Complete Clear” becomes ON or until “Job
Change Request” becomes ON again.
• “Marking Complete” retains its ON status until “Marking
Complete Bit Clear” becomes ON or until “Marking
Request” becomes ON again.
• The request bit should be ON for longer than the cyclic
communication time interval (RPI).
The completion flag is cleared.
2-24
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Ladder Program Example
Changing the string (An example of bit control)
z Reference ladder
z Sequence
(1) Input “KEYENCE” in D2000 at the rising edge of 1.01.
(2) Detect the character string length of D2000 at the
rising edge of 1.02.
(3) Divide the detected character string length by 2 at the
rising edge of 1.03 (2), and detect the memory count
which is going to store the character data.
(4) Perform the following at the rising edge of 1.04:
• Transfer the character data “KEYENCE” to Request Data
• Byte swap the Request Data.
(5) Perform the following at the rising edge of 1.05:
• Store the block No. “0” to be changed to Request No.
• Store the character string length “7” to Request Data size
• Set String Change Request to ON.
z Timing chart
Ready Status
Request Data No
Request Data Size
Request Data
String Change Request
String Change Complete
String Change Complete Bit
Clear
• “Ready” becomes OFF and “Busy” becomes ON while a
string is being changed.
• If changing the string fails, the [String Change Request
Error] will turn on.
• “String Change Complete” will not become OFF until
“String Change Complete Bit Clear” becomes ON or until
“String Change Request” becomes ON again.
• The request bit should be ON for longer than the cyclic
communication time interval (RPI).
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
2-25
2
EtherNet/IP
The send data needs to arrange the order (endian)
according to the CIP rules. By the SWAP command of
CJ2 Series convert the character string (“KEYENCE”)
stored in “D3000” into the CIP character string type
data, and store the converted data in “D13 (Request
Data Size)”.
Ladder Program Example
Sending a command (An example of command communication)
z Reference ladder
z Sequence
(1) Input “WX,BLK=0,CharacterString=MD-X” in D3000 at the
rising edge of 2.01.
* In the reference ladder, part of it is omitted.
(2) Detect the character string length of D3000 at the rising
edge of 2.02.
(3) Divide the detected character string length by 2 at the
rising edge of 2.03 (2), and detect the memory count which
is going to store the character data.
2
(4) Perform the following at the rising edge of 2.04:
EtherNet/IP
• Transfer the character data “WX,BLK=0,CharacterString=MD-X” to
Request Data
• Byte swap the Request Data.
• For details on commands, refer to “Communication
Interface Manual”.
• The send data needs to arrange the order
(endian) according to the CIP rules. By the SWAP
command of CJ2 Series convert the character string
(“WX,BLK=0,CharacterString=MD-X”) stored in “D3000”
into the CIP character string type data, and store the
converted data in “D13 (Request Data Size)”.
(5) Perform the following at the rising edge of 2.05:
• Store the character string length “29” to Request Data size
• Set the Bit of Command Send Request to ON.
z Timing chart
Ready Status
Request Data Size
Request Data
Command Send Request
Command Send Complete
Command Send Complete
Bit Clear
• “Ready” becomes OFF and “Busy” becomes ON while
a string is being changed via sending communication
commands.
• “Command Send Request Error” turns ON when the
command sending fails.
• “Command Send Complete” will not become OFF until
“Command Send Complete Bit Clear” becomes ON or
until “Command Send Request” becomes ON again.
• The response to “Command Send Request” stores the
data length in “Response Data Size” and data content in
“Response Data”.
• The request bit should be ON for longer than the cyclic
communication time interval (RPI).
2-26
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Ladder Program Example
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Ladder Program Example
This chapter introduces an example of an RSLogix5000 ladder program for controlling the laser marker using an Allen-Bradley Compact/Control Logix
PLC.
Changing the job No. and starting the
marking (An example of bit control)
Changing the string (An example of bit
control)
z Reference ladder
z Reference ladder
2
EtherNet/IP
z Sequence
(1) Turn ON ChangeJob.
If Job Change Complete is OFF and Ready Status is ON, “1” is
stored in Request No.
(2) Execute Job Change Request after the completion of
(1).
A switch is made to job No.1.
(3) If Job Change Complete becomes ON, Start Marking
Request are set to ON.
The marking process starts.
(4) When Marking Complete2 turns ON, the Job Change
Complete Bit Clear and Marking Complete Bit Clear are
turned ON.
z Timing chart
Ready Status
z Sequence
(1) If String Change Complete is OFF and Ready Status
is ON when ChangeString turns ON, the following
occurs:
• The length of the new string “5” is moved to Request Data Size
• The Block Number “0” is moved to Request No
• The new string “ABCDE” is moved to Request Data (Addresses
13 to 17)
• String Change Request turns ON
(2) When String Change Complete turns ON, the String
Change Complete Bit Clear turns ON.
Request No
z Timing chart
Job Change Request
Ready Status
Job Change Complete
Request No
Start Marking Request
Request Data Size
Marking Complete 2
Request Data
Marking Complete /Job
Change Complete Bit Clear
String Change Request
• “Ready Status” becomes OFF and the “Busy” bit
becomes ON while the job No. switching is in progress.
• If the job No. switching fails, “Job Change Request
Error” will become ON.
• “Job Change Complete” retains its ON status until “Job
Change Complete Clear” becomes ON or until “Job
Change Request” becomes ON again.
Marking Complete2 remains ON until Marking Complete
Bit Clear turns ON or until Marking Request turns ON
again.
• The request bit should be ON for longer than the cyclic
communication time interval (RPI).
String Change Complete
String Change Complete Bit
Clear
• “Ready” becomes OFF and “Busy” becomes ON while a
string is being changed.
• If changing the string fails, the [String Change Request
Error] will turn on.
• “String Change Complete” will not become OFF until
“String Change Complete Bit Clear” becomes ON or until
“String Change Request” becomes ON again.
• The request bit should be ON for longer than the cyclic
communication time interval (RPI).
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
2-27
Ladder Program Example
Sending a command (An example of
command communication)
z Reference ladder
2
EtherNet/IP
z Sequence
(1) If Command Send Complete is OFF and Ready Status
is ON when SendCommand turns ON, the following
occurs:
• The length of the command string “29” is moved to Request Data
Size
• The command string “WX,BLK=0,CharacterString=MD-X” is
moved to Request Data (Addresses 13 to 41)
• Command Send Request turns ON
(2) When Command Send Complete turns ON, the
following occurs:
• The Response Data Size “5” is moved to CommandResponse.
LEN
• The Response Data “WX,OK” is moved to CommandResponse.
DATA (Addresses 0 to 4)
• Command Send Complete Bit Clear turns ON.
z Timing chart
Ready Status
Request Data Size
Request Data
Command Send Request
Command Send Request
Complete
Command Send Request
Complete Bit Clear
• “Ready” becomes OFF and “Busy” becomes ON while
a string is being changed via sending communication
commands.
• “Command Send Request Error” turns ON when the
command sending fails.
• “Command Send Complete” will not turn OFF until
“Command Send Complete Bit Clear” turns ON or until
“Command SendRequest” turns ON again.
• The response to “Command Send Request” stores the
data length in “Response Data Size” and data content in
“Response Data”.
• The request bit should be ON for longer than the cyclic
communication time interval (RPI).
2-28
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
3
PROFINET
3
Outline of the control by PROFINET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Devices compatible with PROFINET communication. . . 3-2
Communication Specification of the Controller. . . 3-3
Basic specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Status of device assignment of the MD information
area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Command communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Other controller specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
When “Request” bit does NOT work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Setup Procedure of PROFINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Connection Procedure for PROFINET. . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Setup of PROFINET Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Controlling the Laser Marker Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Execute Ladder Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Download the created ladder program on the PLC. . . . 3-22
Confirm/monitor the state of laser marker. . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
3-1
PROFINET
Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Getting Started
Getting Started
Outline of the control by PROFINET
The MD-X2000/2500 series supports communication with PROFINET. PROFINET is an open communication standard defined by the PROFIBUS
& PROFINET International, which allows any compatible devices to communicate regardless of their manufactures. This system complies with the
Conformance Class A.
Operation Flow
Confirm the Specification
“Communication Specification of the Controller” (Page 3-3)
• Check if PROFINET supports the PLC to be connected.
• Check the device map of the input/output data.
3
PROFINET
Changing the PROFINET Setup Procedure
“Setup Procedure of PROFINET” (Page 3-13)
Set this product for connection with PROFINET.
Major setting items: IP address of this product and PROFINET device name
Establishing PROFINET communication
“Setup of PROFINET Communication” (Page 3-14)
• To register the laser marker information on the PLC, use the GSDML file that the laser marker model uses.
• After the PROFINET connection has been successfully established, the LINK LED (green) of the Ethernet port of the controller starts
blinking.
Performing the necessary processing
“Controlling the Laser Marker Controller” (Page 3-19)
Data I/O
• The laser marker information will be assigned to the PLC device and the status of the laser marker will be written to the MD information
area (Page 3-4) on the PLC.
• The laser marker information will be assigned to the PLC device and the laser marker controller is controlled by writing data to the MD
instruction area (Page 3-9) on the PLC.
Command control (Page 10)
The communication commands can be executed and several settings such as the marking parameter can be edited.
“Command communications” (Page 3-11)
Devices compatible with PROFINET communication
For details of the PLC setup, refer to
“Connection Procedure for PROFINET” (Page 3-14) and the instruction manuals provided with the PLC.
z PLCs from Siemens
3-2
PLC
model
PROFINET Communication
units
Firmware versions
Software to be used
Versions of software to be used
S7-300
Built-in
V2.6 of later
STEP 7
V5.5.0.0 SP 2 or later
S7-400
Built-in
V5.3 of later
STEP 7
V5.5.0.0 SP 2 or later
S7-1200
Built-in
V2.0 of later
STEP 7 Basic
Version V13 SP1
S7-1500
Built-in
V2.0 of later
STEP7 Professional
Version V13 or later
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Communication Specification of the Controller
Communication Specification of the Controller
Basic specification
PROFINET communication of this system supports “periodic communication.”
When performing periodic communication using PROFINET, the laser marker functions are assigned to the PLC device. Use the functions assigned to
each device depending on the purpose. Either a straight or crossover LAN cable can be used.
Periodic communication
The periodic communication performs communication periodically (at an interval of few msec. to several dozens of msec.), which is suitable for real-time
control. The update time and communication size depend on the connection settings on the PLC side.
For details, refer to
“Connection Procedure for PROFINET” (Page 3-14).
3
PROFINET
PLC
MD-X2000/2500 series
MD information area
MD information area
Controller
information
Controller status
Error status
Error status
Busy status
Reading result
Busy status
Communication
cycle
Reading result
Configured
on the PLC side
PLC specified area
PLC specified area
Marking instruction
Marking instruction
Reading instruction
Reading instruction
Command
instruction
Command
instruction
• Read the “Safety Information” in the user's manual for the applicable model to perform operation in the state that the safety
is secured by using security function even when the network failure occurs.
• Confirm the safe operation by considering the communication delay due to the communication time or network overload
state.
• Set the communication interval to 8 msec. or longer.
• The processing may be delayed or the communication may be disconnected by temporary timeout due to the excessive
temporary or continuous load, caused by simultaneous communication functions. In this case, the periodic communication
settings and use condition need to be reviewed. Be sure to check problems in the operating performance before entering
production.
• Networks having many connected devices including a PROFINET device could cause delay and packet loss when the networks
are largely overloaded routinely/temporally. Validate the system thoroughly before operation.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
3-3
Communication Specification of the Controller
Status of device assignment of the MD information area
In the device, there is an area for “writing laser marker state to the PLC” and an area for “writing instructions from the PLC to the laser marker”. It is
divided into “bit area” and “word area”.
Bit area for writing laser marker state on the PLC
In the following areas, information is divided by bit. The bit values are either 0 or 1.
The laser marker information is written in the PLC bit area via cyclic communication. An area without a description is reserved.
Slot Size
Module
Address
bit
0
Name
Ready Status
Status Information
0: Not Ready
1: Ready
Description
Displays the ready status. When the device status is Ready, operations
such as start marking, job change, and character string change are
accepted
Linked I/O Terminal
3
1
PROFINET
0
0
4
Machine
Status
1
Error Status
0: Not Error
1: Error
2
Warning Status
0: Not Warning
1: Warning
3
I/O Error Status
0: Not I/O Error
1: I/O Error
4
Shutter Status
0: Open Shutter
1: Close Shutter
5
Network Status
0: No Connection
1: Connection
6
Job Change Ready Status
0: Not Ready
1: Ready
Linked I/O Terminal
Linked I/O Terminal
Warning output
Displays the terminal block error (T***) status.
Displays whether the internal shutter is opened or closed.
Linked I/O Terminal
Shutter status output
Displays the Fieldbus network communication status.
Displays the job switching ready status.
Linked I/O Terminal
Job switching ready status
Displays the Ready state of the distance laser.
Distance Laser Ready
Status
0: Not Ready
1: Ready
0
Laser Emitted Status
0: Laser Not Excited
1: Laser Excited
1
Shutter Control Status
0: OFF (Close)
1: ON (Open)
Displays whether the shutter control input is on or off.
2
Remote Interlock Status
0: OFF (Close)
1: ON (Open)
Displays whether the remote interlock input is on or off.
3
Laser Safety Module
Status
0: OFF (Close)
1: ON (Open)
Displays whether the laser safety module control input is on or off.
Displays the status where the laser emission stops when it is “1 (ON)”.
When the laser safety module (MD-C1) is not mounted, it is always “0”.
4
Logging Trigger Status
0: OFF
1: ON
Displays whether the logging trigger input is on or off.
0: OFF
1: ON
Displays whether the external lighting control output is on or off.
External Lighting Control
Status
0
Busy Status
1
Marking Busy Status
2
Guide Laser Busy Status
Linked I/O Terminal
Distance laser operation ready
output
Displays the laser excitation status.
Linked I/O Terminal
Linked I/O Terminal
Linked I/O Terminal
Laser excitation status output
Logging trigger input
External Lighting Control Output
If one or more of the following busy statuses are on, Busy Status turns
on.
Marking Busy, Guide Laser Busy, Job Change Busy,
Commmunication Priority, Job Edit Busy,
Mark Cheeck/2DC Read Busy Status,
Window Monitoring Busy
Turns on during marking (including laser inspection).
Linked I/O Terminal
Output During Marking
Turns on when guide laser marking is in operation (including the
distance pointer).
Linked I/O Terminal
3-4
Error output
Displays the warning error (W***) status.
7
5
2
Trigger ready output
Displays the error (E***) status. To recover from an error, eliminate the
causes of the error first, and then turn on Error Clear.
0: Not Busy
1: Busy
Guide Laser Output
Turns on when a job is being deployed.
(Deployment timing: when changing marking jobs, content, and so on)
3
Job Change Busy Status
4
Communication Priority
Error Status
Displays the communication priority status. Turns on when the laser
marker is connected to an external control device and in the no priority
state.
5
Job Edit Busy Status
Turns on when the Job Edit Start Request turns on and editing starts.
Returns to “OFF” when the Job Edit Start Request is turned off and
editing is completed.
6
Mark Check /2DC Read
Busy Status
Turns on when the marking verification function or 2DC reading is
operating.
7
Window Monitoring Busy
Status
Turns on during the lens inspection. This not only turns on when the
operation is started by Profinet and Ethernet/IP communications, but
also when this operation is started by another communication and
before or after marking.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Communication Specification of the Controller
Slot Size
Module
Address
0
bit
Name
Status Information
Trigger Lock Status
Displays whether the trigger lock input is on or off.
Displays whether the processing operation stop input is on or off.
1
Operation Stop Status
2
Laser Control Status
0: OFF
1: ON
3
Date Hold Status
Internal Lighting Status
Displays whether the internal lighting control input is on or off.
5
Distance Laser Stop Status
Displays whether the distance laser stop input is on or off.
0
Date Attach Status
1
Counter End1 Status
2
Counter End2 Status
3
Counter End3 Status
4
Counter End4 Status
0: OFF
1: ON
0: Not Complete
1: Complete
Mark Check/2DC Read OK
Status1
4
7
Mark Check/2DC Read NG
Status1
Marking Complete 1
[Reset timing]
Reset when 2DC Read
Request or 2DC Read
Complete Bit Clear turns on.
[Reset timing]
Reset when 2DC Read
Request or 2DC Read
Complete Bit Clear turns on.
0: Not Complete
1: Complete
0→1: OK
1→0: -
0
Mark Check/2DC Read OK
Status 2
[Reset timing]
Reset when 2DC Read
Request or 2DC Read
Complete Bit Clear turns on.
0→1: NG
1→0: 1
2
2
Mark Check/2DC Read NG
Status 2
3-Axis Tracking OK Status
Displays the status of date attach output.
Linked I/O Terminal
[Reset timing]
Reset when 2DC Read
Request or 2DC Read
Complete Bit Clear turns on.
0→1: OK
1→0: -
3-Axis Tracking NG Status
0→1: NG
1→0: -
Counter end output 1 - 4
Displays whether the marking verification function or 2D code grade
assessment result is OK or not.* 1
Displays the 2D code grade result by default, and the assessment
result of the marking verification function will be displayed in Mark
Check/2DC Read OK Status 2. Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the
communication setting screen.
Linked I/O Terminal
Marking/2D code check OK output
Displays whether the marking verification function or 2D code grade
assessment result is OK or not.* 1
Displays the 2D code grade result by default, and the assessment
result of the marking verification function will be displayed in Mark
Check/2DC Read OK Status 2. Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the
communication setting screen.
Linked I/O Terminal
Marking/2D code check NG
output
Displays the status of marking complete output.
Linked I/O Terminal
Marking complete output
Displays whether the marking verification function or 2D code grade
assessment result is OK or not.* 1
Displays the marking verification result by default, and the grade
assessment result of the 2D code will be displayed in Mark
Check/2DC Read OK Status 1. Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the
communication setting screen.
Linked I/O Terminal
Marking/2D code check OK output
Displays whether the marking verification function or 2D code grade
assessment result is OK or not.* 1
Displays the marking verification result by default, and the grade
assessment result of the 2D code will be displayed in Mark
Check/2DC Read NG Status 1. Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the
communication setting screen.
Linked I/O Terminal
Marking/2D code check NG
output
Turns on for a fixed time when using the XY tracking/Z tracking
function, or when succeeding the tracking. Turns on by AND condition
when using multiple tracking settings.
Linked I/O Terminal
3
Date attach output
Displays the status of counter end output 1 - 4. You can use the
Controller settings of the Marking Builder Plus to assign the individual
and common counters (0 to 9, A to J).
Linked I/O Terminal
0→1: NG
1→0: 6
Displays whether the date hold input is on or off.
3-Axis Tracking OK Output
Turns on for a fixed time when using the XY tracking/Z tracking
function, or when failing the tracking. Turns on by AND condition when
using multiple tracking settings.
Linked I/O Terminal
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
3-Axis Tracking NG Output
3-5
3
PROFINET
5
1
1
Displays whether the laser stop input is on or off.
4
0→1: OK
1→0: -
Function
Status
Description
0
Communication Specification of the Controller
Slot Size
Module
Address
bit
Name
Status Information
0
Marking Complete 2
1
Guide Laser Complete
Displays the completion status of guide laser marking started with
Guide Laser Request. If completed, regardless of how it was canceled,
be it communications, I/O, or the like, it turns on.* 2
0: Not Complete
1: Complete
2
8
Completion
Status
3
0
1
PROFINET
2
8
Completion
Status
3
4
7
3-6
Displays the completion status of Stop Marking Request. Even if
marking is started from other communications or I/O, if cancellation is
completed with Stop Marking Request, the bit turns on.
2
Laser Stop Complete
3
Error Clear Complete
4
2DC Read Complete
Displays the completion status of 2DC Read Request.* 2
5
Window Monitoring
Complete
* Turns on when completing the lens inspection.* 2
0
Job Edit Complete
Displays the completion status of editing started with Job Edit Start
Request. If it completes successfully, the bit turns on.
0
Job Change Complete
Displays the completion status of Job Change Request.* 2
1
Rank Change Complete
Displays the completion status of Rank Change Request.* 2
2
Counter No Complete
Displays the completion status of Counter No Change Request.* 2
3
Counter Value Complete
Displays the completion status of Counter Value Change Request.* 2
4
Counter Up Complete
Displays the completion status of the value changed with Counter Up
Request.* 2
5
Counter Down Complete
Displays the completion status of the value changed with Counter
Down Request.
*2
[Reset timing]
Reset when the Complete
Clear Bit statuses turn on or
the next Request turns on.
0: Not Complete
1: Complete
2
Description
Displays the completion status of marking started with Start Marking
Request.
If marking has been canceled, it does not turn on.* 2
Displays the completion status of Error Clear Request. After
completion, it turns on, regardless of whether error clearing was
successful or not.* 2
Displays the completion status of the reset with Counter Reset
Request.
*2
6
Counter Reset Complete
0
System Info ID Change
Complete
0
Setting String Read
Complete
Displays the completion status of Setting String Read Request.
*2
1
Marked String Read
Complete
Displays the completion status of Marked String Read Request.
*2
2
String Change Complete
Displays the completion status of String Change Request.* 2
0
Command Send Complete
Displays the completion status of Command Send Request.* 2
1
XY Tracking Result Read
Complete
Display the completion status of XY Tracking Result Request.* 2
2
Z Tracking Result Read
Complete
Display the completion status of Z Tracking Result Request.* 2
[Reset timing]
Reset when the Complete
Clear Bit statuses turn on or
the next Request turns on.
Displays the changing completion of the operation information ID by
System Info ID Change Request.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Communication Specification of the Controller
Slot Size
Module
Address
0
bit
Name
Status Information
Description
If the marking operation started with Start Marking Request fails, the bit
turns on.
If marking is canceled or marking cannot start without priority, it turns
on.* 3
0
Start Marking Request
Error
1
Guide Laser Request Error
0: Not Error
1: Error
If the guide laser operation started with Guide Laser Request fails, the
bit turns on. If Guide Laser Request is turned on when the guide laser
cannot be irradiated or cannot be started without priority, it turns on.* 3
2
Stop Marking Request
Error
If a Stop Marking Request fails to stop marking, the bit turns on.* 3
3
Error Clear Request Error
[Reset timing]
Reset when the Complete Bit
Clear statuses turn on or the
next Request turns on.
4
2DC Read Request Error
If a 2DC Read Request fails to read a 2D code, the bit turns on.
5
Window Monitoring
Request Error
If a Window Monitoring Request fails in the lens inspection operation, it
turns on.* 3
If an Error Clear Request fails to clear the error, it turns on.* 3
0: Not Error
1: Error
1
8
Error Status
Bits
2
4
3
8
Error Status
Bits
7
Job Edit Error
[Reset timing]
Reset when Job Edit
Complete Bit Clear turns on
or the next Job Edit Start
Request turns on.
If a Job Edit Start Request fails to edit the job, it turns on.* If edit start
is not received or if data cannot be deployed when editing finishes, the
bit turns on.
0
Job Change Request Error
If a job change with a Job Change Request fails, it turns on.* 3
1
Rank Change Request
Error
If an I/O specified character change with a Rank Change Request fails,
it turns on.* 3
2
Counter No Change
Request Error
If a number change with a Counter No Change Request fails, the bit
turns on.* 3
3
Counter Value Change
Request Error
4
Counter Up Request Error
5
Counter Down Request
Error
6
Counter Reset Request
Error
If a reset with a Counter Reset Request fails, it turns on.* 3
Receivable condition: Ready ON
7
System Info ID Change
Error
If a change of the operation information ID with a System Info ID
Change Request fails, it turns on.* 3
0
Setting String Read
Request Error
0: Not Complete
1: Complete
If reading with a Setting String Read Request fails, it turns on.* 3
1
Marked String Read
Request Error
If reading with a Marked String Read Request fails, the bit turns on.* 3
2
String Change Request
Error
[Reset timing]
Reset when the Complete Bit
Clear statuses turn on or the
next Request turns on.
0
Command Send Request
Error
0: Not Error
1: Error
If Command Send Request fails, the bit turns on.
It will also fail if the data length exceeds 250 bytes.* 3
1
XY Tracking Result
Request Error
When XY Tracking Result Request fails, it turns on.* 3
2
Z Tracking Result Request
Error
[Reset timing]
Reset when the Complete Bit
Clear statuses turn on or the
next Request turns on.
0: Not Error
1: Error
[Reset timing]
Reset when the Complete Bit
Clear statuses turn on or the
next Request turns on.
If a value change with a Counter Value Change Request fails, the bit
turns on.* 3
If a value change with a Counter Up Request fails, it turns on.* 3
Receivable condition: Ready ON
If a value change with a Counter Down Request fails, it turns on.* 3
Receivable condition: Ready ON
If a change with a String Change Request fails, the bit turns on.
It will also fail if the data length exceeds 250 bytes.* 3
When Z Tracking Result Request fails, it turns on.* 3
* 1 If a code is read with the settable 2D code reading function on Marking Builder Plus, OK/NG is output with the grade that is set as the
threshold as the reference.
If code is read with 2DC Read Request, OK/NG is output for whether the code was successfully read or not.
(If the code is read even at Grade F, OK is output.)
* 2 The bit turns on at completion only if the operation is started by Profinet and Ethernet/IP communications.
If you start the operation with other forms of communication or I/O, the bit will not turn on, even if the operation completes.
The bit turns on when complete only if the operation is started by Profinet and Ethernet/IP communications.
* 3 If you started the operation with other forms of communication or I/O, the bit will not turn on, even if an error occurs.
Remote interlock input, shutter interlock input, and laser excitement input cannot be controlled from Profinet. Control those inputs from I/O.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
3-7
3
PROFINET
3
0
Communication Specification of the Controller
Word area for writing laser marker state on the PLC
In the following areas, the information is divided by word. The information is shown with 2-byte unsigned integer (0 to 65535).
The laser marker information is written in the PLC word area via cyclic communication. An area without a description is reserved.
Slot
Size
Module
Address
Data Type
Name
Word
Error Code 1
Word
Error Code 2
Status Information
Error Number
4
8
Error Codes
0
3
Description
Displays the number for the error currently occurring. The error number
display differs to the normal display.
The error codes are displayed as four digits such as 1*** for an error
(E***), 2*** for a warning error (W***), and 3*** for an I/O error (T***).
Up to two errors can be displayed. When three or more errors occur,
check them with Marking Builder Plus.
Error Number
Word
Command Send
Error Status
Word
Job No Status
[Reset timing]
Reset when Command
Send Request Complete Bit
Clear turns on or the next
Command Send Request
turns on.
Job Number
(0 to 1999)
If Command Send Request fails due to a software error, the error
number is displayed. The error number display differs to the normal
display. A software error (S***) is displayed as 4*** in four digits.
Displays the currently selected job number.
PROFINET
• Counter Value Change/Up/Down/Reset Request that is to be
changed
5
6
7
8
3-8
16
8
4
2+
data
size
Operate
Parameter
Marking
Check/2D
Code Read
Result
Count Result
Data
Response
Data
• Counter Value Status that is to be displayed
Word
Counter No Status
Counter Number
(0 to 19)
DWord
Counter Value
Status
Counter Value
(0 to 4294967295)
Displays the current counter value set to be displayed for Counter No
Change Request.
Word
Rank Value Status
I/O Encoded Character Value
(0 to 35)
Displays the value for I/O specified characters.
Word
System Info ID
System Info ID
(0 to 301)
Displays the currently selected operation information ID.
DWord
System Info Value
System Info Value
(0 to 4294967295)
Displays the operation information specified by System Info ID.
Word
Marking Check
Score/2DC Read
Grade Status 1
[When acquiring 2DC reading] Any of the following are displayed:
• 2D code reading (Defaults) :Read fail of AIM DPM comprehensive
0 to 4
determination grade or F(0)/D(1)/C(2)/
B(3)/A(4)
[When using the marking
verification function]
• Marking verification function : score
000 to 100
Displays the 2D code result by default, and the assessment result of
the marking verification function will be displayed in Marking Check
[Reset timing]
Score/2DC Read Grade Status 2. Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in
Resets when 2DC Read
the communication setting screen of Marking Builder Plus.
Complete Bit Clear turns on
When displaying the result of the 2D code reading grade, even if you
or the next 2DC Read
started the operation with communications and I/O other than 2DC
Request turns on.
Read Request, the result is displayed after the operation is completed.
Word
0 to 65535
Marking Check/2DC
[Reset timing]
Read Total Count
It will be reset to “0” when the
Status 1
power is turned off.
0
0
Displays the number of the target counter listed above.
Changes with Counter No Change Request.
Individual Counter(0 to 9): 0 to 9
Common Counter(A to J):10 to 19
Displays the execution count of the 2D code reading or the execution
count of the marking verification functions. Displays the execution
count of the 2D code reading by default, and the execution count of the
marking verification functions will be displayed in Marking Check/2DC
Read Total Count Status 2. Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the
communication setting screen of Marking Builder Plus.
[When using the marking
verification function]
000 to 100
Any of the following are displayed:
• Marking verification function (defaults) : score
• 2D code reading :Read fail of AIM DPM comprehensive
determination grade or F(0)/D(1)/C(2)/B(3)/A(4)
[When acquiring 2DC reading]
Displays the result of the marking verification function by default, and
0 to 4
the grade result of the 2D code reading will be displayed in Marking
Check Score/2DC Read Grade Status 2. Status 1 and 2 can be
[Reset timing]
reversed in the communication setting screen of Marking Builder Plus.
Reset when 2DC Read
When displaying the result of the 2D code reading grade, even if you
Complete Bit Clear turns
started the operation with communications and I/O other than 2DC
on or the next 2DC Read
Read Request, the result is displayed after the operation is completed.
Request turns on.
Word
Marking Check
Score/2DC Read
Grade Status 2
Word
0 to 65535
Marking Check/2DC
[Reset timing]
Read Total Count
It will be reset to “0” when the
Status 2
power is turned off.
Displays the execution count of the marking verification function or the
execution count of the 2D code reading. Displays the execution count
of the marking verification function by default, and the execution count
of the 2D code reading in Marking Check/2DC Read Total Count Status
1. Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the communication setting screen
of Marking Builder Plus.
0
DWord
Total Marking Count
Status
Marking Count
(0 to 4294967295)
Displays the marking count.
0
Word
Response Data
Size
Data size
(2 bytes)
Stores the data length of “Response Data” in 16-bit binary data.
Response
Displays the response data for the Setting/Marked String Request, 2DC
Read Request (read content), Command Send Request, XY Tracking
Result Request, and Z Tracking Result Request.
2
Character
Response Data
[Reset timing]
Reset when each Complete
Bit Clear request turns on or
the next Request turns on.
* Selectable capacities are from 32, 64, 128, and 252 bytes on the
PLC settings. (Default: 128 bytes.) However, if the response data
is greater than the selected byte number, all the data cannot be
received. Additionally, even if 252 bytes is selected, the maximum
amount of data that will be received is 250 bytes.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Communication Specification of the Controller
Bit area for writing the request from the PLC onto the laser marker
In the following areas, information is divided by bit. The bit values are either 0 or 1.
The request from the PLC is written onto the laser marker via cyclic communication. An area without a description is reserved.
Slot Size
Module
Address
bit
Name
Status Information
0→1: Start
1→0 : -
0
Start Marking Request
[Condition of operation]
The Ready Status is turned
on.
0→1: Start
1→0 : -
1
Guide Laser Request
[Condition of operation]
The Ready Status is turned
on.
* During shutter control,
contactor control, and
safety shutter control, the
request is received even if
the Ready Status is turned
off.
Description
Starts the marking.
If marking cannot be performed or is canceled, Start Marking Request
Error turns on. The Marking Busy Status turns on during marking. If
marking completes successfully, Marking Complete 1 and 2 turn on.
Starts guide laser marking.
Enter the number into Request No. beforehand.
0: Distance pointer
1: Guide laser once
2: Guide laser continuously
3: Area frame
4: Work image
5: Block frame
0→1: Stop
1→0 : 2
Stop Marking Request
0
3
Error Clear Request
[Condition of operation]
The Marking Busy Status is
turned on.
0→1: Error Clear
1→0 : -
0→1: Start
1→0 : -
0
8
General
Request
1
2
4
2DC Read Request
5
Window Monitoring
Request
0
Job Edit Start Request
[Condition of operation]
The Ready Status is turned
on.
0→1: Start
1→0 : [Condition of operation]
The Ready Status is turned
on.
0→1: Edit Start
1→0: Edit End
Cancels marking.
If an error occurs, remove the cause of the error and then turn this bit
on to clear the error. An Error Status Bit error cannot be cleared (it is
reset when the Complete Bit Clear statuses turn on or the next Request
turns on).
After the operation has been completed, Error Clear Complete turns
on regardless of whether the error is cleared successfully or not. If the
error cannot be cleared, Error Clear Request Error turns on.
Reads 2D code.The reading position is the current scanner coordinates.
Reading is performed with the coaxial camera in wide mode. The
internal lighting does not turn on automatically during reading. To use
this lighting, turn it on via communication or I/O before executing the
2DC Read Request.
If this request is run when the condition of operation is not satisfied, Mark
Check/2DC Read OK Status, Mark Check/2DC Read NG Status, and 2DC
Read Complete are reset, and 2DC Read Request Error turns on.
* It cannot be used on the MD-X400(A)/450(A) series.
Starts the lens inspection.
If this request is run when the condition of operation is not satisfied,
Window Monitoring Complete is reset, and Window Monitoring Request
Error is turned on.
* It cannot be used on the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A) series.
Starts the job editing.
If the start edit request is received successfully, the job change
request after that is retained temporarily in the controller, and the job is
deployed all at once when editing is completed. Use this request if you
want to reduce the communication time used by job editing. If edit start
is received successfully, Job Edit Busy Status turns on. Additionally, if
edit start is received successfully, Job Edit Complete turns on. 1
0
Job Change Request
Changes the job number. * 1
1
Rank Change Request
Changes the I/O specified characters. * 1
2
Counter No Change
Request
Changes the number of the counter to be changed. * 1
Individual Counter(0 to 9): 0 to 9
Common Counter(A to J):10 to 19
3
Counter Value Change
Request
Changes the value of the counter set to be displayed for Counter No
Change Request. * 1
4
Counter Up Request
Increases the value of the counter set to be displayed for Counter No
Change Request. * 1
5
Counter Down Request
Reduces the value of the counter set to be displayed for Counter No
Change Request. * 1
6
Counter Reset Request
Resets the counter set to be displayed for Counter No Change
Request. * 1
0→1: Request
1→0 : -
Changes the operation information ID. The operation information to the
ID is displayed to System Info Value.* 1
Operation ID
3
0
System Info IDChange
Request
Operation information
1
Controller operating time
2
Laser excited time
3
Scanner operating time
101
Number of shutter operations
102
Number of times the laser safety module has
been operated
201
Head temperature
202
Controller temperature
301
Results of the laser power calibration
302
Final execution result of the lens inspection
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
3-9
3
PROFINET
If marking completes or is canceled (including canceled due to an error)
after a set amount of time, the Guide Laser Request Complete bit turns on.
If guide laser marking cannot start, Guide Laser Request Error turns on.
If the move marking setting is selected, guide laser marking cannot be
used. The error bit turns on.
Communication Specification of the Controller
Slot Size
Module
Address
5
0
8
General
Request
7
3
PROFINET
1
4
Function
Request
0
bit
2
8
Request
Completion
Clear
2
3
4
7
Status Information
Description
0
Loads the settings.* 1
1
Marked String Read
Request
Loads the marked content.* 1
Sending the request before marking results in an error.
2
String Change Request
Changes the content to be marked in the current job.
Store the block no. in Request No., the string in Request Data, and the
length of the string in Request Data Size. The maximum data length is
250 bytes.
0
Command Send Request
1
XY Tracking Result
Request
Loads the result of the XY tracking.
Enter the XY tracking No. into the Request No. Store the response in
Response Data. Sending the request before marking results in an error.
2
Z Tracking Result Request
Loads the result of the Z tracking.
Enter the Z tracking No. into Request No. Store the response in
Response Data. Sending the request before marking results in an error.
0
Trigger Lock Request
Disables the trigger input.
If this bit turns on while marking, the trigger lock status is activated after
all of the mark data is marked. Test marking and sample marking is
immediately canceled when this bit turns on.
1
Operation Stop Request
Stops the laser radiation (the internal shutter remains open).
Use this bit to stop the laser radiation at the desired position while
processing a workpiece.
2
Laser Stop Request
3
Date Hold Request
If the controller's internal clock passes midnight when this bit is turned
on, the date of updated string is subtracted one day and the subtracted
date is marked.
4
Internal Lighting Request
Turns on an internal lighting.
* It cannot be used on the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A) series.
5
Distance Laser Stop
Request
Stops the distance laser.
* It cannot be used on the MD-X2050(A)/400(A)/450(A) series.
0
Marking Complete Bit Clear
Resets Marking Complete and Start Marking Request Error.
1
Guide Laser Complete Bit
Clear
Resets Guide Laser Complete and Guide Laser Request Error.
2
Laser Stop Complete Bit
Clear
3
Error Clear Complete Bit
Clear
4
2DC Read Complete Bit
Clear
Resets 2DC Read Complete, 2DC Read Request Error, Mark
Check/2DC Read OK Status, and Mark Check/2DC Read NG Status.
5
Window Monitoring
Complete Bit Clear
Resets Window Monitoring Complete.
0
0→1: Complete Clear
Job Edit Complete Bit Clear
1→0 : -
Resets Job Edit Complete and Job Edit Error.
0
Job Change Complete Bit
Clear
Resets Job Change Complete and Job Change Request Error.
1
Rank Change Complete Bit
Clear
Resets Rank Change Complete and Rank Change Request Error.
2
Counter No Change
Complete Bit Clear
3
Counter Value Change
Complete Bit Clear
4
Counter Up Complete Bit
Clear
Resets Counter Up Complete and Counter Up Request Error.
5
Counter Down Complete
Bit Clear
Resets Counter Down Complete and Counter Down Request Error.
6
Counter Reset Complete
Bit Clear
Resets Counter Reset Complete and Counter Reset Request Error.
0
System Info ID Change
Complete Clear
Resets System Info ID Change Complete and System Info ID Change
Error.
0
Setting String Read
Complete Bit Clear
1
Marked String Read
Complete Bit Clear
2
String Change Complete
Bit Clear
0
Command Send Complete
Bit Clear
0
1
Name
Setting String Read
Request
0→1: Request
1→0 : -
0: Input Off
1: Input On
0→1: Complete Clear
1→0 : -
Sends communication commands.
Store the communication command in Request Data and the length
of the string in Request Data Size. The maximum data length is 250
bytes. Store the response in Response Data.
Stops the marking laser and the guide laser.
The internal shutter closes while this bit is turned on.
Resets Laser Stop Complete and Stop Marking Request Error.
Resets Error Clear Complete and Error Clear Request Error.
Resets Counter No Complete and Counter No Change Request Error.
0→1: Complete Clear
1→0 : -
0→1: Complete Clear
1→0 : -
Resets Counter Value Complete and Counter Value Change Error.
Resets Setting String Read Complete and Setting String Read Request
Error.
Resets Marked String Read Complete and Marked String Read
Request Error.
Resets String Change Complete and String Change Request Error.
0→1: Complete Clear
1→0 : -
Resets Command Send Complete and Command Send Request Error.
* 1 Turns on this bit after storing the job No., I/O specified character No., counter value, counter No., and operation information No. in the
applicable Request No.
* 2 If you turn on this bit after storing the block No. in Request No., the content will be loaded from the specified block in the current job. Store
the load result in Response Data.
3-10
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Communication Specification of the Controller
Word area for writing a PLC request
In the following areas, the information is divided by word. The information is shown with 2-byte unsigned integer (0 to 65535).
The detailed information of the request from the PLC is written.
Slot
Size
Module
Address
Data Type
3
4
Request No
0
DWord
Request No
Numbers
(Four bytes)
Stores the job No., block No., counter value, and counter No. to be
changed.
0
Word
Request Data Size
Data size
(Two bytes)
Stores the data length of “Request Data” in 16-bit binary data.
Request Data
Command function
(Default: 250 bytes)
* Selectable from 32, 64,
128, and 252 bytes on the
PLC.
Use for String Change Request and Command Send Request. Store
the change string and communication command data. Headers and
delimiters are not required.
* Selectable capacities are from 32, 64, 128, and 252 bytes on the
PLC settings. (Default: 250 bytes.) However, even if 252 bytes is
selected, the maximum amount of data that can be sent is 250 bytes.
4
2+
data
size
Request
Parameters
for strings
2
Character
Name
Status Information
Description
* 1 If you turn on this bit after storing the block No. in Request No., the content will be loaded from the target block in the current job, and will be
stored in Response Data.
PROFINET communication can control the laser via command communication.
Since the communication mode is “command/response type”, multiple commands cannot be sent simultaneously. Therefore, make sure to send the
command only after a response has been received.
The command and response data is a combination of comma-delimited parameters.
z Communication format
Header and delimiter settings are not required. Store the send data size in “Request Data Size” and the send data in “Request Data” in the PLC
command area. Then set the “Command Send Request” bit to “1” to enable the stored data to be sent to the controller. For the communication
commands, refer to “Communication Interface Manual”.
Other controller specification
Endian
Endian is a method to place multiple-byte data onto the PLC's data memory. The laser marker uses the big endian method. Data having 2 bytes or more
is recorded/sent in sequence from the upper byte.
Typical endians are below.
• PLCs from Siemens: Big endian
• Omron PLC:
Little-Endian
GSDML file
GSDML file includes information on the PROFINET functions of the controller.
GSDML file is in the following folder of the PC which Marking Builder Plus was installed on.
C:\Program Files\keyence\MarkingBuilderPlus_Ver*\etc\ Profinet\[model name]
(Version of Marking Builder Plus is in *.)
Copy this file onto your PLC as required.
File name: GSDML-[Version]-Keyence-[Model name]-yyyymmdd.xml
(yyyymmdd is an update time of the file.)
The MD-X400 Series can use a GSDML file from the MD-X2000 Series.
In this case, some displays may be the contents of the MD-X2000 series.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
3-11
PROFINET
Command communications
3
Communication Specification of the Controller
When “Request” bit does NOT work
If a request is turned on but does not work, check the communications history.
You can check the history of commands sent and received between the PLC and laser marker in the Marking Builder Plus communications history.
z Confirmation method
Start Marking Builder Plus, and select the [Maintenance] tab > [Communication] > [Communication History].
The [Communication History] window appears. Click the [Update] button to display the latest history.
3
PROFINET
If the Communication history is empty, the laser marker has not received any Communication.
Double check the communication settings between the laser marker and the PLC, and make sure that the HUB and cable are not defective.
z Request format
Each request will be stored in the communication history in the following format:
Command: ***** Request
Response: ***** Request,X (X = 0: Success; X = 1: Fail)
However, the requests below have a different format. (X = 0: Success; X = 1: Fail)
Request
History format (“>” = command; “<” = response)
2DC Read Request
> 2DC_Read_Request,0
< 2DC_Read_Request,X,[Grade],[Content]
Job Edit Start Request
> Job_Edit_Start_Request,[Job No]
< Job_Edit_Start_Request,X
Job Change Request
> Job_Change_Request,[Job No]
< Job_Change_Request,X
Rank Change Request
> Rank_Change_Request,[I/O Character No]
< Rank_Change_Request,X
Counter No Change Request
> Counter_No_Change_Request,,[Counter No],1
< Counter_No_Change_Request,X,[Counter Current Value]
Counter Value Change Request
> Counter_Value_Change_Request,,[Counter No],[Counter Current Value]
< Counter_Value_Change_Request,X
System Info ID Change Request
> System_Info_ID_Change_Request,[System_Info_ID]
< System_Info_ID_Change_Request,X
Setting String Read Request
> Setting_String_Read_Request,BLK=[Block No],CharacterString
< Setting_String_Read_Request,[OK/NG],[Character String]
Marked String Read Request
> Marked_String_Read_Request,MarkedCharacter=[Job No],[Block No]
< Marked_String_Read_Request,[OK/NG],[Character String]
String Change Request
> String_Change_Request,,[Block No],[Character String]
< String_Change_Request,X
Window Monitoring Request
> Window_Monitoring_Request,WindowCheck
< Window_Monitoring_Request,[OK/NG], [Score]
XY_Tracking_Result_Request
> XY_Tracking_Result_Request,0
< XY_Tracking_Result_Request, [OK/NG], [X Coordinate Gap Amount], [Y Coordinate Gap Amount], [θ Gap Amount], [Correlation
Value], [Execution Time], [Result]
Z_Tracking_Result_Request
> Z_Tracking_Result_Request
< Z_Tracking_Result_Request, [OK/NG], [Z Coordinate Gap Amount], [X Rotation Angle], [Y Rotation Angle], [Stability], [Execution
Time], [Result]
Command Send Request
> [Stored data for Request Data]
< [Response]
An error may be the cause of the request not working. You can check up to two error codes simultaneously, Error Code 1 and Error Code 2.
Error details and resolutions are listed in the User's Manual for the applicable model.
3-12
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Setup Procedure of PROFINET
Setup Procedure of PROFINET
Perform settings on the [Communication settings] screen of Marking Builder Plus.
Perform the I/O setup with which the PROFINET inputs/outputs data via the Ethernet port of the controller.
• For the Ethernet setup of the controller such as IP address and subnet mask, refer to “Marking Builder Plus User's Manual.”
• This product needs to be restarted when you enable the PROFINET settings and rename any device name.
[Controller] from the [Settings] tab, and
1 Select
then [Ethernet Settings].
the 2D code reader and marking
4 Select
verification output assignments.
2 Set [Industrial Ethernet] to [PROFINET].
3
PROFINET
3 Specify [Device Name].
Specify the name used for identifying this product in the PROFINET
network.
5 Press [OK].
6 Restart the controller.
Use the same name to this product as one used
for connection of this product with the PLC. An
improper name will not allow the PLC to detect
this product, resulting in failure in establishing the
PROFINET communication.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
3-13
Connection Procedure for PROFINET
Connection Procedure for PROFINET
This section describes the example procedure in which the MD-X2000/2500 series connects to the Siemens S7-1200 series via PROFINET, retrieves the
controller status, and executes commands to control the controller.
Setup of PROFINET Communication
Checking the setup of the Laser marker
[Controller] from the [Settings] tab, and
1 Select
then [Ethernet Settings].
3
2 Configure the Ethernet.
PROFINET
Use the settings below here as an example.
(Modify the settings depending on the destination device).
Parameter
Modify the settings of the Siemens S7-1200
series.
up [Totally Integrated Automation Portal]
1 Start
with the PC and the CPU connected each
other, and select [Create new project] from
the [Start] menu.
Contents
Automatically acquire IP address
Uncheck
IP address
192.168.1.20
Subnet mask
255.255.255.0
Default gateway
Not used
MAC address
Not used
Port No.
Not used
a project name in the [Project name]
2 Enter
column, and select [Create].
3 After the PROFINET setup, press [OK].
This example sets the MD-X2500 series with the following
parameters.
(Modify the settings depending on the destination device).
click [Add new device] under the
3 Double
[Device & networks] menu, and select the PLC
to be used.
Parameter
Contents
Industrial Ethernet
PROFINET
Device name
md-x1xxx
2DC reader/marking
confirmation
output assignment
Select [CPU 1211C DC/DC/DC] as an example.
1: 2DC reader/2: Marking verification
4 Restart the controller.
Be sure to restart the controller when you enable
the PROFINET settings or rename any device
name. The PROFINET communication will not
work without a restart.
3-14
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
setting MD-X2000/2500 series for the
4 When
first time, install GSDML file.
Select [Install general station description file (GSD)] of the [Option]
tab.
Select the file name of “GSDML-V2.32-Keyence-MDX-yyyymmdd.
xml (yyyymmdd is the update date of the file)” and press [Install].
Connection Procedure for PROFINET
the connection between the MD6 Configure
X2000/2500 series and the PLC.
Connect to the Ethernet port on the PLC by dragging and dropping
from the Ethernet port shown in green of the “md-x2xxx.”
Move the mouse cursor away. If the indication below appeared, the
network has been established.
click the “MD-X1000/2500 series” icon
7 Double
on the [Device view] screen.
[Properties].
• GSDML file is in the following folder of the PC which
Marking Builder Plus was installed on.
<C:\Program Files\keyence\MarkingBuilderPlus_
Ver*\etc\ Profinet\[model name]>
(* is the version of Marking Builder Plus.)
• When the GSDML file has been installed, this setup
procedure is not required. Re-installation generates
an error without loading the file.
the connection with the MD-X2000/2500
5 Create
series.
Through [Device] - the [Device & networks] screen - [Hard ware
Catalog] - [Filter], open “Other field devices” - “PROFINET IO” “Sensors” - “KEYENCE CORPORATION.” - “Keyence Laser Marker,”
and drag and drop “ MD-X2XXX Series.”
Set the IP address, subnet mask, and PROFINET device name.
Use the settings below here as an example.
(Modify the settings depending on the destination device).
MD-X2000/2500 series
PLCs from Siemens
CPU 1211C DC/DC/DC
IPaddress
192.168.0.20
192.168.0.30
Subnet mask
Setting items
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
PROFINET device
name
MD-x2xxx
plc_1
Shortest possible
Update interval
8 ms
-
Drag and drop
Make sure that the display screen has turned to
the [Network view] tab while dropping.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
3-15
3
PROFINET
the MD-X2000/2500 series and the PLC
8 Set
from the [PROFINET interface] screen of
Connection Procedure for PROFINET
click the “MD-X2000/2500 series” icon
9 Double
on the [Device & networks] screen.
Device overview appears. Then assign
10 The
the devices for MD-X and PLC.
Assign the MD information area device to [I address], and assign
the PLC specified area device to [Q address].
3
a tag name for each address as
11 Choose
required.
Create a new tag table from [Project tree] - [CPU unit] - [PLC tags] [Add new tag table].
Here the tag table is being created with the MD information area
named MDX_Monitor, and the MD specified area named MDX_
Control.
PROFINET
Here the device is assigned as an example as shown below.
Module
Address
Machine Status
I address 200 - 203
Function Status
I address 204 - 207
Completion Status
I address 208 - 215
Error Status Bits
I address 216 - 223
Error Codes
I address 224 - 231
Operate Parameter
I address 232 - 247
Marking Check/2D Code Read Result
I address 248 - 255
Count Result Data
I address 256 - 259
Response Data
I address 260 - 391
General Request
Q address 200 - 207
Function Request
Q address 208 - 211
Request Completion Clear
Q address 212 - 219
Request No
Q address 220 - 223
Request Parameters for strings
Q address 224 - 353
Double click
€PLC specified area device tag table
€MD information area device tag table
Edit the name of the new tag table and edit the list inside tag table.
Set a function name in [Name], and set the address which has
been assigned in [Device overview] beforehand in relation to that
function in [Address]. Here set the items below based on the device
map.
3-16
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Connection Procedure for PROFINET
z MDX_Monitor
Name
Name
Address
Module
Address
Start Marking Request Error
%I216.0
Guide Laser Request Error
%I216.1
Stop Marking Request Error
%I216.2
Error Clear Request Error
%I216.3
2DC Read Request Error
%I216.4
Job Edit Error
%I217.0
Job Change Request Error
%I218.0
%I200.0
Rank Change Request Error
%I218.1
Error Status
%I200.1
Counter No Change Request Error
%I218.2
Warning Status
%I200.2
Counter Value Change Request Error
%I218.3
Error Warning Status
%I200.3
Counter Up Request Error
%I218.4
Shutter Status
%I200.4
Counter Down Request Error
%I218.5
Network Status
%I200.5
Counter Reset Request Error
%I218.6
Job Change Ready Status
%I200.6
System Info ID Change Error
%I218.7
Distance Laser Ready Status
%I200.7
Setting String Read Request Error
%I220.0
Laser Emitted Status
%I201.0
Marked String Read Request Error
%I220.1
Shutter Control Status
%I201.1
String Change Request Error
%I220.2
Remote Interlock Status
%I201.2
Safety Shutter Status
Machine
Status
Command Send Request Error
%I223.0
%I201.3
Error Code 1
%IW224
Busy Status
%I202.0
Error Code 2
%IW226
Marking Busy Status
%I202.1
Command Send Error Status
%IW228
Guide Laser Busy Status
%I202.2
Job No Status
%IW232
Job Change Busy Status
%I202.3
Counter No Status
%IW234
Communication Priority Error Status
%I202.4
Counter Value Status
%ID236
Job Edit Busy Status
%I202.5
Rank Value Status
%IW240
Mark Check /2DC Read Busy Status
%I202.6
System Info ID
%IW242
Trigger Lock Status
%I204.0
System Info Value
%ID244
Operation Stop Status
%I204.1
Laser Control Status
%I204.2
Marking Check Score / 2DC Read Grade
Status
%IW248
Date Hold Status
%I204.3
%IW250
Internal Lighting Status
%I204.4
Marking Check/2DC Read Total Count
Status
Distance Laser Stop Status
%I204.5
Total Marking Count Status
%ID256
Date Attach Status
%I205.0
Response Data Size
%IW260
Counter End1 Status
%I205.1
Response Data
%IB262
Counter End2 Status
%I205.2
Counter End3 Status
%I205.3
Counter End4 Status
%I205.4
Mark Check/2DC Read OK Status
%I205.5
Mark Check/2DC Read NG Status
%I205.6
Marking Complete 1
%I205.7
Marking Complete 2
%I208.0
Guide Laser Complete
%I208.1
Laser Stop Complete
%I208.2
Error Clear Complete
%I208.3
2DC Read Complete
%I208.4
Job Edit Complete
%I209.0
Job Change Complete
%I210.0
Rank Change Complete
%I210.1
Counter No Complete
%I210.2
Counter Value Complete
%I210.3
Counter Up Complete
%I210.4
Counter Down Complete
%I210.5
Counter Reset Complete
%I210.6
System Info ID Change Complete
%I211.0
Setting String Read Complete
%I212.0
Marked String Read Complete
%I212.1
String Change Complete
%I212.2
Command Send Complete
%I215.0
Function
Status
Error Status
Bits
3
PROFINET
Ready Status
Module
Error Codes
Operate
Parameter
Marking
Check/2D
Code Read
Result
Count Result
Data
Response
Data
Completion
Status
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
3-17
Connection Procedure for PROFINET
[Save] from the [Project] tab and store
12 Select
the settings.
z MDX_Control
[Download to device] from the [Online]
13 Select
tab and send the settings to the PLC.
3
PROFINET
Name
Address
Start Marking Request
%Q200.0
Guide Laser Request
%Q200.1.
Stop Marking Request
%Q200.2
Error Clear Request
%Q200.3
2DC Read Request
%Q200.4
Job Edit Start Request
%Q201.0
Job Change Request
%Q202.0
Rank Change Request
%Q202.1
Counter No Change Request
%Q202.2
Counter Value Change Request
%Q202.3
Counter Up Request
%Q202.4
Counter Down Request
%Q202.5
Counter Reset Request
%Q202.6
System Info ID Change Request
%Q203.0
Setting String Read Request
%Q205.0
Marked String Read Request
%Q205.1
String Change Request
%Q205.2
Command Send Request
%Q207.0
Trigger Lock Request
%Q208.0
Operation Stop Request
%Q208.1
Laser Stop Request
%Q208.2
Date Hold Request
%Q208.3
Internal Lighting Request
%Q208.4
Distance Laser Stop Request
%Q208.5
Marking Complete Bit Clear
%Q212.0
Guide Laser Complete Bit Clear
%Q212.1
Laser Stop Complete Bit Clear
%Q212.2
Error Clear Complete Bit Clear
%Q212.3
2DC Read Complete Bit Clear
%Q212.4
Job Edit Complete Bit Clear
%Q213.0
Job Change Complete Bit Clear
%Q214.0
Rank Change Complete Bit Clear
%Q214.1
Counter No Change Complete Bit Clear
%Q214.2
Counter Value Change Complete Bit
Clear
%Q214.3
Counter Up Complete Bit Clear
%Q214.4
Counter Down Complete Bit Clear
%Q214.5
Counter Reset Complete Bit Clear
%Q214.6
System Info ID Change Complete Clear
%Q215.0
Setting String Read Complete Bit Clear
%Q216.0
Marked String Read Complete Bit Clear
%Q216.1
String Change Complete Bit Clear
%Q216.2
Command Send Complete Bit Clear
%Q219.0
Module
14 Turn the CPU mode switch to RUN.
The RUN LED (green) of the CPU turns on after the connection is
established.
IF THE RUN LED DOES NOT TURN ON
• The PROFINET settings may be incorrect; the
cables connection may be incorrect; or the laser
marker may have not started up.
• Once the communication is disconnected, the RUN
LED turns off. In this case, use the mode switch of
the CPU to execute the MRES and switch to the
RUN mode.
General
Request
Function
Request
Request
Completion
Clear
Request No
%QD220
Request No
Request Data Size
%QW224
Request Data
%QB226
Request
Parameters
for strings
If the name for each device via tag table is determined, the
device names are displayed when creating or executing
the job.
3-18
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Connection Procedure for PROFINET
Controlling the Laser Marker Controller
This part describes the procedure to control the laser marker through the PLC by the PROFINET communication.
Switching and Marking the Job No. of the Laser Marker
z Referential ladder diagram
Ready
The following is a referential job for switching and marking the job No.
Programming for practical operations needs to consider additional
functions such as error processing.
Request Parameter
PLCs from Siemens
Job Change Request
(1)
Job Change Complete
3
Start Marking Request
(2)
(3)
PROFINET
(1)
(1) Require switching of the job.
(2)
Store the job No. to be set in [Request No] and turn the [Job
Change Request] bit into “1.”
(2) Check that the job change has been completed.
The “Job Change Request Complete” bit turns to “1.”
(3) Enter a trigger.
• While changing the job No., the “Ready Status” bit is “0”
and the “Busy Status” bit is “0.”
• If the job No. switching fails, the “Job Change Request
Error” bit is “1.”
• The “Job Change Complete” bit is cleared by turning the
“Job Change Complete Bit Clear” bit into “1” or start of
the next operation. Before that, the bit remains “1.”
• Each bit remains “1” until the completion bit or the next
operation starts.
(3)
(4)
(1) Turn on “Start1” and store “1” in “ Request Parameter “
(2) Turn “Job Change Request” bit into “1.”
If “Job Change Request Complete” turns on, “Job Change Request”
turns off.
(3) Confirm the job change has been completed and turn
the “Start Marking Request” bit into “1.”
If “Job Change Complete” turns on, “Start Marking Request” turns
on. If “Marking Complete 2” turns on, “Start Marking Request” turns
off.
(4) Turn each “Complete Clear” bit into “1.”
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
3-19
Connection Procedure for PROFINET
Use the command communication to change and mark the job No.
z Referential ladder diagram
Ready
The following is a referential job for switching and marking the job No.
using the command communication.
Programming for practical operations needs to consider additional
functions such as error processing.
Request Data Size
PLCs from Siemens
Request Data
(1)
Command Send Request
Command Send Complete
3
Start Marking Request
(2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Require sending of commands
PROFINET
Store the data contents to be sent in “Request Data” and the
data size in “Request Data Size,” and turn the “Command Send
Request” bit into “1.”
(2) Check that the command send has been completed.
(3)
The “Command Send Complete” bit turns to “1.”
(3) Enter a trigger.
• After the command communication and change of the
job No., the “Ready Status” bit turns to “0” and the “Busy
Status “ bit turns to “1.”
• If sending of the command failed, the “Command Send
Request Error” bit turns to “1.”
• The “Command Send Complete” bit is cleared by turning
the “ Command Send Complete Bit Clear “ bit into “1” or
start of the next operation. Before that, the bit remains
“1.”
• Each bit remains “1” until the completion bit or the next
operation starts.
• The data length of the response to “ Command Send
Request” is stored in “Response Data Size” and its
contents in “Response Data.”
(4)
(1) Turn on “Start2,” store “4” in “Data Size” and “GA,1”
in “Data.”
(2) Turn “Command Send Request” bit into “1.”
If “Command Send Complete” turns on, “Command Send Request”
turns off.
(3) Check that the command processing has been
completed and turn the “Start Marking Request” bit
into “1.”
If “Command Send Complete” turns on, “Start Marking Request”
turns on. If “Marking Complete 2” turns on, “Start Marking Request”
turns off.
(4) Turn each “Complete Clear” bit into “1.”
3-20
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Connection Procedure for PROFINET
Reading the Marked 2D Code and Acquiring the Assessment Result
z Referential ladder diagram
Ready
The following is a referential program for reading the marked 2D code
and acquiring the assessment result.
Programming for practical operations needs to consider additional
functions such as error processing.
Start Marking Request
PLCs from Siemens
Marking Complete 2
2DC Read Request
(1)
2DC Read Complete
2DC Read Grade Status
(1)
(2)
(3)
3
(4) (5)
(1) Mark the 2D code.
Turn “Start Marking Request” bit into “1.”
(2)
PROFINET
(2) Confirm that marking has been completed.
The “Marking Complete 2” bit turns to “1.”
(3) Read the 2D code.
Turn the “2DC Read Request” bit into “1.”
(4) Confirm the 2D code reading has been completed.
The “2DC Read Complete” bit turns to “1.”
(5) Load the assessment result of the 2D code.
(3)
At the same time as loading of the 2D code is completed, the result
is stored in “2DC Read Grade Status.”
• The 2D code can be read not only by directing “2DC
Read Request” through the PROFINET communication,
but also by the Marking Builder Plus after marking.
“Marking Builder Plus User's Manual 2D Code Reader”
• The “Ready Status” bit is “0” while reading the 2D code.
Also, the “Busy Status” bit is “1.”
• If reading of the 2D code failed, the “2DC Read Request
Error” bit turns to “1.”
• The “2DC Read Complete” bit is cleared by turning the
“2DC Read Complete Bit Clear” bit into “1” or start of the
next operation. Before that, the bit remains “1.”
• Each bit remains “1” until the completion bit or the next
operation starts.
(4)
(1) Turn on “Start3” and mark the current job.
(2) Confirm that the marking has been completed and turn
the “2DC Read Request” bit into “1.”
If “Marking Complete 2” turns on, “2DC Read Request” turns off.
If “2DC Read Complete” turns on, “2DC Read Request” turns off.
(3) Confirm the completion of the 2d code read, and store
the assessment result of the “2DC Read Grade Status”
in arbitrary memory.
If “2DC Read Complete” turns on, the assessment of “2DC Read
Grade Status” is copied to the %MB100.
(4) Turn each “Complete Clear” bit into “1.”
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
3-21
Execute Ladder Program
Execute Ladder Program
Download the created ladder program
on the PLC.
Confirm/monitor the state of laser
marker
“Online” - “Download to device” on the
1 Select
menu bar.
1 Select “Online” - “Go online” on the menu bar.
it has gone online, select “MDX_Monitor”
2 After
from “PLC tags”.
3
PROFINET
Select “PG/PC interface” and “Connection to subnet” based on
the communication environment settings, and press Load to start
download.
2 Turn the CPU mode switch to “RUN.”
The RUN LED (green) of the CPU turns on after the connection is
established.
IF THE RUN LED DOES NOT TURN ON
3 Press the monitor button
The bit state of the current address is displayed in “Monitor value”.
In the following, the bit of Ready (%I200.0), StartUp (%I200.5) and
Laser Emit (%201.0) is “1”, and is Marking Ready state.
• The PROFINET settings may be incorrect; the
cables connection may be incorrect; or the laser
marker may have not started up.
• Once the communication is disconnected, the RUN
LED turns off. In this case, use the mode switch of
the CPU to execute the MRES and switch to the
RUN mode.
3-22
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Execute Ladder Program
Execute ladder program
“Online” - “Go online” on the menu
1 Select
bar.
4 Turn the “Start3” bit into “1.”
The marking and reading are started.
Right click the contact point A of “Start3”, and select
“Modify”→”Modify to 1” to change the bit to “1”.
Right click
it has gone online, select the created
2 After
ladder program from “Job blocks.”
3
“Main” program is switched to in the following.
Judgment result is stored to “%MB100”.
“4” is stored in the following, therefore, the grade becomes A.
3 Press the monitor button
The ladder display is linked with the bit.
turning the “Start3” bit into “0,” turn the
6 After
“Clear3” bit into “1.”
The bits of Print Complete and Code Read Complete become “0”.
IF THE ERROR LED DOES NOT GO OFF
The PROFINET communication with Laser Marker
may have not been established. Confirm the
communication settings of PLC and laser marker, then
restart the laser marker.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
3-23
PROFINET
5 Confirm the judgement result.
Execute Ladder Program
MEMO
3
PROFINET
3-24
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
4
OPC UA
Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
OPC UA Server Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
OPC UA communication specifications and functions. . 4-3
System configuration example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
How to configure the laser marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Certificate registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Node structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Node functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Alarms & conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Control examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Communication history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
4-1
OPC UA
What is OPC UA? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Security precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4
Getting Started
Getting Started
What is OPC UA?
Security precautions
The MD-X2000/2500 Series is equipped with an OPC UA server
function.
OPC UA is an industrial network communication protocol. It is a
service-oriented architecture that is not dependent on platform and that
integrates into an extensible framework all the functionality of the OPC
Classic specifications.
It provides excellent inter-device interconnectivity and can connect
various layers from field devices to cloud-based servers.
Its safety and high reliability have led to it being used in more and more
industrial devices as time goes on.
4
z Do not use OPC UA if security vulnerabilities exist.
• To limit access to the OPC UA settings, enable the user management
function on the laser marker and set an appropriate user level.
• Use OPC UA with its security functions, such as encryption and
signatures, enabled. By default, the security policy [None] is also
enabled to allow for an easier initial connection. When operating
with the security function enabled, disable [None]. Because it has a
security level lower than SHA2, only use SHA1 when necessary.
• Formulate and make use of a policy for managing user names and
passwords.
• Appropriately perform management such as updating, revoking, and
deleting certificates. When trusting a certificate, thoroughly check
its information to check whether the correct certificate has been
registered.
• Manage private keys so they are not disclosed.
• Do not use applications and user certificates for multiple purposes.
• Apply all software updates that patch vulnerabilities.
z Design and maintain a network configuration that
OPC UA
ensures security.
• Manage the network in a way that makes data interception and DoS
attacks difficult.
• If there is the risk of illegal access from external devices over the
network, users must implement countermeasures.
4-2
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
OPC UA Server Function
OPC UA Server Function
OPC UA communication specifications and functions
„ Laser marker OPC UA server function specifications
Item
Description
Connection port used
Ethernet (MAIN, SUB)
Supported function
OPC UA server function
Transport/Data encoding method
UA TCP binary
URL (endpoint URL) specification method
opc.tcp://[IP address]:[port no.] Example) opc.tcp://192.168.0.10:4840
Max. session (client) count
4
Monitor item count * 1
500
Supported sampling cycle
100 ms min.* 2
OPC UA security modes and policies
• Requires signatures and encryption: SingAndEncrypt
• Requires signatures: Sign
• Requires neither signatures nor encryption: None
Signature and encryption algorithms
Basic128Rsa15 / Basic256 / Basic256Sha256 / Aes128Sha256RsaOaep /
Aes256Sha256RsaPss
Certificate authorization methods
• Authorization by trusted certificate
• Authorization by CA-signed certificate
User authorization
User authorization
methods
• User name and password • Authorization by trusted certificate
• Anonymous
• Authorization by CA-signed certificate
Applicable certificate standard
OPC UA
Application authorization
4
Conforms to X.509
*1 The monitor item count is the number of elements to set as the targets to communicate with on the OPC UA client in a cyclic manner.
*2 Set the sampling cycle with the OPC UA client.
„ Laser marker OPC UA server function overview
• Transferring files
Jobs, logos, fonts, and other such files can be transferred.
• Checking the laser marker status and operation status
The status of items such as the terminal block and errors can be acquired.
• Monitoring maintenance information
Information such as the operating time, laser power, lens inspection result, and temperature can be monitored.
• Acquiring the workflow result
Items such as the camera image, 2D code reading result, and correction result from the tracking function can be acquired.
• Laser marker operation according to application
It is possible to control the laser marker in an equivalent manner to control over industrial Ethernet with examples including switching between jobs
and changing character strings or counter values.
System configuration example
Communication with the control system and the PLC or other such control device is carried out over communication route 1. Via the OPC UA protocol,
operation information is acquired from and files are transferred to and received from an MES or similar device over communication route 2.
Control device
(PLC)
OPC UA server
(laser marker)
LAN1 (MAIN)
Communication route 1
TCP/IP, EtherNet/IP, Profinet
OPC UA client
(MES, etc.)
LAN2 (SUB)
Communication route 2
OPC UA protocol
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
4-3
OPC UA Server Function
How to configure the laser marker
Use Marking Builder Plus to configure the laser marker.
To use the OPC UA server function, you have to fix the IP address.
If the IP address has not been set, do so before configuring any other
OPC UA server settings.
„ Enabling the OPC UA server function
[Controller] from the [Settings] tab, and
1 Select
then [Communication Settings].
„ Procedure example 1 for initial connection to
OPC UA client (when the client certificate is
self-signed)
In this procedure example, the client connects to the OPC UA server,
the rejected client certificate is trusted, and then the connection is
established.
1 Generate a server certificate.
Select [Server Certificate], and then [Generation of Certificate].
2 Set the OPC UA server to [Enable].
4
OPC UA
3
Enter the certificate information, and then click [OK].
Set the port number, time zone, and
communication history operation.
Configure the settings to match the usage environment. The initial
port number is 4840.
If the certificate is successfully generated, the server certificate
information will be displayed.
• Marking Builder Plus Ver. 1 does not support
the OPC UA function, so if this software is used
to transfer the controller settings, the OPC UA
settings will be initialized. Certificate files, user
names, and passwords will be saved.
• With the OPC UA server function enabled and
a client connected, communication will be
periodically performed between the client and
server. Depending on the environment, the job
file deployment time may be longer than when
the OPC UA server function is not in use.
4-4
2 Try connecting from the client.
Before connecting, register the laser marker’s server certificate on
the client. Click [Export] to acquire this certificate.
After registering this certificate, connect to the laser marker’s OPC
UA server from the client.
On the first connection, the client certificate is not trusted by the
laser marker, so this connection to the server fails.
However, if the security policy is [None], the connection can be
established at this point.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
3 Trust the client on the laser marker.
Select [Client Certificate].
OPC UA Server Function
„ Procedure example 2 for initial connection to
OPC UA client (when the client certificate is
self-signed)
In this procedure example, the client certificate is registered prior to
establishing the connection.
1 Generate a server certificate.
Do this by following the same procedure as in “Procedure example
1 for initial connection to OPC UA client.”
2 Register the client certificate.
Select [Client Certificate].
From [Rejected Client Certificate List], select the client to connect
to, and then select [Move to Trust List].
4
Once the selected client certificate moves to the [Trusted Client/CA
certificates] list, close this screen.
The certificate appears.
Clients that could not be connected due to the
differences between SHA1 and SHA2 and server
certificates are not displayed as rejected certificates.
4 Connect to the server from the client.
Connect to the laser marker’s OPC UA server from the client again.
If the settings have been configured correctly, the connection will
be established. If the connection fails, the server certificate may not
have been correctly registered on the client.
3 Connect from the client.
Before connecting, register the laser marker’s server certificate on
the client. Click [Export] to acquire this certificate.
After registering this certificate, connect to the laser marker’s OPC
UA server from the client.
If the same client certificate or user certificate
exists in both the trusted certificates and rejected
certificates, connection will be possible.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
4-5
OPC UA
Select [+] next to [Trusted Client/CA certificates], and then select
the security certificate (*.der) to register.
OPC UA Server Function
„ CA certificate registration procedure (when the
Certificate registration
client certificate is CA-signed)
„ CA certificate and certificate revocation list
• CA
CA (Certificate Authority) issues electronic certificates and revokes
electronic certificates for which revocation requests have been made
and for which there is the possibility that their private keys are no
longer safe.
• CA certificate
CA electronic certificates. Required when creating, revoking, and
using a certificate authorized by the CA.
• Certificate revocation list
The certificate revocation list is expressed as CRL.
The CRL contains the certificates revoked by the CA. You can check
which certificates have been revoked by checking the CRL.
In advance, register the laser marker’s server certificate as a trusted
certificate on the client. Alternatively, register the client certificate CA on
the client as necessary.
CA-signed client certificates can be used according to the following patterns.
This section will explain how to register certificates in patterns 1 and 2.
In patterns 3 and 4, where a root CA certificate and intermediate CA
certificate exist, all CA certificates and CRLs must be registered in the
same manner.
• Pattern 1
Register as Trusted
Root CA
certificate
The trusted certificate revocation list is prioritized
over the issuer authentication certificate
revocation list.
4
„ Specifications of usable certificates
• Restrictions on application certificates (client and server certificates)
based on the OPC UA standard
X.509.v3
CommonName required
IP address or domain name, and URI
Subject alternative name
required (with the same contents as
Application URI)
Five required: digitalSignature,
nonRepudiation, keyEncipherment,
Key usage method
dataEncipherment and Certificate
Signing
Extended key usage method serverAuth and/or clientAuth required
Authority key identifier
Required
If an application certificate that does not conform to these
specifications is imported, the server may fail to start.
OPC UA
Certificate version
Subject
• Self-signed certificates
The authority key identifier KeyID is the same as the subject key
identifier.
• CA-signed certificates
The authority key identifier KeyID is the same as the subject key
identifier of the higher-order certificate.
The CA certificate and CRL must be registered on the server.
• File name extension
Certificate extension
Private key extension
CRL extension
Client certificate 1
Client certificate 2
Client certificate 3
Connectable
Connectable
Connectable
• Pattern 2
Root CA
certificate
Register as
Trusted
Client certificate 1
Client certificate 2
Client certificate 3
Connectable
Not connectable
Not connectable
• Pattern 3
• Signing hash algorithms and key lengths
Signing hash algorithm
SHA1
certificates Number of public key/
private key bits
Signing hash algorithm
SHA2
certificates Number of public key/
private key bits
SHA1
Intermediate CA
certificate
Client certificate 1
Client certificate 2
Client certificate 3
Connectable
Connectable
Connectable
• Pattern 4
1024 or 2048
Register as Trusted
Root CA
certificate
der
pem * The key must be a PKCS8
format RSA private key.
crl * The format must be DER encoded.
• File name
The file to import must have a unique file name. If a file with the
same name exists, it will be overwritten on the controller.
The maximum file name length, including extension, is 100
characters. When the file name is expressed in UTF-16, strings that
use surrogate pairs cannot be used. The following characters also
cannot be used.
#%\/:;,.*?" <>| (half-width space) (full-width space)
Register as Issuer
Register as Issuer
SHA256,SHA384,SHA512
Root CA
certificate
2048, 3072, or 4096
• Security policies and signing hash algorithms (client and user
certificates)
Intermediate CA
certificate
Certificate signing hash
algorithm
Security policy
4-6
SHA1
SHA2
Basic128Rsa15

-
Basic256

-
Basic256Sha256
-

Aes128-Sha256-RsaOaep
-

Aes256-Sha256-RsaPss
-

*When adding to a certificate trusted with Marking Builder Plus,
the number of CommonName characters is not limited, but when
changing a rejected certificate to a trusted certificate, CommonName
must be 39 characters or less in length.
Register as
Trusted
Client certificate 1
Client certificate 2
Client certificate 3
Connectable
Not connectable
Not connectable
* Register as Trusted: The certificate is registered as Trusted.
* Register as Issuer: The certificate is registered for use in
authenticating the issuer (Issuer).
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
OPC UA Server Function
• Pattern 1
The CRL appears on the screen.
the CA certificate in the Trusted
1 Register
folder.
Select [Client Certificate].
Select [+] next to [Trusted Client/CA certificates], and then select
the CA certificate to add.
• Pattern 2
1 Register the CA certificate in the Issuer folder.
Select [Client Certificate].
4
OPC UA
Select [Issuer authentication].
The certificate appears.
2 Register the CRL of the CA certificate.
Select [+] next to [CA certificate], and then select the CA certificate
to add.
Select [+] next to [Client Certificate Revocation List], and then
select the CRL of the CA certificate.
The certificate appears.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
4-7
OPC UA Server Function
2 Register the CRL of the CA certificate.
Select [+] next to [Client Certificate Revocation List], and then
select the CRL of the CA certificate.
„ CA certificate registration procedure (when the
user certificate is CA-signed)
The certificate registration screen is accessed from [User Certificate].
The rest of the procedure is the same as when registering client
certificates.
For details on the procedure, refer to “CA certificate registration
procedure (when the client certificate is CA-signed).”
The CRL appears on the screen.
„ CA certificate registration procedure (when the
server certificate is CA-signed)
4
OPC UA
the client certificate in the Trusted
3 Register
folder.
In this procedure, a CA-signed certificate is used as the laser marker’s
server certificate.
If a root CA certificate and intermediate CA certificate exist, all CA
certificates and CRLs must be registered in the same manner.
The procedure is the same for SHA1 or SHA2 server certificates.
CA-signed server certificates can only be registered according to the
following pattern.
Register as Issuer
Close the issuer authentication screen to return to the client
certificate screen.
Select [+] next to [Trusted Client/CA certificates], and then select
the client certificate to add.
Root CA
certificate
Server certificate
Import and use the certificate
as a server certificate.
1 Register the CA certificate.
Select [Server Certificate].
The certificate appears.
Select [Issuer authentication].
4-8
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
OPC UA Server Function
Select [+] next to [CA certificate], and then select the CA certificate
to add.
Select [Ref.], and then select the certificate file (*.der) and private
key file (*.pem).
Enter the passphrase of the server certificate.
When importing is finished, the server certificate information is
updated.
The certificate appears.
4
Select [+] next to [Client Certificate Revocation List], and then
select the CRL.
Because the certificate is CA-signed, the Issued to
and Issued by fields differ.
The CRL appears on the screen.
3 Import the server certificate.
Close the issuer authentication screen to return to the server
certificate screen.
Select [Import] for the certificate to use: SHA2 or SHA1.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
4-9
OPC UA
2 Register the CRL of the CA certificate.
OPC UA Server Function
Node structure
The MD-X2000 Series node structure is as follows.
4
OPC UA
Node (Object) structure
Root
└──── Objects
└──── LaserMarker
├──── MachineStatus
│
├──────── ReadyStatus
│
├──────── ErrorStatus
│
├──────── WarningStatus
│
├──────── IOErrorStatus
│
├──────── ErrorCode
│
├──────── ShutterStatus
│
├──────── NetworkStatus
│
├──────── JobChangeReadyStatus
│
├──────── DistanceLaserOperationReadyStatus
│
├──────── MarkingLaserExcitedStatus
│
├──────── ShutterControlStatus
│
├──────── RemoteInterlockStatus
│
├──────── LaserSafetyModuleStatus
│
├──────── DataLoggingTriggerStatus
│
├──────── ExternalLightControlStatus
│
├──────── BusyStatus
│
├──────── MarkingBusyStatus
│
├──────── GuideLaserBusyStatus
│
├──────── JobChangeBusyStatus
│
├──────── CommunicationPriorityBusyStatus
│
├──────── JobEditBusyStatus
│
├──────── MarkingConfirmationBusyStatus
│
├──────── 2DCodeReadBusyStatus
│
├──────── WindowCheckBusyStatus
│
├──────── TriggerLockStatus
│
├──────── OperationDisableStatus
│
├──────── LaserControlStatus
│
├──────── DateHoldInputStatus
│
├──────── BuiltInLightStatus
│
├──────── DistanceLaserStopStatus
│
├──────── DateHoldOutputStatus
│
├──────── CounterCompletionStatus
│
├──────── CurrentJobNo
│
└──────── IOEncodedCharacter
├──── OperationResult
│
├──────── MarkingCompleteStatus
│
├──────── TotalMarkingCount
│
├──────── MarkingConfirmationResult
│
├──────── MarkingConfirmationScore
│
├──────── MarkingConfirmationTotalOperationCount
│
├──────── 2DCodeReadResult
│
├──────── 2DCodeReadGrade
│
├──────── 2DCodeReadTotalOperationCount
│
└──────── WindowCheckScore
│
├──────── WorkflowResult
│
├──────── WorkflowTime
│
├──────── CameraImageBeforeMarkingResult
│
├──────── WindowCheckBeforeMarkingResult
│
├──────── WindowCheckBeforeMarkingScore
│
├──────── WindowCheckBeforeMarkingScoreDetail
│
├──────── WindowCheckBeforeMarkingTime
│
├──────── XYTrackingResult
│
├──────── ZTrackingResult
│
├──────── MarkingResult
│
├──────── MarkingTime
│
├──────── CameraImageAfterMarkingResult
│
├──────── MarkingConfirmationTime
│
├──────── 2DCodeReadString
│
├──────── WindowCheckAfterMarkingResult
│
├──────── WindowCheckAfterMarkingScore
│
├──────── WindowCheckAfterMarkingScoreDetail
│
├──────── WindowCheckAfterMarkingTime
│
├──────── MarkingEnergyResult
│
├──────── MarkingEnergy
│
───────── MatrixCellInformation
├──── IOFunction
│
├──────── TriggerLockRequest
│
├──────── OperationDisableRequest
│
├──────── LaserStopRequest
│
├──────── DateHoldRequest
│
├──────── BuiltInLightRequest
│
└──────── DistanceLaserStopRequest
├──── MachineInformation
│
├──────── ControllerOperatingTime
│
├──────── LaserExcitedTime
│
├──────── ScannerOperatingTime
│
├──────── ShutterOperationCount
│
├──────── LaserSafetyModuleOperationCount
│
├──────── HeadTemperature
│
├──────── ControllerTemperature
│
├──────── LaserPowerCalibrationResult
│
├──────── VersionInformation
│
├──────── LaserMarkerID
├──────── LaserMarkerModel
│
└──────── SerialNumber
├──── MarkingOperation
│
├──────── StartMarking
│
├──────── StartGuideLaser
│
├──────── StopMarking
│
├──────── Read2DCodePosition
│
├──────── Read2DCodeBlock
│
├──────── GetXYTrackingResult
│
├──────── GetZTrackingResult
│
└──────── GetMarkedString
│
├──────── GetZTrackingMatrixCellResult
│
├──────── GetZTrackingMatrixCellNoResult
│
├──────── GetCameraImage
│
├──────── StartMarkingResult
│
├──────── StartGuideLaserMarkingResult
│
├──────── StopMarkingResult
│
───────── Read2DCodeResult
├──── JobOperation
│
├──────── StartJobEdit
│
├──────── EndJobEdit
4-10
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
OPC UA Server Function
│
├──────── SetCurrentJobNo
│
├──────── SetIOEncodedCharacter
│
├──────── GetCurrentCounterValue
│
├──────── SetCurrentCounterValue
│
├──────── UpCurrentCounterValue
│
├──────── DownCurrentCounterValue
│
├──────── ResetCurrentCounterValue
│
├──────── GetCurrentCounterRepetition
│
├──────── SetCurrentCounterRepetition
│
├──────── GetSettingString
│
└──────── SetSettingString
│
├──────── EndJobEditResult
│
───────── SetCurrentJobNoResult
├──── GeneralOperation
│
├──────── ClearError
│
├──────── StartWindowCheck
│
├──────── CommandSendRequest
│
├──────── ClearErrorResult
│
───────── StartWindowCheckResult
└──── FileOperation
├──────── JobFiles
├──────── LogoFiles
├──────── CustomCharacterFiles
├──────── Z-mapFiles
├──────── FontFiles
├──────── BackupFiles
├──────── MLogFiles
├──────── SaveJobFile
├──────── LoadJobFile
├──────── BackupAllSetting
├──────── RestoreAllSetting
└──────── InitializeAllSetting
└──────── SaveMLogFile
├──────── SaveJobFileResult
├──────── LoadJobFileResult
├──────── BackupAllSettingResult
├──────── RestoreAllSettingResult
├──────── InitializeAllSettingResult
───────── SaveMLogFileResult
4
The [FileOperation] node structure is as follows.
FileOperation[FileOperationType]
└──── JobFiles[FileDirectoryType] *2
│
└──── CreateDirectory[Method]
│
└──── CreateFile[Method]
│
└──── Delete[Method]
│
└──── MoveOrCopy[Method]
│
└──── AAA.ma2[FileType]
│
│
└──── Size[Variable]
│
│
└──── Writable[Variable]
│
│
└──── UserWritable[Variable]
│
│
└──── OpenCount[Variable]
│
│
└──── Open[Method]
│
│
└──── Close[Method]
│
│
└──── Read
│
│
└──── Write
│
│
└──── GetPosition[Method]
│
│
└──── SetPosition[Method]
│
└──── BBB.ma2[FileType]
│
│
└────・・・・
│
└──── ・・・・
│
└──── LogoFiles[FileDirectoryType]
│
└──── CreateDirectory[Method]
│
└──── CreateFile[Method]
│
└──── Delete[Method]
│
└──── MoveOrCopy[Method]
│
└──── CCC.mlg[FileType]
│
│
└────・・・・
│
└──── DDD.mhl[FileType]
│
│
└────・・・・
│
└──── EEE.mwi[FileType]
│
│
└────・・・・
│
└──── ・・・・
│
└──── CustomCharacterFiles[FileDirectoryType]
│
└──── CreateFile[Method]
│
└──── Delete[Method]
│
└──── MoveOrCopy[Method] *1
│
└──── FFF.mft[FileType]
│
│
└────・・・・
│
└──── ・・・・
│
└──── Z-mapFiles[FileDirectoryType]
│
└──── CreateFile[Method]
│
└──── Delete[Method]
│
└──── MoveOrCopy[Method] *1
│
└──── GGG.zmp[FileType]
│
│
└────・・・・
│
└──── ・・・・
│
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
4-11
OPC UA
• Method and FileType nodes are added to [JobFiles], [LogoFiles], [CustomCharacterFiles], [Z-MapFiles], [FontFiles], [BackupFiles], and [MlogFiles]
under [FileOperation]. Size, Writable, UserWritable, and OpenCount nodes are added to each FileType node.
• The number of nodes varies dynamically according to the saved data contents. Files with non-targeted extensions cannot be created (with CreateFile
Method).*4
• NodeID is in String format and is referenced from the LaserMarker node via a slash (“/”). For example, “LaserMarker/FileOperation/JobFiles/AAA.ma2”
references the job file AAA.ma2. Furthermore, “LaserMarker/FileOperation/JobFiles/AAA.ma2/Size” references this file’s Size property.
OPC UA Server Function
└──── FontFiles[FileDirectoryType]
│
└──── CreateFile[Method]
│
└──── Delete[Method]
│
└──── MoveOrCopy[Method] *1
│
└──── HHH.fuy[FileType]
│
│
└────・・・・
│
└──── ・・・・
│
└──── BackupFiles[FileDirectoryType] *2
│
└──── CreateFile[Method]
│
└──── Delete[Method]
│
└──── MoveOrCopy[Method] *1
│
└──── JJJ.mab2[FileType]
│
│
└────・・・・
│
└──── ・・・・
│
└──── MLogFiles[FileDirectoryType] *2
│
└──── Delete[Method]
│
└──── MoveOrCopy[Method] *1
│
└──── KKK.mlog[FileType] *3
│
│
└────・・・・
│
└──── ・・・・
│
└──── SaveJobFile[Method]
└──── LoadJobFile[Method]
└──── BackupAllSetting[Method]
└──── RestoreAllSetting[Method]
└──── InitializeAllSetting[Method]
└──── SaveMLogFile[Method]
└──── SaveJobFileResult
└──── LoadJobFileResult
└──── BackupAllSettingResult
└──── RestoreAllSettingResult
└──── InitializeAllSettingResult
└──── SaveMLogFileResult
4
OPC UA
*1Moving and copying are only possible within the directory.
*2 Marking Builder Plus cannot be used to delete the data of the job, backup, and log files within this directory. This data can only be deleted via OPC
UA communication.
*3 There is a limit on the log file capacity that can be acquired via OPC UA communication, which is not the case when acquiring log files with Marking
Builder Plus. Reduce the log data capacity by adjusting the log data acquisition period.
*4 The extensions of the files that can be created with the CreateFile Method are as follows. CreateFile can create up to 3500 files.
File type
Logo
Corresponding FileDirectoryType node
LogoFiles
Photo
LogoFiles
Custom
character
Font
Z-MAP
Job
4-12
Extension
*.mlg
*.mhl
*.mwi
*.mzu
*.mzm
*.mzx
CustomCharacterFiles
*.mft
FontFiles
Z-mapFiles
JobFiles
*.fuy
*.zmp
*.ma1
*.ma2
*.mab1
*.mab2
*.mlog
Backup
BackupFiles
Log
MLogFiles
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
OPC UA Server Function
Node functions
„ Objects
Name Node
Space ID
Affiliated object
Item
Overview
Supplemental explanation
2
15001
Root - Object
LaserMarker
Laser marker object (includes the following objects)
2
15002
LaserMarker
MachineStatus
Object for acquiring the device status such as
trigger ready
2
15003
LaserMarker
OperationResult
Object for acquiring the results of processes such
as marking or 2D code reading
2
15004
LaserMarker
IOFunction
Object for requesting control or acquiring the status,
such as for the trigger lock
2
15005
LaserMarker
MachineInformation
Object for acquiring device information such as the
operating time and version information
2
15006
LaserMarker
MarkingOperation
Object for controlling marking such as by starting it
2
15007
LaserMarker
JobOperation
Object for job control such as switching settings and
changing character strings
15008
LaserMarker
GeneralOperation
2
15009
LaserMarker
FileOperation
Object for controlling files such as by transferring
them
2
15010
FileOperation
JobFiles
Directory housing the Job files
2
15011
FileOperation
LogoFiles
Directory housing the logo files
2
15012
FileOperation
CustomCharacterFiles
Directory housing the custom character files
2
15013
FileOperation
Z-mapFiles
Directory housing the Z-map files
2
15014
FileOperation
FontFiles
Directory housing the font files
2
15015
FileOperation
BackupFiles
Directory housing the backup files
2
15016
FileOperation
MLogFiles
Directory housing the MLOG files
2
See
supplemental
explanation
(File name)
File object directly under each FileDirectory object
4
OPC UA
2
Object for clearing errors and performing other
control
This object is added directly under
the objects of node IDs 15010 to
15016. The node ID is in String
format and is referenced from the
LaserMarker node via a slash (“/”).
„ Variable
Name Node
Space ID
Affiliated object
Item
Type
Read/
Write
Overview
2
16001
MachineStatus
ReadyStatus
Boolean(True / False)
Read
Trigger ready status
2
16002
MachineStatus
ErrorStatus
Boolean
Read
Error status
2
16003
MachineStatus
WarningStatus
Boolean
Read
Warning status
2
16004
MachineStatus
IOErrorStatus
Boolean
Read
Terminal block error
status
2
16005
MachineStatus
ErrorCode
String[10](Array)
Read
Status of the error/
warning occurring or of
the terminal block
2
16006
MachineStatus
ShutterStatus
Boolean
Read
Shutter open/closed
status
2
16007
MachineStatus
NetworkStatus
Boolean
Read
Network connection
status
2
16008
MachineStatus
JobChangeReadyStatus
Boolean
Read
Setting switch ready
status
2
16063
MachineStatus
DistanceLaserOperationReadyStatus
Boolean
Read
Distance laser operation
ready status
2
16009
MachineStatus
MarkingLaserExcitedStatus
Boolean
Read
Laser excited status
2
16010
MachineStatus
ShutterControlStatus
Boolean
Read
Shutter control status
2
16011
MachineStatus
RemoteInterlockStatus
Boolean
Read
Remote interlock status
2
16012
MachineStatus
LaserSafetyModuleStatus
Boolean
Read
Laser safety input status
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
Supplemental
explanation/value range
4-13
OPC UA Server Function
Name Node
Space ID
4
Affiliated object
Item
Type
Read/
Write
Overview
Supplemental
explanation/value range
OPC UA
2
16013
MachineStatus
DataLoggingTriggerStatus
Boolean
Read
Logging trigger input
status
2
16014
MachineStatus
ExternalLightControlStatus
Boolean
Read
External lighting control
output status
2
16015
MachineStatus
BusyStatus
Boolean
Read
Busy status
2
16016
MachineStatus
MarkingBusyStatus
Boolean
Read
Marking in progress
status
2
16017
MachineStatus
GuideLaserBusyStatus
Boolean
Read
Guide laser marking in
progress status
2
16018
MachineStatus
JobChangeBusyStatus
Boolean
Read
Setting switch processing
status
2
16019
MachineStatus
CommunicationPriorityBusyStatus
Boolean
Read
Priority error status
2
16020
MachineStatus
JobEditBusyStatus
Boolean
Read
Job editing in progress
status
2
16021
MachineStatus
MarkingConfirmationBusyStatus
Boolean
Read
Marking confirmation in
progress status
2
16022
MachineStatus
2DCodeReadBusyStatus
Boolean
Read
2D code reading in
progress status
2
16023
MachineStatus
WindowCheckBusyStatus
Boolean
Read
Lens inspection in
progress status
2
16024
MachineStatus
TriggerLockStatus
Boolean
Read
Trigger lock input status
2
16025
MachineStatus
OperationDisableStatus
Boolean
Read
Machinery disable input
status
2
16026
MachineStatus
LaserControlStatus
Boolean
Read
Laser stop input status
2
16027
MachineStatus
DateHoldInputStatus
Boolean
Read
Date hold input status
2
16028
MachineStatus
BuiltInLightStatus
Boolean
Read
Built-in lighting control
input status
2
16029
MachineStatus
DistanceLaserStopStatus
Boolean
Read
Distance laser stop input
status
2
16030
MachineStatus
DateHoldOutputStatus
Boolean
Read
Date deviation output
status
The number of array
elements is four,
corresponding to counter
termination outputs 1 to
4.*1
2
16031
MachineStatus
CounterCompletionStatus
Boolean[4]
Read
Counter completion
output status
2
16032
MachineStatus
CurrentJobNo
UInt32
(Unsigned Integer)
Read
Current job number
Value range: 0 to 1999
2
16034
MachineStatus
IOEncodedCharacter
UInt32
Read
I/O-specified character
acquisition
Value range: 0 to 35
2
16035
OperationResult
MarkingCompleteStatus
Boolean
Read
Marking complete output
status
*1
2
16036
OperationResult
TotalMarkingCount
UInt32
Read
Cumulative marking count
1
2
16037
OperationResult
MarkingConfirmationResult
UInt32
Read
Previous marking
confirmation result
0: no result, 1: success, 2:
failure, 3: outside of error
thresholds
2
16038
OperationResult
MarkingConfirmationScore
UInt32
Read
Score of previous marking
confirmation
Value range: 0 to 100
2
16039
OperationResult
MarkingConfirmationTotalOperationCount
UInt32
Read
Cumulative marking
confirmation count
Value range: 0 to
4294967295
2
16040
OperationResult
2DCodeReadResult
UInt32
Read
Previous 2D code reading
result
0: no result, 1: success, 2:
failure, 3: outside of error
thresholds
2
16041
OperationResult
2DCodeReadGrade
String
Read
Previous 2D code reading
grade
"-": no result, “A,” “B,” “C,”
“D,” “F”
2
16042
OperationResult
2DCodeReadTotalOperationCount
UInt32
Read
Cumulative 2D code
reading count
Value range: 0 to
4294967295
2
16044
OperationResult
WindowCheckScore
UInt32
Read
Previous lens inspection
result
Value range: 0 to 100
4-14
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
OPC UA Server Function
Name Node
Space ID
Affiliated object
Item
Type
Read/
Write
Overview
Supplemental
explanation/value range
0: no result, 1: success, 2:
failure/canceled
16078
OperationResult
WorkflowResult
UInt32
Read
Previous workflow
execution result
2
16079
OperationResult
WorkflowTime
UInt32
Read
Previous workflow
execution time (ms)
2
16080
OperationResult
CameraImageBeforeMarkingResult
UInt32
Read
Previous pre-marking
capture result
0: no result, 1: success, 2:
failure
2
16081
OperationResult
WindowCheckBeforeMarkingResult
UInt32
Read
Result of previous
pre‑marking lens
inspection
0: no result, 1: success, 2:
failure, 3: below warning
threshold
2
16082
OperationResult
WindowCheckBeforeMarkingScore
UInt32
Read
Score of previous
pre‑marking lens
inspection (all)
Value range: 0 to 100 (0
when there is no result)
2
16083
OperationResult
WindowCheckBeforeMarkingScoreDetail
UInt32[10]
Read
Score of previous
pre‑marking lens
inspection (individual)
Scores from point 1 to
point 10. Value range: 0
to 100 (0 when there is no
result)
2
16084
OperationResult
WindowCheckBeforeMarkingTime
UInt32
Read
Execution time of
previous pre-marking lens
inspection (ms)
2
16085
OperationResult
XYTrackingResult
UInt32
Read
Previous XY tracking
result (all)
2
16086
OperationResult
ZTrackingResult
UInt32
Read
Previous Z tracking result
(all)
0: no result, 1: success, 2:
failure, 3: outside of error
thresholds
2
16087
OperationResult
MarkingResult
UInt32
Read
Previous marking result
0: no result, 1: success, 2:
failure
2
16098
OperationResult
MarkingTime
UInt32
Read
Previous marking
time (ms)
2
16088
OperationResult
CameraImageAfterMarkingResult
UInt32
Read
Previous post-marking
capture result
2
16089
OperationResult
MarkingConfirmationTime
UInt32
Read
Previous marking
confirmation execution
time (ms)
2
16090
OperationResult
2DCodeReadString
String
Read
Previous 2D code reading
contents
2
16091
OperationResult
WindowCheckAfterMarkingResult
UInt32
Read
Previous result of
post‑marking lens
inspection
0: no result, 1: success, 2:
failure, 3: below warning
threshold
2
16092
OperationResult
WindowCheckAfterMarkingScore
UInt32
Read
Score of previous
pre‑marking lens
inspection (all)
Value range: 0 to 100 (0
when there is no result)
Scores from point 1 to
point 10. Value range: 0
to 100 (0 when there is no
result)
0: no result, 1: success, 2:
failure
2
16093
OperationResult
WindowCheckAfterMarkingScoreDetail
UInt32[10]
Read
Score of previous
pre‑marking lens
inspection (individual)
2
16094
OperationResult
WindowCheckAfterMarkingTime
UInt32
Read
Execution time of
previous pre-marking lens
inspection (ms)
2
16095
OperationResult
MarkingEnergyResult
UInt32
Read
Previous marking energy
check result
0: no result, 1: success, 3:
outside of thresholds
2
16096
OperationResult
MarkingEnergy
Double
Read
Previous marking energy
(J)
Value range: 00000.01 to
99999.99
Returns the total number
of cells, number of
marking target cells, and
number of marked cells.
Values are updated when
settings are switched, jobs
are deployed, marking
starts, or marking finishes.
Zeros are returned for all
values in the case of nonmatrix settings.
2
16097
OperationResult
MatrixCellInformation
UInt32[3]
Read
Previous matrix
information during
marking
2
16045
IOFunction
TriggerLockRequest
Boolean
Read/
Write
Trigger lock request
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
4-15
4
OPC UA
2
OPC UA Server Function
Name Node
Space ID
4
Affiliated object
Item
Type
Read/
Write
Overview
Supplemental
explanation/value range
OPC UA
2
16046
IOFunction
OperationDisableRequest
Boolean
Read/
Write
Machining operation
(laser output) stop request
2
16047
IOFunction
LaserStopRequest
Boolean
Read/
Write
Laser stop request
2
16048
IOFunction
DateHoldRequest
Boolean
Read/
Write
Date hold request
2
16049
IOFunction
BuiltInLightRequest
Boolean
Read/
Write
Built-in lighting control
request
2
16050
IOFunction
DistanceLaserStopRequest
Boolean
Read/
Write
Distance laser stop
request
2
16051
MachineInformation
ControllerOperatingTime
UInt32
Read
Controller operating time
Value range: 0 to
4294967295 (unit: H)
2
16052
MachineInformation
LaserExcitedTime
UInt32
Read
Laser operating time
Value range: 0 to
4294967295 (unit: H)
2
16053
MachineInformation
ScannerOperatingTime
UInt32
Read
Scanner operating time
Value range: 0 to
4294967295 (unit: H)
2
16054
MachineInformation
ShutterOperationCount
UInt32
Read
Shutter operating count
Value range: 0 to
4294967295
2
16055
MachineInformation
LaserSafetyModuleOperationCount
UInt32
Read
Laser safety module
operation count
Value range: 0 to
4294967295
2
16056
MachineInformation
HeadTemperature
Float
Read
Marking unit temperature
Value range: −999.9 to
999.9 (unit: °C)
2
16057
MachineInformation
ControllerTemperature
Float
Read
Controller temperature
Value range: −999.9 to
999.9 (unit: °C)
2
16058
MachineInformation
LaserPowerCalibrationResult
Float
Read
Previous laser power
calibration result
Value range: 0.0 to
999.99 (unit: W)
2
16059
MachineInformation
VersionInformation
String[5]
Read
Version information
2
16060
MachineInformation
LaserMarkerID
String
Read
Laser marker ID
(nickname)
2
16061
MachineInformation
LaserMarkerModel
String
Read
Laser marker model
information
2
16062
MachineInformation
SerialNumber
String[2]
Read
Serial numbers
Returns the controller and
head serial numbers.
2
16064
MarkingOperation
StartMarkingResult
OperationMethodResultType
Read/
Write
Result of marking via
OPC UA (StartMarking)
*2
2
16065
MarkingOperation
StartGuideLaserResult
OperationMethodResultType
Read/
Write
Result of guide laser
marking via OPC UA
(StartGuideLaser)
*2
2
16066
MarkingOperation
StopMarkingResult
OperationMethodResultType
Read/
Write
Result of stopping
marking via OPC UA
(StopMarking)
*2
2
16067
MarkingOperation
Read2DCodeResult
OperationMethodResultType
Read/
Write
Result of 2D code
reading via OPC UA
(Read2DCodePosition/
Read2DCodeBlock)
*2
2
16068
GeneralOperation
ClearErrorResult
OperationMethodResultType
Read/
Write
Result of error clearing
via OPC UA (ClearError)
*2, *3
2
16069
GeneralOperation
StartWindowCheckResult
OperationMethodResultType
Read/
Write
Result of lens
inspection via OPC UA
(StartWindowCheck)
*2
2
16070
JobOperation
EndJobEditResult
OperationMethodResultType
Read/
Write
Result of job editing via
OPC UA (EndJobEdit)
*2, *3
2
16071
JobOperation
SetCurrentJobNoResult
OperationMethodResultType
Read/
Write
Result of setting
the current job
number via OPC UA
(SetCurrentJobNo)
*2, *3
2
16072
FileOperation
SaveJobFileResult
OperationMethodResultType
Read/
Write
Result of saving the
job file via OPC UA
(SaveJobFile)
*2
2
16073
FileOperation
LoadJobFileResult
OperationMethodResultType
Read/
Write
Result of loading the
job file via OPC UA
(LoadJobFile)
*2, *3
4-16
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
OPC UA Server Function
Name Node
Space ID
Affiliated object
Item
Type
Read/
Write
Overview
Supplemental
explanation/value range
16074
FileOperation
BackupAllSettingResult
OperationMethodResultType
Read/
Write
Result of creating the
backup file via OPC UA
(BackupAllSetting)
*2
2
16075
FileOperation
RestoreAllSettingResult
OperationMethodResultType
Read/
Write
Result of restoring the
backup file via OPC UA
(RestoreAllSetting)
*2
2
16076
FileOperation
InitializeAllSettingResult
OperationMethodResultType
Read/
Write
Result of initializing all
settings via OPC UA
(InitializeAllSetting)
*2, *3
2
16077
FileOperation
SaveMLogFileResult
OperationMethodResultType
Read/
Write
Result of saving the
history file via OPC UA
(SaveMLogFile)
*2
-
-
Each FileType node
Size
UInt64
Read
File size
-
-
Each FileType node
Writable
Boolean
Read
Writable or not
-
-
Each FileType node
UserWritable
Boolean
Read
Writable by current user
or not
Read
Number of corresponding
files opened via OPC UA
communication. Open
Method increases this
value and Close Method
decreases it.
-
-
Each FileType node
OpenCount
UInt16
4
epending on the sampling cycle setting, the length of time that MarkingCompleteStatus and CounterCompletionStatus are monitored as ON may be
D
shorter than the ON time of the terminal block. It may not even be possible to monitor these two values switching to ON at all.
*2 When using it for handshaking with the corresponding Method, write 0: None in advance and then call Method.
*3Result is saved after expansion process completes.
*1
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
4-17
OPC UA
2
OPC UA Server Function
„ Method
Name Node
Space ID
2
4
17001
Affiliated object
MarkingOperation
Item
StartMarking
Argument
<Value.Name>*1
None
Return value
<Value.Name>
*2, *3
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
Overview
Supplemental
explanation
Starts
marking
Method processing
finishes when the
Marking start request
is output. Processing
completion notification is
provided via an event. If
the block to mark does
not exist within the job,
the S101 error occurs in
the MarkingEnd event.
Related events:
MarkingStart,
MarkingEnd
OPC UA
2
17002
MarkingOperation
StartGuideLaser
A. Type <Type>:
GuideLaserType
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
Starts guide
laser marking
Method processing
finishes when the
GuideLaser start request
is output. Processing
completion notification is
provided via an event.
Related events:
GuideLaserMarkingStart,
GuideLaserMarkingEnd
2
17003
MarkingOperation
StopMarking
None
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
Stops
marking
Related events:
MarkingEnd,
GuideLaserMarkingEnd
Read2DCodePosition
A. X coordinate
<X_Coordinate>:
Double
B. Y coordinate
<Y_Coordinate>:
Double
C. Z coordinate
<Z_Coordinate>:
Double
D. Reading range
<ReadingArea>
(%): UInt32
2D code
reading
(coordinate
specification)
A, B, C: The setting
range varies depending
on the model.
D: 0 to 100
The Method finishes
when 2D code reading
starts. Processing
completion notification is
provided via an event.
Related events:
2DCodeReadingStart,
2DCodeReadingEnd
2
2
2
17004
17005
17006
4-18
MarkingOperation
MarkingOperation
MarkingOperation
Read2DCodeBlock
GetXYTrackingResult
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
A. Block number
<BlockNo>:
UInt32
B. Reading range
<ReadingArea>
(%): UInt32
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
2D code
reading
(block
specification)
A: 0 to 255
B: 0 to 100 The Method
finishes when 2D
code reading starts.
Processing completion
notification is provided
via an event.
Related events:
2DCodeReadingStart,
2DCodeReadingEnd
A. Tracking
number
<TrackingNo>:
UInt32
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
3. X deviation [mm] <X_
Deviation>: Double
4. Y deviation [mm] <Y_
Deviation>: Double
5. Angle [°] <Theta_
Deviation>: Double
6. Match level
<Correlation>: UInt32
7. Tact
[ms] <ExecutionTime>:
UInt32
8. Result <Result>:
UInt32
Acquires the
XY tracking
result
A: 0 to 7
6: 0 to 100
8: Result (0: Failure, 1:
Success,
2: Success (low match
level))
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
OPC UA Server Function
Name Node
Space ID
2
2
2
2
2
17008
17034
17035
17023
17009
MarkingOperation
MarkingOperation
MarkingOperation
MarkingOperation
MarkingOperation
JobOperation
Return value
<Value.Name>
*2, *3
Overview
Supplemental
explanation
GetZTrackingResult
A. Tracking
number
<TrackingNo>:
UInt32
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
3. Z deviation [mm] <Z_
Deviation>: Double
4. X tilt [°] <X_
AngleDeviation>: Double
5. Y tilt [°] <Y_
AngleDeviation>: Double
6. Stability <Stability>:
UInt32
7. Tact
[ms] <ExecutionTime>:
UInt32 8. Result
<Result>: UInt32
Acquires the
Z tracking
result
A: 0 to 255
6: 0 to 100
8: Result (0: Failure, 1:
Success, 2: Success (low
stability), 3: Success (out
of tolerance range))
GetMarkedString
A. <JobNo>:
UInt32
B. Block number
<BlockNo>:
UInt32
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
3. Marked string
<MarkedString>: String
Acquires the
marked string
A: 0 to 1999
B: 0 to 255
A: Row number
<Row>: UInt32
B. Column
number
<Column>: UInt32
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
3. Z deviation [mm] <Z_
Deviation>: Double
4. X tilt [°] <X_
AngleDeviation>: Double
5. Y tilt [°] <Y_
AngleDeviation>: Double
6. Stability <Stability>:
UInt32
7. Tact
[ms] <ExecutionTime>:
UInt32
8. Result <Result>:
UInt32
Acquires
the matrix
cell height
correction
result (row
and column
specified)
A: 0 to 255
B: 0 to 255
6: 0 to 100
8: Result (0: Failure, 1:
Success, 2: Success (low
stability), 3: Success (out
of tolerance range))
GetZTrackingMatrixCellNoResult
A. Cell number
<CellNo>: UInt32
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
3. Z deviation [mm] <Z_
Deviation>: Double
4. X tilt [°] <X_
AngleDeviation>: Double
5. Y tilt [°] <Y_
AngleDeviation>: Double
6. Stability <Stability>:
UInt32
7. Tact
[ms] <ExecutionTime>:
UInt32 8. Result
<Result>: UInt32
Acquires
the matrix
cell height
correction
result (cell
number
specified)
A: 0 to 65025
6: 0 to 100
8: Result (0: Failure, 1:
Success, 2: Success (low
stability), 3: Success (out
of tolerance range))
GetCameraImage
A. Image
type <Type>:
CameraImageType
B. Option (XY
tracking number,
etc.) <Option>:
UInt32
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
3. Jpeg file data
<JpegData>: ImageJPG
Acquires
camera
images
(before/after
marking, 2D
code reading,
marking
confirmation,
and XY
tracking)
Item
GetZTrackingMatrixCellResult
StartJobEdit
Argument
<Value.Name>*1
A. <JobNo>:
UInt32
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
4
OPC UA
2
17007
Affiliated object
Starts setting
change
A: 0 to 1999
• If you start editing
with StartJobEdit,
do not change any
setting contents or edit
anything other than
the job number until
ending editing with
EndJobEdit. Doing so
will cause an error in
EndJobEdit, preventing
editing from completing
normally.
4-19
OPC UA Server Function
Name Node
Space ID
2
2
4
2
OPC UA
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
17010
17011
17012
17013
17014
17015
17016
17017
17036
17037
17018
4-20
Affiliated object
JobOperation
JobOperation
JobOperation
JobOperation
JobOperation
JobOperation
JobOperation
JobOperation
JobOperation
JobOperation
JobOperation
Item
EndJobEdit
Argument
<Value.Name>*1
None
Return value
<Value.Name>
*2, *3
Overview
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
Ends setting
change
Related events:
ExpansionStart,
ExpansionEnd
Supplemental
explanation
SetCurrentJobNo
A.
<JobNo>:UInt32
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
Changes the
current job
number
A: 0 to 1999
Depending on the
laser marker status, it
may take some time
from the execution of
SetCurrentJobNo to the
changing of ReadyStatus
to False.
Related events:
ExpansionStart,
ExpansionEnd
SetIOEncodedCharacter
A.
<EncodedCharacter>:UInt32
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
Changes the
I/O-specified
character
A: 0 to 35
GetCurrentCounterValue
A. <JobNo>:
UInt32
B. Counter type
<CounterNo>:
String
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
3. Counter value
<CounterValue>: UInt32
Acquires the
current value
of the counter
A: 0 to 1999
B: “0” to “9,” “A” to “J”
3: 0 to 4294967295
SetCurrentCounterValue
A. <JobNo>:
UInt32
B. Counter type
<CounterNo>:
String
C. Counter value
<CounterValue>:
UInt32
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
Sets the
current value
of the counter
A: 0 to 1999
B: “0” to “9,” “A” to “J”
C: 0 to 4294967295
UpCurrentCounterValue
A. <JobNo>:
UInt32
B. Counter type
<CounterNo>:
String
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
Increases the
current value
of the counter
by 1
A: 0 to 1999
B: “0” to “9,” “A” to “J”
DownCurrentCounterValue
A. <JobNo>:
UInt32
B. Counter type
<CounterNo>:
String
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
Decreases
the current
value of the
counter by 1
A: 0 to 1999
B: “0” to “9,” “A” to “J”
ResetCurrentCounterValue
A. <JobNo>:
UInt32
B. Counter type
<CounterNo>:
String
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
Resets the
current value
of the counter
A: 0 to 1999
B: “0” to “9,” “A” to “J”
GetCurrentCounterRepetition
A. <JobNo>:
UInt32
B. Counter type
<CounterNo>:
String
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
3. Current
marking repetition
<RepetitionValue>:
UInt32
Acquires
the current
marking
repetition of
the counter
A: 0 to 1999
B: “0” to “9,” “A” to “J” 3:
0 to 4294967295
SetCurrentCounterRepetition
A. <JobNo>:
UInt32
B. Counter type
<CounterNo>:
String
C. Current
marking repetition
<RepetitionValue>:
UInt32
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
Sets the
current
marking
repetition of
the counter
A: 0 to 1999
B: “0” to “9,” “A” to “J”
C: 0 to 4294967295
GetSettingString
A. <JobNo>:
UInt32
B. Block number
<BlockNo>:
UInt32
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
3. Setting string
<SettingString>: String
Acquires the
setting string
A: 0 to 1999
B. 0 to 255
3: The character code is
UTF-8.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
OPC UA Server Function
Name Node
Space ID
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
17020
17021
17022
17028
17029
17030
17031
JobOperation
GeneralOperation
GeneralOperation
GeneralOperation
FileOperation
FileOperation
FileOperation
FileOperation
Item
SetSettingString
ClearError
StartWindowCheck
CommandSendRequest
Argument
<Value.Name>*1
Return value
<Value.Name>
*2, *3
A. <JobNo>:
UInt32
B. Block number
<BlockNo>:
UInt32
C. Setting string
<SettingString>:
String
None
None
A. Command
<Command>:
String
SaveJobFile
A. Job number
<JobNo>: UInt32
B. File name
<FileName>:
String
LoadJobFile
A. Job number
<JobNo>: UInt32
B. File name
<FileName>:
String
BackupAllSetting
RestoreAllSetting
A. File name
<FileName>:
String
A. File name
<FileName>:
String
B. Option
<Option>: UInt32
Overview
Supplemental
explanation
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
Updates the
setting string
A: 0 to 1999
B: 0 255 C: The character
code is UTF-8.
Related events:
ExpansionStart,
ExpansionEnd
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
Clears the
currently
occurring
errors/
warnings
Related events:
ExpansionStart,
ExpansionEnd
(Deployment processing
may occur when errors
are reset.)
Starts the lens
inspection
(maintenance)
The Method finishes
when lens inspection
starts. Processing
completion notification is
provided via an event.
Related events:
WindowCheckStart,
WindowCheckEnd
Transmits a
command
string
Synchronization
processing will be
performed, so pay
attention to the timeout
setting. Command
strings can be up to 4096
characters in length.
Saves the job
file
FileName: If the
extension is not ma2,
error S024 is returned.
Method processing
finishes when the file
generation request
is output. Processing
completion notification is
provided via an event.
Related event:
SaveJobFileEnd
Loads a job
file
Method processing
finishes when the file
loading request is output.
Processing completion
notification is provided
via an event.
Related event:
LoadJobFileEnd
Creates a
backup file
FileName: If the
extension is not mab2,
error S024 is returned.
Method processing
finishes when the backup
file generation request
is output. Processing
completion notification is
provided via an event.
Related event:
BackupAllSettingEnd
Restores
settings from
a backup file
Method processing
finishes when the request
to restore settings from
the backup file is output.
Processing completion
notification is provided
via an event.
Related event:
RestoreAllSettingEnd
B: Use the bits to specify
the additional targets to
restore. (ON bits indicate
targets to restore. Bits
are set to 0 by default.)
Bit 0: Ethernet settings
Bit 1: Nickname
Bit 2: User information
Bit 3: OPC UA settings
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
1. Return value
<Response>: String
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
4-21
4
OPC UA
2
17019
Affiliated object
OPC UA Server Function
Name Node
Space ID
2
17032
Affiliated object
FileOperation
Item
InitializeAllSetting
4
Argument
<Value.Name>*1
A. Initialization
range <Type>:
InitializeSettingType
Return value
<Value.Name>
*2, *3
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
Overview
Initializes
settings
Supplemental
explanation
Method processing
finishes when the
initialization request is
output. Depending on
the initialization contents,
processing completion
notification is provided
via an event.
Related event:
InitializeAllSettingEnd
OPC UA
B,C: Convert the local
time to UTC and enter
this value.
E. FileName: If the
extension is not mlog,
error S024 is returned.
Method processing
finishes when the
save request is output.
Processing completion
notification is provided
via an event.
Related event:
SaveMLogFileEnd
2
17033
FileOperation
SaveMLogFile
A. Acquire all
remaining data
<Entire Period>:
Boolean
B. Start time
<From>:
DateTime
C. End time
<To>: DateTime
D. Do not
acquire images
<IgnoreImages>:
Boolean
E. File name
<FileName>:
String
2
18001
JobFiles
CreateDirectory
A. Directory name
<DirectoryName>:
String
1. Node ID of
created directory
<DirectoryNodeId>:
NodeId
CreateFile
A. File name
(including extension)
<FileName>: String
B. Whether to
open created file
<RequestFileOpen>:
Boolean
1. Node ID of created file
<FileNodeId>: NodeId
2. File handle
<FileHandle>: UInt32
Creates a file
If the extension is not
supported, an error is
returned. The file handle
is used when calling
FileType node Methods.
Delete
A. File name
(including
extension)
<ObjectToDelete>:
NodeId
None
Deletes a file
If the file cannot be
deleted, such as because
it is in use, an error is
returned.
1. New node ID (after
moving or copying)
<NewNodeId>: NodeId
Moves or
copies a file
Files can only be moved
(renamed) or copied in
the same directory. When
renaming a file, it is not
possible to leave the
order of the characters
unchanged and
merely switch between
uppercase and lowercase
characters.
2
2
18002
18003
JobFiles
JobFiles
1. Success/failure
<Succeeded>: Boolean
2. Error code
<ErrorCode>: String
Saves the
history file
Creates a
directory
Not used.*4
• When the controller
logging settings are
used to set USB memory
as the destination for
saving the file, data is
acquired from the USB
memory. (Data saved to
USB memory cannot be
acquired as an MLOG file
in Marking Builder Plus.)
• Saving may fail if the
amount of data to acquire
is large. In this situation,
reduce the amount of
data by configuring
the settings to prevent
acquisition of images or
by shortening the data
acquisition period.
2
18004
JobFiles
MoveOrCopy
A. Node ID to move
<ObjectToMoveOrCopy>:
NodeId
B. Node ID of the
directory to move to
<TargetDirectory>:
NodeId
C. Whether to copy the
file <CreateCopy>:
Boolean
D. New name
<NewName>: String
2
18005
LogoFiles
CreateDirectory
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Creates a
directory
The same as the JobFiles
object
2
18006
LogoFiles
CreateFile
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Creates a file
The same as the JobFiles
object
4-22
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
OPC UA Server Function
Name Node
Space ID
Affiliated object
Item
Argument
<Value.Name>*1
Return value
<Value.Name>
*2, *3
Overview
Supplemental
explanation
18007
LogoFiles
Delete
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Deletes a file
The same as the JobFiles
object
2
18008
LogoFiles
MoveOrCopy
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Moves or
copies a file
The same as the JobFiles
object
2
18009
CustomCharacterFiles
CreateDirectory
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Creates a
directory
The same as the JobFiles
object
2
18010
CustomCharacterFiles
CreateFile
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Creates a file
The same as the JobFiles
object
2
18011
CustomCharacterFiles
Delete
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Deletes a file
The same as the JobFiles
object
2
18012
CustomCharacterFiles
MoveOrCopy
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Moves or
copies a file
The same as the JobFiles
object
2
18013
Z-mapFiles
CreateDirectory
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Creates a
directory
The same as the JobFiles
object
2
18014
Z-mapFiles
CreateFile
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Creates a file
The same as the JobFiles
object
2
18015
Z-mapFiles
Delete
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Deletes a file
The same as the JobFiles
object
2
18016
Z-mapFiles
MoveOrCopy
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Moves or
copies a file
The same as the JobFiles
object
2
18017
FontFiles
CreateDirectory
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Creates a
directory
The same as the JobFiles
object
2
18018
FontFiles
CreateFile
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Creates a file
The same as the JobFiles
object
2
18019
FontFiles
Delete
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Deletes a file
The same as the JobFiles
object
2
18020
FontFiles
MoveOrCopy
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Moves or
copies a file
The same as the JobFiles
object
2
18021
BackupFiles
CreateDirectory
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Creates a
directory
The same as the JobFiles
object
2
18022
BackupFiles
CreateFile
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Creates a file
The same as the JobFiles
object
2
18023
BackupFiles
Delete
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Deletes a file
The same as the JobFiles
object
2
18024
BackupFiles
MoveOrCopy
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Moves or
copies a file
The same as the JobFiles
object
2
18025
MLogFiles
CreateDirectory
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Creates a
directory
The same as the JobFiles
object
2
18026
MLogFiles
CreateFile
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Creates a file
Not used. (Files can
only be created with
SaveMLogFile().) *4
2
18027
MLogFiles
Delete
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Deletes a file
The same as the JobFiles
object
2
18028
MLogFiles
MoveOrCopy
The same as the
JobFiles object
The same as the JobFiles
object
Moves or
copies a file
The same as the JobFiles
object
A. OR calculation of the
bits
Bit 0: Open loadable file
Bit 1: Open writable file
Bit 2: Delete existing data
and open file
Bit 3: Open file in
appending mode
The file handle is used
when calling other
Methods.
2
Each FileType node
Open
A. Mode <Mode>:
Byte
1. File handle
<FileHandle>: UInt32
Opens a file
2
Each FileType node
Close
A. File handle
<FileHandle>:
UInt32
None
Closes the
file
Read
A. File handle
<FileHandle>:
UInt32
B. Length to load
<Length>: Int32
1. Loaded data <Data>:
ByteString
Reads file
data
2
Each FileType node
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
4-23
4
OPC UA
2
OPC UA Server Function
Name Node
Space ID
2
Each FileType node
2
Each FileType node
2
4
Affiliated object
Each FileType node
Return value
<Value.Name>
*2, *3
Argument
<Value.Name>*1
Item
Overview
Write
A. File handle
<FileHandle>:
UInt32
B. Data to
write <Data>:
ByteString
None
Writes data
to the file
GetPosition
A. File handle
<FileHandle>:
UInt32
1. Current file position
<Position>: UInt64
Acquires
the current
position for
file reading/
writing
SetPosition
A. File handle
<FileHandle>:
UInt32
B. Current
file position
<Position>:
UInt64
None
Sets the
current
position for
file reading/
writing
Supplemental
explanation
If a value larger than the
file size is specified with
B, the position is set to
the end of the file.
OPC UA
*1 When specifying a file name to execute a Method, the Marking Builder Plus or laser marker controller file name restrictions are applied.
File name: Up to 100 characters, including the extension. When the file name is expressed in UTF-16, strings that use surrogate pairs cannot be used.
Prohibited characters: #%\/:;,.*?" <>| (half-width space) (full-width space)
*2 Success: TRUE, failure: FALSE.
*3 Error codes only take on a value when a failure occurs. They are blank when the operation is successful.
*4 In terms of the structure, CreateDirectory under JobFiles, LogoFiles, CustomCharacterFiles, Z-mapFiles, BackupFiles, and MLogFiles and CreateFile
under MLogFiles exist but are not used.
If you call these Methods, a BadNotSupported error will be returned, and the operation will not be recorded in the communication history.
„ Event
NameSpace
Node
ID
-
-
-
-
Affiliated object
Server
Server
Item
Notification data
<element name in event>
Overview
Supplemental explanation*4
MarkingStart
None
Issued at the start of
marking (marking, test
marking, and laser
inspection)*1
Event type: BaseEventType
MarkingEnd
A. Success/
failure
<Succeeded>:
Boolean
B. Error code
<ErrorCode>:
String
Issued at the completion
of marking (marking,
test marking, and laser
inspection)*1
Event type:
OperationResultEventType
Issued at the completion
of the marking workflow
(marking, test marking, and
single instance of guide
laser marking)*2
Event type:
OperationResultEventType
-
-
Server
MarkingWorkflowEnd
A. Success/
failure
<Succeeded>:
Boolean
B. Error code
<ErrorCode>:
String
-
-
Server
GuideLaserMarkingStart
None
Issued at the start of guide
laser marking (guide laser
marking and distance
pointer)*3
Event type: BaseEventType
GuideLaserMarkingEnd
A. Success/
failure
<Succeeded>:
Boolean
B. Error code
<ErrorCode>:
String
Issued at the completion of
guide laser marking (guide
laser marking and distance
pointer)*3
Event type:
OperationResultEventType
2DCodeReadingStart
None
Issued at the start of
2D code reading (2D
code reading process
in the workflow and
reading operation via
Marking Builder Plus or
communication)
Event type: BaseEventType
2DCodeReadingEnd
A. Success/
failure
<Succeeded>:
Boolean
B. Error code
<ErrorCode>:
String
Issued at the completion
of 2D code reading (2D
code reading process
in the workflow and
reading operation via
Marking Builder Plus or
communication)
Event type:
OperationResultEventType
-
-
-
4-24
-
-
-
Server
Server
Server
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
OPC UA Server Function
NameSpace
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Affiliated object
Server
Server
Server
Server
Server
Server
Server
Server
Server
Server
Notification data
<element name in event>
Overview
Supplemental explanation*4
None
Issued at the start of
deployment processing for
marking settings (changing
the job, changing the
current setting contents,
advance deployment of
job files, and changing the
controller settings)
Event type: BaseEventType
None
Issued at the completion of
deployment processing for
marking settings (changing
the job, changing the
current setting contents,
advance deployment of
job files, and changing the
controller settings)
Event type: BaseEventType
WindowCheckStart
None
Issued at the start of lens
inspection (only at startup
and during maintenance,
not issued in workflows)
Event type: BaseEventType
WindowCheckEnd
A. Success/
failure
<Succeeded>:
Boolean
B. Error code
<ErrorCode>:
String
Issued at the completion
of lens inspection (only
at startup and during
maintenance, not issued in
workflows)
Event type:
OperationResultEventType
SaveJobFileEnd
A. Success/
failure
<Succeeded>:
Boolean
B. Error code
<ErrorCode>:
String
Issued at the completion of
SaveJobFile processing
Event type:
OperationResultEventType
LoadJobFileEnd
A. Success/
failure
<Succeeded>:
Boolean
B. Error code
<ErrorCode>:
String
Issued at the completion of
LoadJobFile processing
Event type:
OperationResultEventType
BackupAllSettingEnd
A. Success/
failure
<Succeeded>:
Boolean
B. Error code
<ErrorCode>:
String
Issued at the completion
of BackupAllSettings
processing
Event type:
OperationResultEventType
RestoreAllSettingEnd
A. Success/
failure
<Succeeded>:
Boolean
B. Error code
<ErrorCode>:
String
Issued at the completion
of RestoreAllSettings
processing
Event type:
OperationResultEventType
InitializeAllSettingEnd
A. Success/
failure
<Succeeded>:
Boolean
B. Error code
<ErrorCode>:
String
Issued at the completion
of InitializeAllSettings
processing
Event type:
OperationResultEventType
SaveMLogFileEnd
A. Success/
failure
<Succeeded>:
Boolean
B. Error code
<ErrorCode>:
String
Issued at the completion of
SaveMLogFile processing
Event type:
OperationResultEventType*5
Item
ExpansionStart
ExpansionEnd
*1 This event is issued multiple times during continuous marking. It is issued every time for the tracking of moving marking marking.
*2 This event is only issued once during continuous marking. It is not issued during moving marking.
*3 This event is issued each time continuous marking is set or the tracking of moving marking occurs during one instance of guide laser marking.
*4In addition to the BaseEventType, there is also the OperationResultEventType, which returns the success/failure of the operation and the error code in the
case of failure.
*5 This event is not issued when a request is made from Marking Builder Plus.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
4-25
4
OPC UA
-
Node
ID
OPC UA Server Function
Depending on the sampling cycle setting and the operation status of the laser marker, the updating of Variables and the issuing of
Events may occur later than the operations of the actual laser marker.
Alarms & conditions
These are issued when an error or warning occurs or an error is reset.
With the MD-X2000 Series, the following Node is provided as the A&C function.
Error Condition (ns=2, i=20001)(DiscreteAlarmType)
The Error Condition node notifies the user of error and warning states with the Severity and Message contents.
To monitor, register a ServerNode to a Subscription.
* Only the T000 terminal block error is targeted by the A&C function.
4
OPC UA
4-26
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
OPC UA Server Function
Control examples
„ Sequence example 1: Transfer the new job file myjob.ma2 and load this file as the laser marker job.
OPC UA client
Laser marker
1-1 Call the CreateFile Method of the JobFiles node.
(FileName: myjob.ma2, RequestFileOpen: true)
1-2 Acquire the execution result (FileNodeId, FileHandle).
Job file
Create/open
2-1 Call the Write Method of the FileType node of the acquired FileNodeId.*1
(FileHandle: value acquired in step 1-2, Data: job file data array)
Write
2-2 Acquire the execution result.
myjob.ma2
3-1 Call the Close Method of the FileType node of the acquired FileNodeId.
(FileHandle: value acquired in step 1-2)
*1If an error occurs during
OPC UA communication
because the file size is
too large, separate the
file into multiple transfer
operations (call Write
multiple times).
Close
Load
4
3-2 Acquire the execution result.
OPC UA
Job data in
memory
4-1 Call the LoadJobFile Method of the FileOperation node.
(JobNo: job number to read, FileName: myjob.ma2)
4-1 Acquire the execution result (loading and deployment processing are performed asynchronously).
5 Use a LoadJobFileEnd Event to provide notification of the result.*2
6 Use an ExpansionEnd Event to provide notification of deployment completion.*3
7-1 Call the Delete Method of the JobFiles node.*4
(ObjectToDelete: FileNodeId acquired in step 1-2)
7-2 Acquire the execution result.
*2
If the Event cannot be acquired, you can use the
LoadJobFileResult Variable in advance to detect the
completion.
*3When loaded into the current job number or the advance
deployment target job number, deployment processing
is executed, and an event is issued.
(An ExpansionStart Event is also issued at the start.)
The result can also be acquired with the
LoadJobFileResult Variable.
*4 Because files take up space in the built-in memory, it is
recommended to use the Delete Method to delete files
that are no longer used.
„ Sequence example 2: Read out laser marker job data (No. 0000; the temporary file name is markerjob.ma2).
OPC UA client
Laser marker
1-1 Call the SaveJobFile Method of the FileOperation node.
(JobNo: 0, FileName: markerjob.ma2)
1-2 Acquire the execution result (save processing is performed asynchronously).
Job data in
memory
2 Use a SaveJobFileEnd Event to provide notification of the result.
The file is created in internal memory.
Also, a markerjob.ma2 node is created
under the BackUpFiles node.
Node ID:
ns=2;s=LaserMarker/FileOperation/
BackupFiles/makerjob.ma2
3 Read the Size Variable (file size) of the markerjob.ma2 node.
4-1 Call the Open Method of the markerjob.ma2 node.
(To open in reading mode, specify Mode: 1.)
Open
4-2 Acquire the execution result (FileHandle).
5-1 Call the Read Method of the markerjob.ma2 node.*1
(FileHandle: value acquired in step 4-2, Length: file size acquired in step 3)
markerjob.ma2
Read
*1If an error occurs during OPC UA
communication because the file size
is too large, separate the file into
multiple transfer operations (call
Read multiple times).
5-2 Acquire the execution result (Data).
Close
6-1 Call the Close Method of the markerjob.ma2 node.
(FileHandle: value acquired in step 1-2)
Job file
6-2 Acquire the execution result.
7-1 Call the Delete Method of the JobFiles node.*2
(ObjectToDelete: NodeId of the markerjob.ma2 node)
*2
ecause files take up space in the built-in memory, it is
B
recommended to use the Delete Method to delete files
that are no longer used.
7-2 Acquire the execution result.
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
4-27
OPC UA Server Function
„ Sequence example 3: Change the job number (No. 1000 → No. 1001) and the strings (block
1 = “ABCDE,” block 2 = “12345”).
OPC UA client
Laser marker
1-1 Call the SetCurrentJobNo Method of the JobOperation node.
(JobNo: 1001)
1-2 Acquire the execution result.
2 Use an ExpansionEnd Event to provide notification of deployment completion.*1
3-1 Call the StartJobEdit Method of the JobOperation node.*2
(JobNo: 1001)
*1An ExpansionStart Event is also issued at the start of
deployment processing.
If the Event cannot be acquired, use the status, such as
the ReadyStatus Variable, to detect completion.
*2From StartJobEdit to EndJobEdit, deployment processing
is not carried out even if the string is changed.
3-2 Acquire the execution result.
4-1 Call the SetSettingString Method of the JobOperation node.
(JobNo: 1001, BlockNo: 1, SettingString: ABCDE)
4
Setting update
4-2 Acquire the execution result.
OPC UA
Setting
update
5-1 Call the SetSettingString Method of the JobOperation node.
(JobNo: 1001, BlockNo: 2, SettingString: 12345)
Job data in
memory
Load and
deploy.
5-2 Acquire the execution result.
Deployment
processing
6-1 Call the EndJobEdit Method of the JobOperation node.
6-2 Acquire the execution result.
7 Use an ExpansionEnd Event to provide notification of deployment completion.*1
„ Sequence example 4: Apply triggers from the PLC to acquire the result after marking completion.
OPC UA client
Laser marker
PLC
1 Apply trigger from terminal block.
2 Use a MarkingStart Event to provide notification of marking starting.
3 Use a MarkingEnd Event to provide
notification of the completion of laser marking.
(Laser marking processing)
If the 2D code reader function is enabled, 2DCodeReadingStart
and 2DCodeReadingEnd Events are issued.
4 Use a MarkingWorkflowEnd Event to provide
notification of workflow completion.*1
*1
If the Event cannot be acquired, use the
MarkingCompleteStatus, 2DCodeReadBusyStatus,
MarkingConfirmationBusyStatus, and
WindowCheckBusyStatus Variables to detect the workflow
completion.
5 Read the Variable for acquiring the result.*2
*2
he workflow execution result is applied to the Variable
T
under the OperationResult node.
For details, refer to the Variable explanation.
6-1 Call the Method for acquiring the result.*3
*3
ou can use GetXYTrackingResult, GetZTrackingResult,
Y
and GetCameraImage Methods to acquire the tracking
result and image.
For details, refer to the Method explanation.
*4
etermine the timing after marking completion so the
D
next marking trigger is applied after the acquisition of the
required data finishes.
(Because the previous result is cleared when the marking
trigger is applied.)
6-2 Result acquisition
1' Apply trigger from terminal block.*4
4-28
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
OPC UA Server Function
Communication history
The history of OPC UA communication can be recorded in the communication history, which can be checked using Marking Builder Plus.
z Variable, Method, and Event communication history examples
Write for a Variable
Command:
Response:
Write_<Variable name>, <value>
Write_<Variable name>, <result: OK/Failed>
Method (normal)
Command: <Method name>, <argument 1>, <argument 2>, ...
Response (success): <Method name>, OK, <return value 1>, <return value 2>, ...
Response (failure):
<Method name>, Failed, <error code>
Method (FileType node)
Command: <File name>, <Method name>, <argument 1>, <argument 2>, ...
Response (success): <File name>, <Method name>, OK, <return value 1>, <return value 2>, ...
Response (failure):
<File name>, <Method name>, Failed, <error code>
Event (notification only)
Event:
Event (including result data)
Event (success):
Event (failure):
<Event name>
<Event name>, OK
<Event name>, Failed, <error code>
4
If the controller is equipped with two LAN ports, both ports can receive events, so the IP address will be 0.0.0.0 in the event
communication history.
OPC UA
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -
4-29
Revision history
Revision history
Edition number
May 2021
Official release
December 2021
2nd revision
1st edition
April 2022
2nd revision
2nd edition
December 2022
2nd revision
3rd edition
July 2023
3rd revision
1st edition
December 2023
3rd revision
2nd edition
Revision details
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS
(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year
from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples were used
merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent that the Products would
necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE
with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by
KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any
Products found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer,
including but not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification,
misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or
outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only suggestions, and it
is Buyer’s responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyer’s intended use. KEYENCE will not be
responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples (“Products/Samples”) supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in humans,
for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications state otherwise.
Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way, KEYENCE assumes no
responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from any liability or
damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION,
LOSS OF INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE
COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY
MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS,
EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY’S
CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing
warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may not apply.
BUYER’S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:
If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide
such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information
provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.
E 1101-3
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
KEYENCE CORPORATION
1-3-14, Higashi-Nakajima, Higashi-Yodogawa-ku, Osaka, 533-8555, Japan
PHONE: +81-6-6379-2211
www.keyence.com/glb
AUSTRIA
Phone: +43 (0)2236 378266 0
FRANCE
Phone: +33 1 56 37 78 00
ITALY
Phone: +39-02-6688220
POLAND
Phone: +48 71 368 61 60
TAIWAN
Phone: +886-2-2721-1080
BELGIUM
Phone: +32 (0)15 281 222
GERMANY
Phone: +49-6102-3656-0
KOREA
Phone: +82-31-789-4300
BRAZIL
Phone: +55-11-3045-4011
HONG KONG
Phone: +852-3104-1010
MALAYSIA
Phone: +60-3-7883-2211
ROMANIA
Phone: +40 (0)269 232 808
SINGAPORE
Phone: +65-6392-1011
THAILAND
Phone: +66-2-078-1090
UK & IRELAND
Phone: +44 (0)1908-696-900
CANADA
Phone: +1-905-366-7655
HUNGARY
Phone: +36 1 802 7360
MEXICO
Phone: +52-55-8850-0100
SLOVAKIA
Phone: +421 (0)2 5939 6461
USA
Phone: +1-201-930-0100
CHINA
Phone: +86-21-3357-1001
INDIA
Phone: +91-44-4963-0900
NETHERLANDS
Phone: +31 (0)40 206 6100
SLOVENIA
Phone: +386 (0)1 4701 666
VIETNAM
Phone: +84-24-3772-5555
CZECH REPUBLIC
Phone: +420 220 184 700
INDONESIA
Phone: +62-21-2966-0120
PHILIPPINES
Phone: +63-(0)2-8981-5000
SWITZERLAND
Phone: +41 (0)43 455 77 30
A4WW1-MAN-2033
Copyright (c) 2023 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 252166GB 2123-2 H98GB Printed in Japan